one started with the -\b--\b-l\blo\bog\bgi\bin\bn option.
An _\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\br_\ba_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bv_\be shell is one started without non-option arguments and
- without the -\b-c\bc option whose standard input and output are both con-
- nected to terminals (as determined by _\bi_\bs_\ba_\bt_\bt_\by(3)), or one started with
- the -\b-i\bi option. P\bPS\bS1\b1 is set and $\b$-\b- includes i\bi if b\bba\bas\bsh\bh is interactive,
- allowing a shell script or a startup file to test this state.
+ without the -\b-c\bc option whose standard input and error are both connected
+ to terminals (as determined by _\bi_\bs_\ba_\bt_\bt_\by(3)), or one started with the -\b-i\bi
+ option. P\bPS\bS1\b1 is set and $\b$-\b- includes i\bi if b\bba\bas\bsh\bh is interactive, allowing
+ a shell script or a startup file to test this state.
The following paragraphs describe how b\bba\bas\bsh\bh executes its startup files.
If any of the files exist but cannot be read, b\bba\bas\bsh\bh reports an error.
-GNU Bash-3.0 2004 May 27 BASH(1)
+GNU Bash-3.0 2004 June 26 BASH(1)
<TITLE>BASH(1) Manual Page</TITLE>
</HEAD>
<BODY><TABLE WIDTH=100%>
-<TH ALIGN=LEFT>BASH(1)<TH ALIGN=CENTER>2004 May 27<TH ALIGN=RIGHT>BASH(1)
+<TH ALIGN=LEFT>BASH(1)<TH ALIGN=CENTER>2004 June 26<TH ALIGN=RIGHT>BASH(1)
</TABLE>
<BR><A HREF="#index">Index</A>
<HR>
<B>-c</B>
option
-whose standard input and output are
+whose standard input and error are
both connected to terminals (as determined by
<I>isatty</I>(3)),
</DL>
<HR>
This document was created by man2html from bash.1.<BR>
-Time: 01 June 2004 12:27:36 EDT
+Time: 29 June 2004 10:37:49 EDT
</BODY>
</HTML>
%!PS-Adobe-3.0
-%%Creator: groff version 1.19
-%%CreationDate: Tue Jun 1 12:27:23 2004
+%%Creator: groff version 1.18.1
+%%CreationDate: Tue Jun 29 10:37:28 2004
%%DocumentNeededResources: font Times-Roman
%%+ font Times-Bold
%%+ font Times-Italic
%%+ font Palatino-Roman
%%+ font Palatino-Italic
%%+ font Palatino-Bold
-%%DocumentSuppliedResources: procset grops 1.19 0
+%%DocumentSuppliedResources: procset grops 1.18 1
%%Pages: 64
%%PageOrder: Ascend
-%%DocumentMedia: Default 612 792 0 () ()
%%Orientation: Portrait
%%EndComments
-%%BeginDefaults
-%%PageMedia: Default
-%%EndDefaults
%%BeginProlog
-%%BeginResource: procset grops 1.19 0
+%%BeginResource: procset grops 1.18 1
/setpacking where{
pop
currentpacking
/Fr{
setrgbcolor fill
}bind def
-/setcmykcolor where{
-pop
/Fk{
setcmykcolor fill
}bind def
-}if
/Fg{
setgray fill
}bind def
/FL/fill load def
/LW/setlinewidth load def
/Cr/setrgbcolor load def
-/setcmykcolor where{
-pop
/Ck/setcmykcolor load def
-}if
/Cg/setgray load def
/RE{
findfont
/CNT countdictstack def
userdict begin
/showpage{}def
-/setpagedevice{}def
}bind def
/PEND{
clear
setpacking
}if
%%EndResource
-%%BeginFeature: *PageSize Default
-<< /PageSize [ 612 792 ] /ImagingBBox null >> setpagedevice
-%%EndFeature
%%IncludeResource: font Times-Roman
%%IncludeResource: font Times-Bold
%%IncludeResource: font Times-Italic
%%IncludeResource: font Palatino-Italic
%%IncludeResource: font Palatino-Bold
grops begin/DEFS 1 dict def DEFS begin/u{.001 mul}bind def end/RES 72
-def/PL 792 def/LS false def/ENC0[/asciicircum/asciitilde/Scaron/Zcaron
-/scaron/zcaron/Ydieresis/trademark/quotesingle/Euro/.notdef/.notdef
+def/PL 841.89 def/LS false def/ENC0[/asciicircum/asciitilde/Scaron
+/Zcaron/scaron/zcaron/Ydieresis/trademark/quotesingle/Euro/.notdef
/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef
/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef
-/.notdef/.notdef/space/exclam/quotedbl/numbersign/dollar/percent
+/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/space/exclam/quotedbl/numbersign/dollar/percent
/ampersand/quoteright/parenleft/parenright/asterisk/plus/comma/hyphen
/period/slash/zero/one/two/three/four/five/six/seven/eight/nine/colon
/semicolon/less/equal/greater/question/at/A/B/C/D/E/F/G/H/I/J/K/L/M/N/O
144 686.4 Q .3 -.15(ve \()-.25 H(see).15 E F4(INV)2.5 E(OCA)-.405 E
(TION)-.855 E F0(belo)2.25 E(w\).)-.25 E F2(\255\255login)108 703.2 Q F0
(Equi)144 715.2 Q -.25(va)-.25 G(lent to).25 E F2<ad6c>2.5 E F0(.)A
-(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(1)202.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(1)202.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 2 2
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
108 451.2 Q F2(inter)2.814 E(active)-.15 E F0 .314
(shell is one started without non-option ar)2.814 F .315
(guments and without the)-.18 F F1<ad63>2.815 E F0 .315
-(option whose standard)2.815 F 1.14
-(input and output are both connected to terminals \(as determined by)108
-463.2 R F2(isatty)3.639 E F0 1.139(\(3\)\), or one started with the).32
-F F1<ad69>3.639 E F0(option.)108 475.2 Q F3(PS1)5.289 E F0 .289
-(is set and)2.539 F F1<24ad>2.789 E F0(includes)2.789 E F1(i)2.789 E F0
-(if)2.789 E F1(bash)2.789 E F0 .289(is interacti)2.789 F -.15(ve)-.25 G
-2.789(,a).15 G(llo)-2.789 E .29
-(wing a shell script or a startup \214le to test this)-.25 F(state.)108
-487.2 Q .033(The follo)108 504 R .033(wing paragraphs describe ho)-.25 F
-(w)-.25 E F1(bash)2.532 E F0 -.15(exe)2.532 G .032
-(cutes its startup \214les.).15 F .032(If an)5.032 F 2.532(yo)-.15 G
-2.532(ft)-2.532 G .032(he \214les e)-2.532 F .032(xist b)-.15 F .032
-(ut cannot be)-.2 F(read,)108 516 Q F1(bash)3.085 E F0 .585
-(reports an error)3.085 F 5.585(.T)-.55 G .585(ildes are e)-5.935 F .586
-(xpanded in \214le names as described belo)-.15 F 3.086(wu)-.25 G(nder)
--3.086 E F1 -.18(Ti)3.086 G .586(lde Expansion).18 F F0(in the)108 528 Q
-F3(EXP)2.5 E(ANSION)-.666 E F0(section.)2.25 E(When)108 544.8 Q F1(bash)
-2.896 E F0 .396(is in)2.896 F -.2(vo)-.4 G -.1(ke).2 G 2.896(da).1 G
-2.896(sa)-2.896 G 2.896(ni)-2.896 G(nteracti)-2.896 E .696 -.15(ve l)
+(option whose standard)2.815 F 1.5
+(input and error are both connected to terminals \(as determined by)108
+463.2 R F2(isatty)4 E F0 1.5(\(3\)\), or one started with the).32 F F1
+<ad69>4 E F0(option.)108 475.2 Q F3(PS1)5.289 E F0 .289(is set and)2.539
+F F1<24ad>2.789 E F0(includes)2.789 E F1(i)2.789 E F0(if)2.789 E F1
+(bash)2.789 E F0 .289(is interacti)2.789 F -.15(ve)-.25 G 2.789(,a).15 G
+(llo)-2.789 E .29(wing a shell script or a startup \214le to test this)
+-.25 F(state.)108 487.2 Q .033(The follo)108 504 R .033
+(wing paragraphs describe ho)-.25 F(w)-.25 E F1(bash)2.532 E F0 -.15
+(exe)2.532 G .032(cutes its startup \214les.).15 F .032(If an)5.032 F
+2.532(yo)-.15 G 2.532(ft)-2.532 G .032(he \214les e)-2.532 F .032
+(xist b)-.15 F .032(ut cannot be)-.2 F(read,)108 516 Q F1(bash)3.085 E
+F0 .585(reports an error)3.085 F 5.585(.T)-.55 G .585(ildes are e)-5.935
+F .586(xpanded in \214le names as described belo)-.15 F 3.086(wu)-.25 G
+(nder)-3.086 E F1 -.18(Ti)3.086 G .586(lde Expansion).18 F F0(in the)108
+528 Q F3(EXP)2.5 E(ANSION)-.666 E F0(section.)2.25 E(When)108 544.8 Q F1
+(bash)2.896 E F0 .396(is in)2.896 F -.2(vo)-.4 G -.1(ke).2 G 2.896(da).1
+G 2.896(sa)-2.896 G 2.896(ni)-2.896 G(nteracti)-2.896 E .696 -.15(ve l)
-.25 H .396(ogin shell, or as a non-interacti).15 F .695 -.15(ve s)-.25
H .395(hell with the).15 F F1(\255\255login)2.895 E F0 .395(option, it)
2.895 F 1.333(\214rst reads and e)108 556.8 R -.15(xe)-.15 G 1.333
108 727.2 S 2.5(tt).2 G(he v)-2.5 E(alue of the)-.25 E F3 -.666(PA)2.5 G
(TH)-.189 E F0 -.25(va)2.25 G
(riable is not used to search for the \214le name.).25 E(GNU Bash-3.0)72
-768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(2)202.335 E 0 Cg EP
+768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(2)202.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 3 3
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
F F1(|)2.92 E F0 5.42(.T)C .42(he format for a pipeline)-5.42 F(is:)108
703.2 Q([)144 720 Q F1(time)A F0([)2.5 E F1<ad70>A F0(]] [ ! ])A F2
(command)2.5 E F0([)2.5 E F1(|)2.5 E F2(command2)2.5 E F0(... ])2.5 E
-(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(3)202.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(3)202.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 4 4
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
F(SIONS)144 727.2 Q F5(.)A F0 -.8(Wo)5.633 G 1.133
(rd splitting and pathname e).8 F 1.133
(xpansion are not performed on the w)-.15 F 1.133(ords between the)-.1 F
-F3([[)3.632 E F0(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(4)202.335 E
-0 Cg EP
+F3([[)3.632 E F0(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(4)202.335
+E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 5 5
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(The line read is sa)5.759 F -.15(ve)-.2 G 3.26(di).15 G 3.26(nt)-3.26 G
.76(he v)-3.26 F(ariable)-.25 E F1(REPL)3.26 E(Y)-.92 E F0 5.76(.T)C(he)
-5.76 E F2(list)3.35 E F0 .76(is e)3.94 F -.15(xe)-.15 G .76
-(cuted after).15 F(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(5)202.335
-E 0 Cg EP
+(cuted after).15 F(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(5)
+202.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 6 6
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
G(he)-2.974 E F2 .474(escape c)2.974 F(har)-.15 E(acter)-.15 E F0 5.474
(.I).73 G 2.974(tp)-5.474 G(reserv)-2.974 E .474(es the literal v)-.15 F
.474(alue of the ne)-.25 F .474(xt character that)-.15 F(GNU Bash-3.0)72
-768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(6)202.335 E 0 Cg EP
+768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(6)202.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 7 7
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
5.706 E .445(tional parameters are assigned from the shell')108 729.6 R
2.944(sa)-.55 G -.18(rg)-2.944 G .444(uments when it is in).18 F -.2(vo)
-.4 G -.1(ke).2 G .444(d, and may be reassigned using).1 F(GNU Bash-3.0)
-72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(7)202.335 E 0 Cg EP
+72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(7)202.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 8 8
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
F F1(${FUNCN)144 727.2 Q(AME[)-.2 E F3 8.951($i + 1)B F1(]})A F0 -.1(wa)
11.451 G 11.451(sc).1 G 11.451(alled. The)-11.451 F 8.951
(corresponding source \214le name is)11.451 F(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q
-(2004 May 27)147.345 E(8)202.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(2004 June 26)147.345 E(8)202.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 9 9
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
5.35(.I)-.65 G(f)-5.35 E F3(DIRST)2.85 E -.495(AC)-.81 G(K).495 E F0 .35
(is unset, it loses its special properties, e)2.6 F -.15(ve)-.25 G 2.85
(ni).15 G(f)-2.85 E(it is subsequently reset.)144 723.6 Q(GNU Bash-3.0)
-72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(9)202.335 E 0 Cg EP
+72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(9)202.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 10 10
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
4.51 E F2(RANDOM)2.51 E F0(is)2.26 E
(unset, it loses its special properties, e)144 720 Q -.15(ve)-.25 G 2.5
(ni).15 G 2.5(fi)-2.5 G 2.5(ti)-2.5 G 2.5(ss)-2.5 G(ubsequently reset.)
--2.5 E(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(10)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+-2.5 E(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(10)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 11 11
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(all pre)144 724.8 R .698
(vious lines matching the current line to be remo)-.25 F -.15(ve)-.15 G
3.198(df).15 G .698(rom the history list before that line is)-3.198 F
-(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(11)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(11)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 12 12
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(rrides the v).15 F .764(alue of)-.25 F F1(LANG)3.264 E F0 .764(and an)
3.264 F 3.264(yo)-.15 G(ther)-3.264 E F1(LC_)3.264 E F0 -.25(va)3.264 G
.764(riable specifying a locale cate-).25 F(gory)144 696 Q(.)-.65 E
-(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(12)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(12)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 13 13
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
E F0 1.226(is replicated multiple)3.476 F(times, as necessary)144 696 Q
2.5(,t)-.65 G 2.5(oi)-2.5 G(ndicate multiple le)-2.5 E -.15(ve)-.25 G
(ls of indirection.).15 E(The def)5 E(ault is `)-.1 E(`)-.74 E F1(+)A F0
--.74('')2.5 G(.).74 E(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(13)
+-.74('')2.5 G(.).74 E(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(13)
197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 14 14
%%BeginPageSetup
(skipped for the remaining w)144 682.8 R .38(ords on the line.)-.1 F
.379(It does not necessarily cause the shell parser to treat)5.379 F
(the rest of the line as a comment.)144 694.8 Q(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q
-(2004 May 27)147.345 E(14)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(2004 June 26)147.345 E(14)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 15 15
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(xpression e)-.15 F .401(xpands to each number between)-.15 F F2(x)2.901
E F0(and)2.902 E F2(y)2.902 E F0 2.902(,i)C(nclusi)-2.902 E -.15(ve)-.25
G 5.402(.W).15 G .402(hen characters)-5.402 F(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q
-(2004 May 27)147.345 E(15)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(2004 June 26)147.345 E(15)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 16 16
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(ameter)-.15 E F0 .264(is follo)3.494 F .264
(wed by a character which is not to)-.25 F
(be interpreted as part of its name.)144 729.6 Q(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q
-(2004 May 27)147.345 E(16)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(2004 June 26)147.345 E(16)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 17 17
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
F1(par)145.25 724.8 Q(ameter)-.15 E F0 .607
(with the shortest matching pattern \(the `)3.838 F(`)-.74 E F2(#)A F0
2.087 -.74('' c)D .607(ase\) or the longest matching pattern \(the).74 F
-(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(17)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(17)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 18 18
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(go parameter e)-.18 F 1.074(xpansion, string e)-.15 F 1.074
(xpansion, command)-.15 F(substitution, and quote remo)108 729.6 Q -.25
(va)-.15 G 2.5(l. Arithmetic).25 F -.15(ex)2.5 G
-(pansions may be nested.).15 E(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345
-E(18)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(pansions may be nested.).15 E(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)
+147.345 E(18)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 19 19
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(escaping backslash is discarded when matching.)108 708 R .576
(The special pattern characters must be quoted if the)5.576 F 3.076(ya)
-.15 G(re)-3.076 E(to be matched literally)108 720 Q(.)-.65 E
-(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(19)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(19)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 20 20
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(ywhere within a)-.15 F F2 .774(simple command)3.614 F F0(or)4.044 E
(may follo)108 601.2 Q 2.5(wa)-.25 G F2(command)A F0 5(.R).77 G
(edirections are processed in the order the)-5 E 2.5(ya)-.15 G(ppear)
--2.5 E 2.5(,f)-.4 G(rom left to right.)-2.5 E .283(In the follo)108 618
-R .284(wing descriptions, if the \214le descriptor number is omitted, a\
-nd the \214rst character of the redirect-)-.25 F .513(ion operator is)
-108 630 R F1(<)3.012 E F0 3.012(,t)C .512
+-2.5 E 2.5(,f)-.4 G(rom left to right.)-2.5 E .447(In the follo)108 618
+R .447(wing descriptions, if the \214le descriptor number is omitted, a\
+nd the \214rst character of the redirec-)-.25 F .366(tion operator is)
+108 630 R F1(<)2.866 E F0 2.866(,t)C .366
(he redirection refers to the standard input \(\214le descriptor 0\).)
--3.012 F .512(If the \214rst character of the)5.512 F
+-2.866 F .365(If the \214rst character of the)5.366 F
(redirection operator is)108 642 Q F1(>)2.5 E F0 2.5(,t)C
(he redirection refers to the standard output \(\214le descriptor 1\).)
-2.5 E .824(The w)108 658.8 R .824(ord follo)-.1 F .824
(reports an error)108 694.8 Q(.)-.55 E
(Note that the order of redirections is signi\214cant.)108 711.6 Q -.15
(Fo)5 G 2.5(re).15 G(xample, the command)-2.65 E(ls)144 728.4 Q F1(>)2.5
-E F0(dirlist 2)2.5 E F1(>&)A F0(1)A(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)
+E F0(dirlist 2)2.5 E F1(>&)A F0(1)A(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)
147.345 E(20)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 21 21
%%BeginPageSetup
(If the redirection operator is)108 525.6 R F2(>)2.654 E F0 2.654(,a)C
.154(nd the)-2.654 F F2(noclob)2.654 E(ber)-.1 E F0 .154(option to the)
2.654 F F2(set)2.655 E F0 -.2(bu)2.655 G .155
-(iltin has been enabled, the redirection).2 F .658(will f)108 537.6 R
-.658(ail if the \214le whose name results from the e)-.1 F .658
-(xpansion of)-.15 F F1(wor)3.158 E(d)-.37 E F0 -.15(ex)3.158 G .657
-(ists and is a re).15 F .657(gular \214le.)-.15 F .657(If the redi-)
-5.657 F .408(rection operator is)108 549.6 R F2(>|)2.909 E F0 2.909(,o)C
-2.909(rt)-2.909 G .409(he redirection operator is)-2.909 F F2(>)2.909 E
-F0 .409(and the)2.909 F F2(noclob)2.909 E(ber)-.1 E F0 .409
-(option to the)2.909 F F2(set)2.909 E F0 -.2(bu)2.909 G .409
-(iltin command).2 F(is not enabled, the redirection is attempted e)108
+(iltin has been enabled, the redirection).2 F .077(will f)108 537.6 R
+.076(ail if the \214le whose name results from the e)-.1 F .076
+(xpansion of)-.15 F F1(wor)2.576 E(d)-.37 E F0 -.15(ex)2.576 G .076
+(ists and is a re).15 F .076(gular \214le.)-.15 F .076(If the redirec-)
+5.076 F .547(tion operator is)108 549.6 R F2(>|)3.047 E F0 3.047(,o)C
+3.047(rt)-3.047 G .547(he redirection operator is)-3.047 F F2(>)3.047 E
+F0 .547(and the)3.047 F F2(noclob)3.047 E(ber)-.1 E F0 .548
+(option to the)3.048 F F2(set)3.048 E F0 -.2(bu)3.048 G .548
+(iltin command is).2 F(not enabled, the redirection is attempted e)108
561.6 Q -.15(ve)-.25 G 2.5(ni).15 G 2.5(ft)-2.5 G(he \214le named by)
-2.5 E F1(wor)2.5 E(d)-.37 E F0 -.15(ex)2.5 G(ists.).15 E F2 -.25(Ap)87
578.4 S(pending Redir).25 E(ected Output)-.18 E F0 .642
(xpansion of)-.15 E F1(wor)2.84 E(d)-.37 E F0(with this construct.)3.27
E(There are tw)108 710.4 Q 2.5(of)-.1 G
(ormats for redirecting standard output and standard error:)-2.5 E F2
-(&>)144 727.2 Q F1(wor)A(d)-.37 E F0(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)
+(&>)144 727.2 Q F1(wor)A(d)-.37 E F0(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)
147.345 E(21)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 22 22
%%BeginPageSetup
.24 G 2.785(rt)-2.785 G .286
(he standard output \(\214le descriptor 1\) if)-2.785 F F2(n)2.786 E F0
.286(is not speci-)2.786 F(\214ed.)108 717.6 Q(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q
-(2004 May 27)147.345 E(22)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(2004 June 26)147.345 E(22)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 23 23
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(alues of the positional parameters and the spe-)-.25 F(cial parameter)
108 724.8 Q F1(#)2.5 E F0(are restored to the v)2.5 E(alues the)-.25 E
2.5(yh)-.15 G(ad prior to the function')-2.5 E 2.5(se)-.55 G -.15(xe)
--2.65 G(cution.).15 E(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(23)
+-2.65 G(cution.).15 E(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(23)
197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 24 24
%%BeginPageSetup
(xpressions in parentheses are e)-.15 F -.25(va)-.25 G .235
(luated \214rst and may).25 F -.15(ove)108 724.8 S
(rride the precedence rules abo).15 E -.15(ve)-.15 G(.).15 E
-(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(24)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(24)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 25 25
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(>)2.5 E F3(string2)2.5 E F0 -.35(Tr)144 691.2 S(ue if).35 E F3(string1)
2.5 E F0(sorts after)2.5 E F3(string2)2.5 E F0(le)2.5 E
(xicographically in the current locale.)-.15 E(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q
-(2004 May 27)147.345 E(25)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(2004 June 26)147.345 E(25)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 26 26
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(gument follo)-.18 F 1.192(wing the)-.25 F 1.13
(interpreter name on the \214rst line of the program, follo)108 727.2 R
1.131(wed by the name of the program, follo)-.25 F 1.131(wed by the)-.25
-F(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(26)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+F(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(26)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 27 27
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
R 3.08(ye)-.15 G -.15(xe)-3.23 G .58
(cuted command consists of the shell').15 F 3.08(si)-.55 G .58
(nitial en)-3.08 F .58(vironment, whose v)-.4 F .58(alues may be)-.25 F
-(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(27)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(27)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 28 28
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(shell option has been set with)2.666 F F1(shopt)2.666 E F0(,)A F1(bash)
2.666 E F0 .166(sends a)2.666 F F3(SIGHUP)2.666 E F0 .166
(to all jobs when an interacti)2.416 F -.15(ve)-.25 G(login shell e)108
-549.6 Q(xits.)-.15 E .41
-(If 0 for which a trap has been set, the trap will not be e)108 566.4 R
--.15(xe)-.15 G .41(cuted until the command completes.).15 F(When)5.41 E
-F1(bash)2.91 E F0 .3(is w)108 578.4 R .3
-(aiting for an asynchronous command via the)-.1 F F1(wait)2.8 E F0 -.2
-(bu)2.8 G .3(iltin, the reception of a signal for which a trap has).2 F
-.37(been set will cause the)108 590.4 R F1(wait)2.87 E F0 -.2(bu)2.87 G
-.369(iltin to return immediately with an e).2 F .369
+549.6 Q(xits.)-.15 E .077
+(If 0for which a trap has been set, the trap will not be e)108 566.4 R
+-.15(xe)-.15 G .076(cuted until the command completes.).15 F(When)5.076
+E F1(bash)2.576 E F0(is)2.576 E -.1(wa)108 578.4 S .826
+(iting for an asynchronous command via the).1 F F1(wait)3.326 E F0 -.2
+(bu)3.326 G .826(iltin, the reception of a signal for which a trap has)
+.2 F .37(been set will cause the)108 590.4 R F1(wait)2.87 E F0 -.2(bu)
+2.87 G .369(iltin to return immediately with an e).2 F .369
(xit status greater than 128, immediately)-.15 F
(after which the trap is e)108 602.4 Q -.15(xe)-.15 G(cuted.).15 E F5
(JOB CONTR)72 619.2 Q(OL)-.329 E F2 -.25(Jo)108 631.2 S 4.567(bc).25 G
(ound)-.45 E F0 .34(\), it prints a line).77 F(that looks lik)108 696 Q
(e:)-.1 E([1] 25647)144 712.8 Q .241(indicating that this job is job nu\
mber 1 and that the process ID of the last process in the pipeline asso\
-ciated)108 729.6 R(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(28)
+ciated)108 729.6 R(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(28)
197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 29 29
%%BeginPageSetup
(the hostname up to the \214rst `.)27.66 E(')-.7 E F1(\\H)144 705.6 Q F0
(the hostname)25.44 E F1(\\j)144 717.6 Q F0
(the number of jobs currently managed by the shell)29.89 E(GNU Bash-3.0)
-72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(29)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(29)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 30 30
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(lines are ignored.)108 724.8 R .737(Lines be)5.737 F .737
(ginning with a)-.15 F F1(#)3.237 E F0 .737(are comments.)3.237 F .737
(Lines be)5.737 F .737(ginning with a)-.15 F F1($)3.237 E F0 .737
-(indicate conditional)3.237 F(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345
+(indicate conditional)3.237 F(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345
E(30)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 31 31
%%BeginPageSetup
(\\a)144 669.6 Q F0(alert \(bell\))28.22 E F2(\\b)144 681.6 Q F0
(backspace)27.66 E F2(\\d)144 693.6 Q F0(delete)27.66 E F2(\\f)144 705.6
Q F0(form feed)29.89 E F2(\\n)144 717.6 Q F0(ne)27.66 E(wline)-.25 E
-(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(31)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(31)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 32 32
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
y code attempts to place point at the same location on each history lin\
e)-3.992 F(retri)144 700.8 Q -.15(ve)-.25 G 2.5(dw).15 G(ith)-2.5 E F1
(pr)2.5 E -.15(ev)-.18 G(ious-history).15 E F0(or)2.5 E F1(next-history)
-2.5 E F0(.)A(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(32)197.335 E 0
+2.5 E F0(.)A(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(32)197.335 E 0
Cg EP
%%Page: 33 33
%%BeginPageSetup
(indings and v).15 F .096
(ariable settings to be performed as the result of tests.)-.25 F .096
(There are four parser)5.096 F(directi)108 712.8 Q -.15(ve)-.25 G 2.5
-(su).15 G(sed.)-2.5 E(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(33)
+(su).15 G(sed.)-2.5 E(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(33)
197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 34 34
%%BeginPageSetup
-2.5 E .567(Non-incremental searches read the entire search string befo\
re starting to search for matching history lines.)108 688.8 R(The searc\
h string may be typed by the user or be part of the contents of the cur\
-rent line.)108 700.8 Q(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(34)
+rent line.)108 700.8 Q(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(34)
197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 35 35
%%BeginPageSetup
-.25 E F0 .248(Search forw)144 705.6 R .249(ard through the history for\
the string of characters between the start of the current line)-.1 F
(and the point.)144 717.6 Q(This is a non-incremental search.)5 E
-(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(35)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(35)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 36 36
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(If point is at the end of the line, then this transposes the tw)144
724.8 R 3.683(oc)-.1 G 1.183(haracters before point.)-3.683 F(Ne)6.183 E
-.05(ga)-.15 G(ti).05 E -.15(ve)-.25 G(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q
-(2004 May 27)147.345 E(36)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(2004 June 26)147.345 E(36)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 37 37
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
-.1 F 2.007(wing point to the kill b)-.25 F(uf)-.2 E(fer)-.25 E 7.008
(.T)-.55 G 2.008(he w)-7.008 F 2.008(ord boundaries are the same as)-.1
F F1 -.25(fo)4.508 G -.37(r-).25 G(ward\255w)144 700.8 Q(ord)-.1 E F0(.)
-A(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(37)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+A(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(37)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 38 38
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(complete\255hostname \(M\255@\))108 693.6 Q F0
(Attempt completion on the te)144 705.6 Q
(xt before point, treating it as a hostname.)-.15 E(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768
-Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(38)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(38)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 39 39
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(vious occurrence of that character)-.25 F 6.044(.A)-.55 G(ne)-2.5 E
-.05(ga)-.15 G(ti).05 E -.15(ve)-.25 G
(count searches for subsequent occurrences.)144 705.6 Q(GNU Bash-3.0)72
-768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(39)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(39)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 40 40
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
1.344(xpansion, and pathname e)-.15 F 1.344(xpansion, as described abo)
-.15 F 1.644 -.15(ve u)-.15 H(nder).15 E F3(EXP)3.844 E(ANSION)-.666 E
/F4 9/Times-Roman@0 SF(.)A F0 1.345(The results are split)5.844 F
-(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(40)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(40)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 41 41
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
.572(wise the history \214le is o)108 724.8 R -.15(ve)-.15 G 3.073
(rwritten. If).15 F F2(HISTFILE)3.073 E F0 .573
(is unset, or if the history \214le is unwritable, the history is)2.823
-F(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(41)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+F(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(41)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 42 42
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(Refer to the current command line minus)21.97 E F4(n)2.5 E F0(.).24 E
F2(!!)108 708 Q F0(Refer to the pre)29.34 E(vious command.)-.25 E
(This is a synon)5 E(ym for `!\2551'.)-.15 E(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q
-(2004 May 27)147.345 E(42)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(2004 June 26)147.345 E(42)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 43 43
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
R .062(uiltin command documented in this section as accepting options p\
receded by)-.2 F F1<ad>108 700.8 Q F0(accepts)2.5 E F1<adad>2.5 E F0
(to signify the end of the options.)2.5 E(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q
-(2004 May 27)147.345 E(43)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(2004 June 26)147.345 E(43)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 44 44
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
-.05 G(equences bound to macros and the strings the)-2.5 E 2.5(yo)-.15 G
(utput.)-2.5 E F1<ad66>144 691.2 Q F2(\214lename)2.5 E F0(Read k)180
703.2 Q .3 -.15(ey b)-.1 H(indings from).15 E F2(\214lename)2.5 E F0(.)A
-(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(44)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(44)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 45 45
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
3.915 F 1.415(arious shell v)-.25 F 1.415(ariables set by the pro-)-.25
F(grammable completion f)144 729.6 Q(acilities, while a)-.1 E -.25(va)
-.2 G(ilable, will not ha).25 E .3 -.15(ve u)-.2 H(seful v).15 E(alues.)
--.25 E(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(45)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+-.25 E(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(45)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 46 46
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(xported shell v)-.15 E 2.5(ariables. May)-.25 F(also be speci\214ed as)
2.5 E F2<ad65>2.5 E F0(.)A F2(\214le)184 700.8 Q F0(File names.)27.22 E
(May also be speci\214ed as)5 E F2<ad66>2.5 E F0(.)A(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768
-Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(46)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(46)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 47 47
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(option will display the attrib)3.326 F .826(utes and v)-.2 F .826
(alues of each)-.25 F F3(name)3.326 E F0 5.827(.W).18 G(hen)-5.827 E F1
<ad70>3.327 E F0 .827(is used,)3.327 F(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q
-(2004 May 27)147.345 E(47)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(2004 June 26)147.345 E(47)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 48 48
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
E F0(shell)4.002 E .009
(option may be used to dynamically determine whether or not)144 720 R F1
(echo)2.509 E F0 -.15(ex)2.51 G .01(pands these escape characters).15 F
-(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(48)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(48)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 49 49
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
F .304(ariable is set to)-.25 F F2(wor)2.804 E(d)-.37 E F0(.)A F1
(export)5.304 E F0 .304(returns an e)2.804 F .303
(xit status of 0 unless an in)-.15 F -.25(va)-.4 G(lid).25 E
-(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(49)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(49)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 50 50
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
722.4 R .393(guments are encountered.)-.18 F .394(If the v)5.394 F
(ariable)-.25 E F4(OPTERR)2.894 E F0 .394
(is set to 0, no error messages)2.644 F(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q
-(2004 May 27)147.345 E(50)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(2004 June 26)147.345 E(50)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 51 51
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(not store the results in the history list.)2.975 F(Each)5.475 E F1(ar)
2.975 E(g)-.37 E F0 .475(must be quoted to disable)2.975 F
(normal history e)180 710.4 Q(xpansion.)-.15 E(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q
-(2004 May 27)147.345 E(51)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(2004 June 26)147.345 E(51)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 52 52
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(Suppresses the normal change of directory when remo)24.74 F .551
(ving directories from the stack, so)-.15 F
(that only the stack is manipulated.)180 715.2 Q(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q
-(2004 May 27)147.345 E(52)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(2004 June 26)147.345 E(52)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 53 53
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(tarting at 0.)-3.549 F F2(aname)180.33 708 Q F0(is unset before an)2.68
E 2.5(yn)-.15 G .5 -.25(ew va)-2.5 H(lues are assigned.).25 E(Other)5 E
F2(name)2.5 E F0(ar)2.5 E(guments are ignored.)-.18 E(GNU Bash-3.0)72
-768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(53)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(53)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 54 54
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(eturn value is)-.18 F(being inverted via)184 727.2 Q F8(!)2.5 E F4 5
(.A)C(trap on)-2.5 E F8(ERR)2.5 E F4 2.5(,i)C 2.5(fs)-2.5 G
(et, is executed befor)-2.5 E 2.5(et)-.18 G(he shell exits.)-2.5 E F0
-(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(54)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(54)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 55 55
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
3.315(et)-.18 G .815(he default operation dif)-3.315 F .815(fers fr)-.18
F(om)-.18 E(the POSIX 1003.2 standar)224 708 Q 2.5(dt)-.18 G 2.5(om)-2.5
G(atch the standar)-2.5 E 2.5(d\()-.18 G F4(`posix mode)-2.5 E F2(\).)A
-F0(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(55)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+F0(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(55)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 56 56
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
<24ad>3.223 E F2 5.723(.T)C .723(he r)-5.723 F .723
(eturn status is always)-.18 F(tr)144 706.8 Q
(ue unless an invalid option is encounter)-.08 E(ed.)-.18 E F0
-(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(56)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(56)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 57 57
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(If set, aliases ar)184 709.2 R 3.659(ee)-.18 G 1.159
(xpanded as described above under)-3.659 F F4(ALIASES)3.659 E F5(.)A F2
1.159(This option is)5.659 F(enabled by default for interactive shells.)
-184 721.2 Q F0(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(57)197.335 E
+184 721.2 Q F0(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(57)197.335 E
0 Cg EP
%%Page: 58 58
%%BeginPageSetup
Q F1(login_shell)144 672 Q F2 2.454
(The shell sets this option if it is started as a login shell \(see)184
684 R F4(INVOCA)4.954 E(TION)-.828 E F2 2.5(above\). The)184 696 R
-(value may not be changed.)2.5 E F0(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)
+(value may not be changed.)2.5 E F0(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)
147.345 E(58)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 59 59
%%BeginPageSetup
(ue.)-.08 E F1(test)144 694.8 Q F2(and)3.576 E F1([)3.576 E F2 1.076
(evaluate conditional expr)3.576 F 1.076(essions using a set of r)-.18 F
1.076(ules based on the number of)-.08 F(ar)144 706.8 Q(guments.)-.18 E
-F0(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(59)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+F0(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(59)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 60 60
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(ocess when it is cr)-.18 F 2.799(eated. The)-.18 F -.18(re)2.799 G .299
(turn status is false if any).18 F F5(sigspec)144.41 717.6 Q F1
(is invalid; otherwise)2.82 E F2(trap)2.5 E F1 -.18(re)2.5 G(turns tr)
-.18 E(ue.)-.08 E F0(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(60)
+.18 E(ue.)-.08 E F0(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(60)
197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 61 61
%%BeginPageSetup
(eturn status is 0 if the mode was successfully changed or if)-.18 F(no)
144 710.4 Q F3(mode)2.5 E F2(ar)2.5 E
(gument was supplied, and false otherwise.)-.18 E F0(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768
-Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(61)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(61)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 62 62
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(The Gnu History Library)108 691.2 Q F2 2.5(,B)C
(rian Fox and Chet Ramey)-2.5 E F3(Portable Operating System Interface \
\(POSIX\) Part 2: Shell and Utilities)108 703.2 Q F2 2.5(,I)C(EEE)-2.5 E
-F0(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(62)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+F0(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(62)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 63 63
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
(It suf)5.373 F .373(\214ces to place the sequence of commands between)
-.18 F(par)108 727.2 Q(entheses to for)-.18 E
(ce it into a subshell, which may be stopped as a unit.)-.18 E F0
-(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(63)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(63)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Page: 64 64
%%BeginPageSetup
BP
-.18 F .431(or messages while the con-)-.18 F(str)108 120 Q
(uct is being r)-.08 E(ead.)-.18 E
(Array variables may not \(yet\) be exported.)108 136.8 Q F0
-(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 May 27)147.345 E(64)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
+(GNU Bash-3.0)72 768 Q(2004 June 26)147.345 E(64)197.335 E 0 Cg EP
%%Trailer
end
%%EOF
<HTML>
<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
-<!-- Created on June, 1 2004 by texi2html 1.64 -->
+<!-- Created on June, 29 2004 by texi2html 1.64 -->
<!--
Written by: Lionel Cons <Lionel.Cons@cern.ch> (original author)
Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>
<H1>Bash Reference Manual</H1></P><P>
This text is a brief description of the features that are present in
-the Bash shell (version 3.0-rc1, 27 May 2004)..
+the Bash shell (version 3.0-rc1, 26 June 2004)..
</P><P>
-This is Edition 3.0, last updated 27 May 2004,
+This is Edition 3.0, last updated 26 June 2004,
of <CITE>The GNU Bash Reference Manual</CITE>,
for <CODE>Bash</CODE>, Version 3.0-rc1.
</P><P>
An interactive shell
is one started without non-option arguments, unless <SAMP>`-s'</SAMP> is
specified, without specifiying the <SAMP>`-c'</SAMP> option, and
-whose input and output are both
+whose input and error output are both
connected to terminals (as determined by <CODE>isatty(3)</CODE>),
or one started with the <SAMP>`-i'</SAMP> option.
</P><P>
<TD VALIGN="MIDDLE" ALIGN="LEFT">[<A HREF="bashref.html#SEC_About"> ? </A>]</TD>
</TR></TABLE>
<H1>About this document</H1>
-This document was generated by <I>Chet Ramey</I> on <I>June, 1 2004</I>
+This document was generated by <I>Chet Ramey</I> on <I>June, 29 2004</I>
using <A HREF="http://www.mathematik.uni-kl.de/~obachman/Texi2html
"><I>texi2html</I></A>
<P></P>
<BR>
<FONT SIZE="-1">
This document was generated
-by <I>Chet Ramey</I> on <I>June, 1 2004</I>
+by <I>Chet Ramey</I> on <I>June, 29 2004</I>
using <A HREF="http://www.mathematik.uni-kl.de/~obachman/Texi2html
"><I>texi2html</I></A>
-This is TeX, Version 3.14159 (Web2C 7.3.1) (format=tex 2001.2.12) 1 JUN 2004 12:27
+This is TeX, Version 3.14159 (Web2C 7.3.1) (format=tex 2001.2.12) 29 JUN 2004 10:37
**/usr/homes/chet/src/bash/src/doc/bashref.texi
(/usr/homes/chet/src/bash/src/doc/bashref.texi (texinfo.tex
Loading texinfo [version 2003-02-03.16]: Basics,
Here is how much of TeX's memory you used:
1713 strings out of 13013
23227 string characters out of 97233
- 52383 words of memory out of 263001
+ 52385 words of memory out of 263001
2577 multiletter control sequences out of 10000+0
31953 words of font info for 111 fonts, out of 400000 for 1000
19 hyphenation exceptions out of 1000
%DVIPSWebPage: (www.radicaleye.com)
%DVIPSCommandLine: dvips -D 600 -t letter -o bashref.ps bashref.dvi
%DVIPSParameters: dpi=600, compressed
-%DVIPSSource: TeX output 2004.06.01:1227
+%DVIPSSource: TeX output 2004.06.29:1037
%%BeginProcSet: texc.pro
%!
/TeXDict 300 dict def TeXDict begin/N{def}def/B{bind def}N/S{exch}N/X{S
1 0 bop 150 1318 a Fu(Bash)64 b(Reference)j(Man)-5 b(ual)p
150 1385 3600 34 v 2361 1481 a Ft(Reference)31 b(Do)s(cumen)m(tation)h
(for)e(Bash)2276 1589 y(Edition)f(3.0,)i(for)g Fs(Bash)e
-Ft(V)-8 b(ersion)30 b(3.0-rc1.)3364 1697 y(Ma)m(y)h(2004)150
+Ft(V)-8 b(ersion)30 b(3.0-rc1.)3350 1697 y(June)f(2004)150
4935 y Fr(Chet)45 b(Ramey)-11 b(,)46 b(Case)g(W)-11 b(estern)46
b(Reserv)l(e)g(Univ)l(ersit)l(y)150 5068 y(Brian)f(F)-11
b(o)l(x,)45 b(F)-11 b(ree)45 b(Soft)l(w)l(are)h(F)-11
%%Page: 2 2
2 1 bop 150 2889 a Ft(This)34 b(text)i(is)f(a)h(brief)e(description)g
(of)h(the)h(features)g(that)g(are)g(presen)m(t)g(in)e(the)i(Bash)f
-(shell)f(\(v)m(ersion)150 2999 y(3.0-rc1,)e(27)g(Ma)m(y)f(2004\).)150
-3133 y(This)j(is)h(Edition)e(3.0,)39 b(last)c(up)s(dated)f(27)j(Ma)m(y)
-g(2004,)i(of)c Fq(The)h(GNU)g(Bash)g(Reference)g(Man)m(ual)p
+(shell)f(\(v)m(ersion)150 2999 y(3.0-rc1,)e(26)g(June)d(2004\).)150
+3133 y(This)k(is)h(Edition)f(3.0,)k(last)d(up)s(dated)g(26)h(June)f
+(2004,)k(of)d Fq(The)f(GNU)i(Bash)f(Reference)g(Man)m(ual)p
Ft(,)h(for)150 3243 y Fs(Bash)p Ft(,)29 b(V)-8 b(ersion)30
b(3.0-rc1.)150 3377 y(Cop)m(yrigh)m(t)602 3374 y(c)577
3377 y Fp(\015)g Ft(1988-2004)k(F)-8 b(ree)32 b(Soft)m(w)m(are)f(F)-8
1540 y Fk(6.3.1)63 b(What)40 b(is)h(an)g(In)m(teractiv)m(e)e(Shell?)275
1779 y Ft(An)25 b(in)m(teractiv)m(e)h(shell)d(is)i(one)g(started)h
(without)f(non-option)f(argumen)m(ts,)j(unless)d(`)p
-Fs(-s)p Ft(')h(is)f(sp)s(eci\014ed,)150 1889 y(without)40
-b(sp)s(eci\014ying)f(the)i(`)p Fs(-c)p Ft(')g(option,)j(and)c(whose)h
-(input)e(and)i(output)f(are)i(b)s(oth)e(connected)i(to)150
-1998 y(terminals)29 b(\(as)i(determined)e(b)m(y)h Fs(isatty\(3\))p
-Ft(\),)e(or)j(one)f(started)h(with)e(the)i(`)p Fs(-i)p
+Fs(-s)p Ft(')h(is)f(sp)s(eci\014ed,)150 1889 y(without)32
+b(sp)s(eci\014ying)e(the)j(`)p Fs(-c)p Ft(')f(option,)h(and)f(whose)h
+(input)d(and)j(error)f(output)g(are)h(b)s(oth)f(connected)150
+1998 y(to)f(terminals)e(\(as)i(determined)e(b)m(y)h Fs(isatty\(3\))p
+Ft(\),)f(or)h(one)h(started)f(with)f(the)i(`)p Fs(-i)p
Ft(')f(option.)275 2128 y(An)g(in)m(teractiv)m(e)h(shell)d(generally)i
(reads)g(from)g(and)g(writes)f(to)i(a)g(user's)f(terminal.)275
2258 y(The)e(`)p Fs(-s)p Ft(')i(in)m(v)m(o)s(cation)f(option)g(ma)m(y)h
%!PS-Adobe-3.0
-%%Creator: groff version 1.19
-%%CreationDate: Tue Jun 1 12:27:24 2004
+%%Creator: groff version 1.18.1
+%%CreationDate: Tue Jun 29 10:37:28 2004
%%DocumentNeededResources: font Times-Roman
%%+ font Times-Bold
%%+ font Times-Italic
%%+ font Palatino-Roman
%%+ font Palatino-Italic
%%+ font Palatino-Bold
-%%DocumentSuppliedResources: procset grops 1.19 0
+%%DocumentSuppliedResources: procset grops 1.18 1
%%Pages: 19
%%PageOrder: Ascend
-%%DocumentMedia: Default 612 792 0 () ()
%%Orientation: Portrait
%%EndComments
-%%BeginDefaults
-%%PageMedia: Default
-%%EndDefaults
%%BeginProlog
-%%BeginResource: procset grops 1.19 0
+%%BeginResource: procset grops 1.18 1
/setpacking where{
pop
currentpacking
/Fr{
setrgbcolor fill
}bind def
-/setcmykcolor where{
-pop
/Fk{
setcmykcolor fill
}bind def
-}if
/Fg{
setgray fill
}bind def
/FL/fill load def
/LW/setlinewidth load def
/Cr/setrgbcolor load def
-/setcmykcolor where{
-pop
/Ck/setcmykcolor load def
-}if
/Cg/setgray load def
/RE{
findfont
/CNT countdictstack def
userdict begin
/showpage{}def
-/setpagedevice{}def
}bind def
/PEND{
clear
setpacking
}if
%%EndResource
-%%BeginFeature: *PageSize Default
-<< /PageSize [ 612 792 ] /ImagingBBox null >> setpagedevice
-%%EndFeature
%%IncludeResource: font Times-Roman
%%IncludeResource: font Times-Bold
%%IncludeResource: font Times-Italic
%%IncludeResource: font Palatino-Italic
%%IncludeResource: font Palatino-Bold
grops begin/DEFS 1 dict def DEFS begin/u{.001 mul}bind def end/RES 72
-def/PL 792 def/LS false def/ENC0[/asciicircum/asciitilde/Scaron/Zcaron
-/scaron/zcaron/Ydieresis/trademark/quotesingle/Euro/.notdef/.notdef
+def/PL 841.89 def/LS false def/ENC0[/asciicircum/asciitilde/Scaron
+/Zcaron/scaron/zcaron/Ydieresis/trademark/quotesingle/Euro/.notdef
/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef
/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef
-/.notdef/.notdef/space/exclam/quotedbl/numbersign/dollar/percent
+/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/space/exclam/quotedbl/numbersign/dollar/percent
/ampersand/quoteright/parenleft/parenright/asterisk/plus/comma/hyphen
/period/slash/zero/one/two/three/four/five/six/seven/eight/nine/colon
/semicolon/less/equal/greater/question/at/A/B/C/D/E/F/G/H/I/J/K/L/M/N/O
%!PS-Adobe-3.0
-%%Creator: groff version 1.19
-%%CreationDate: Tue Jun 1 12:27:24 2004
+%%Creator: groff version 1.18.1
+%%CreationDate: Tue Jun 29 10:37:29 2004
%%DocumentNeededResources: font Times-Roman
%%+ font Times-Bold
-%%DocumentSuppliedResources: procset grops 1.19 0
+%%DocumentSuppliedResources: procset grops 1.18 1
%%Pages: 1
%%PageOrder: Ascend
-%%DocumentMedia: Default 612 792 0 () ()
%%Orientation: Portrait
%%EndComments
-%%BeginDefaults
-%%PageMedia: Default
-%%EndDefaults
%%BeginProlog
-%%BeginResource: procset grops 1.19 0
+%%BeginResource: procset grops 1.18 1
/setpacking where{
pop
currentpacking
/Fr{
setrgbcolor fill
}bind def
-/setcmykcolor where{
-pop
/Fk{
setcmykcolor fill
}bind def
-}if
/Fg{
setgray fill
}bind def
/FL/fill load def
/LW/setlinewidth load def
/Cr/setrgbcolor load def
-/setcmykcolor where{
-pop
/Ck/setcmykcolor load def
-}if
/Cg/setgray load def
/RE{
findfont
/CNT countdictstack def
userdict begin
/showpage{}def
-/setpagedevice{}def
}bind def
/PEND{
clear
setpacking
}if
%%EndResource
-%%BeginFeature: *PageSize Default
-<< /PageSize [ 612 792 ] /ImagingBBox null >> setpagedevice
-%%EndFeature
%%IncludeResource: font Times-Roman
%%IncludeResource: font Times-Bold
grops begin/DEFS 1 dict def DEFS begin/u{.001 mul}bind def end/RES 72
-def/PL 792 def/LS false def/ENC0[/asciicircum/asciitilde/Scaron/Zcaron
-/scaron/zcaron/Ydieresis/trademark/quotesingle/Euro/.notdef/.notdef
+def/PL 841.89 def/LS false def/ENC0[/asciicircum/asciitilde/Scaron
+/Zcaron/scaron/zcaron/Ydieresis/trademark/quotesingle/Euro/.notdef
/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef
/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef
-/.notdef/.notdef/space/exclam/quotedbl/numbersign/dollar/percent
+/.notdef/.notdef/.notdef/space/exclam/quotedbl/numbersign/dollar/percent
/ampersand/quoteright/parenleft/parenright/asterisk/plus/comma/hyphen
/period/slash/zero/one/two/three/four/five/six/seven/eight/nine/colon
/semicolon/less/equal/greater/question/at/A/B/C/D/E/F/G/H/I/J/K/L/M/N/O
+++ /dev/null
-% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
-%
-% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
-\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
-%
-\def\texinfoversion{2003-02-03.16}
-%
-% Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
-% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-%
-% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
-% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-% published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
-% your option) any later version.
-%
-% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
-% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
-% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
-% General Public License for more details.
-%
-% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-% along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write
-% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
-% Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
-%
-% In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
-% You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
-% what you give them. Help stamp out software-hoarding!
-%
-% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
-% reports; you can get the latest version from:
-% ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/texinfo.tex
-% (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)
-% ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
-% (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org),
-% and /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.
-%
-% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
-%
-% The texinfo.tex in any given Texinfo distribution could well be out
-% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
-%
-% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a
-% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
-% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
-%
-% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
-% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
-% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
-% tex foo.texi
-% texindex foo.??
-% tex foo.texi
-% tex foo.texi
-% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
-% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
-% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
-% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
-%
-% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
-% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
-% full Texinfo distribution.
-
-\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
-
-% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
-% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
-% they might have appeared in the input file name.
-\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
- \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
-
-\message{Basics,}
-\chardef\other=12
-
-% We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo.
-% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
-\let\+ = \relax
-
-% Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine.
-\let\ptexb=\b
-\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
-\let\ptexc=\c
-\let\ptexcomma=\,
-\let\ptexdot=\.
-\let\ptexdots=\dots
-\let\ptexend=\end
-\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
-\let\ptexexclam=\!
-\let\ptexgtr=>
-\let\ptexhat=^
-\let\ptexi=\i
-\let\ptexlbrace=\{
-\let\ptexless=<
-\let\ptexplus=+
-\let\ptexrbrace=\}
-\let\ptexstar=\*
-\let\ptext=\t
-
-% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
-% starts a new line in the output.
-\newlinechar = `^^J
-
-% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
-\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
-\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
-\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
-\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
-\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
-\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
-\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
-\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
-\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
-\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
-\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
-\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
-\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
-\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
-\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
-\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
-\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
-\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
-%
-\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
-%
-\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
-\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
-\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
-\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
-\ifx\putwordDeftypevar\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypevar{Variable}\fi
-\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
-\ifx\putwordDeftypefun\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypefun{Function}\fi
-
-% In some macros, we cannot use the `\? notation---the left quote is
-% in some cases the escape char.
-\chardef\colonChar = `\:
-\chardef\commaChar = `\,
-\chardef\dotChar = `\.
-\chardef\equalChar = `\=
-\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
-\chardef\questChar = `\?
-\chardef\semiChar = `\;
-\chardef\spaceChar = `\ %
-\chardef\underChar = `\_
-
-% Ignore a token.
-%
-\def\gobble#1{}
-
-% True if #1 is the empty string, i.e., called like `\ifempty{}'.
-%
-\def\ifempty#1{\ifemptyx #1\emptymarkA\emptymarkB}%
-\def\ifemptyx#1#2\emptymarkB{\ifx #1\emptymarkA}%
-
-% Hyphenation fixes.
-\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
-\hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
-\hyphenation{eshell}
-\hyphenation{white-space}
-
-% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
-\newdimen\bindingoffset
-\newdimen\normaloffset
-\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
-
-% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
-% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
-% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
-% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
-% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
-%
-\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
-\def\loggingall{%
- \tracingstats2
- \tracingpages1
- \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
- \tracingparagraphs1
- \tracingoutput1
- \tracingmacros2
- \tracingrestores1
- \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
- \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
- \tracingscantokens1
- \tracingifs1
- \tracinggroups1
- \tracingnesting2
- \tracingassigns1
- \fi
- \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
- \errorcontextlines\maxdimen
-}%
-
-% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
-% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
-%
-\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
- \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
-\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
- \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
-\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
- \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
-
-% For @cropmarks command.
-% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
-%
-\newif\ifcropmarks
-\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
-%
-% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
-% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
-%
-\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
-\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc
-\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
-\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
-
-% Main output routine.
-\chardef\PAGE = 255
-\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
-
-\newbox\headlinebox
-\newbox\footlinebox
-
-% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
-% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
-\def\onepageout#1{%
- \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
- %
- \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
- \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
- %
- % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
- % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
- \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
- \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
- %
- {%
- % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
- % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
- % before the \shipout runs.
- %
- \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
- \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
- \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
- % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
- \shipout\vbox{%
- % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
- \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfmkdest{\the\pageno} \fi
- %
- \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
- \hsize = \outerhsize
- \vskip-\topandbottommargin
- \vtop to0pt{%
- \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
- \nointerlineskip
- \line{%
- \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
- \hfill
- \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
- }%
- \vss}%
- \vskip\topandbottommargin
- \line\bgroup
- \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
- \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
- \vbox\bgroup
- \fi
- %
- \unvbox\headlinebox
- \pagebody{#1}%
- \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
- % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
- % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
- % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
- \vskip 2\baselineskip
- \unvbox\footlinebox
- \fi
- %
- \ifcropmarks
- \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
- \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
- \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
- \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
- \vbox to0pt{\vss
- \line{%
- \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
- \hfill
- \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
- }%
- \nointerlineskip
- \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
- }%
- \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
- \fi
- }% end of \shipout\vbox
- }% end of group with \normalturnoffactive
- \advancepageno
- \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
-}
-
-\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
-
-\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
-{\catcode`\@ =11
-\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
-% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
-\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
- \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
-\dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
-\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
-\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
-}
-
-% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
-% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
-% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
-%
-\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
-\def\nstop{\vbox
- {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
-\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
-\def\nsbot{\vbox
- {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
-
-% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
-% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
-% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
-%
-\def\parsearg#1{%
- \let\next = #1%
- \begingroup
- \obeylines
- \futurelet\temp\parseargx
-}
-
-% If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
-% the like), remove it and recurse. Otherwise, we're done.
-\def\parseargx{%
- % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
- \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
- \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
- \else
- \expandafter\parseargline
- \fi
-}
-
-% Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
-{\obeyspaces %
- \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
-
-{\obeylines %
- \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
- \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
- %
- % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
- % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
- \argremovec #1\c\relax %
- \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
- %
- % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
- \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
- }%
-}
-
-% Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
-% do that for us. The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
-% in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
-% just to delimit the argument to the \c.
-\def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
-\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
-
-% \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
-% @end itemize @c foo
-% will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
-% `itemize'. Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
-% result to \toks0.
-%
-% This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
-% in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
-% Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands. (If it ever
-% does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
-% here.) But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
-% \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
-% that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
-%
-\def\removeactivespaces#1{%
- \begingroup
- \ignoreactivespaces
- \edef\temp{#1}%
- \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
- \endgroup
-}
-
-% Change the active space to expand to nothing.
-%
-\begingroup
- \obeyspaces
- \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
-\endgroup
-
-
-\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
-
-%% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
-%% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
-\newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
-\def\ENVcheck{%
-\ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue}
-\endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
-
-% @begin foo is the same as @foo, for now.
-\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
-
-\outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
-
-\def\beginxxx #1{%
-\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
-{\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
-\csname #1\endcsname\fi}
-
-% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
-%
-\def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
-\def\endxxx #1{%
- \removeactivespaces{#1}%
- \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
- %
- \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
- \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
- % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
- \errhelp = \EMsimple
- \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
- \else
- \unmatchedenderror\endthing
- \fi
- \else
- % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
- \csname E\endthing\endcsname
- \fi
-}
-
-% There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started. Give an error.
-%
-\def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
- \errhelp = \EMsimple
- \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
-}
-
-% Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
-%
-\def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
- \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
-}
-
-
-%% Simple single-character @ commands
-
-% @@ prints an @
-% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
-\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
-
-% This is turned off because it was never documented
-% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
-%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
-%% but suppressing ligatures.
-%\def\`{{`}}
-%\def\'{{'}}
-
-% Used to generate quoted braces.
-\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
-\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
-\let\{=\mylbrace
-\let\}=\myrbrace
-\begingroup
- % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
- % and @{ and @} for the aux file.
- \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
- \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
- \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
- !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
- !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
- !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
- !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
-!endgroup
-
-% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
-% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
-\let\, = \c
-\let\dotaccent = \.
-\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
-\let\tieaccent = \t
-\let\ubaraccent = \b
-\let\udotaccent = \d
-
-% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
-% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
-\def\questiondown{?`}
-\def\exclamdown{!`}
-
-% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
-\def\imacro{i}
-\def\jmacro{j}
-\def\dotless#1{%
- \def\temp{#1}%
- \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
- \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
- \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
- \fi\fi
-}
-
-% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
-% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
-% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
-% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
-% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
-{\catcode`@ = 11
- % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
- % if the definition is written into an index file.
- \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
- \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
-}
-
-% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
-\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
-
-% @* forces a line break.
-\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
-
-% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
-\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
-
-% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
-\def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
-
-% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
-\def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
-
-% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
-% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
-% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
-\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
-
-% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
-% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
-% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
-% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
-% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
-% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
-% the text is small, which looks bad.
-%
-% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
-% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
-% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
-% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
-% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
-% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
-%
-\newbox\groupbox
-\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
-%
-\def\group{\begingroup
- \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
- \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
- \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
- \fi
- %
- % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
- % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
- % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it. (See p.82 of
- % the TeXbook.) Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
- % above. But it's pretty close.
- \def\Egroup{%
- \egroup % End the \vtop.
- % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
- \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
- % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
- \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
- % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
- % group, force a page break.
- \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
- \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
- \page
- \fi
- \fi
- \copy\groupbox
- \endgroup % End the \group.
- }%
- %
- \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
- % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
- % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
- % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
- % and the first line afterwards is too small. But we can't put the
- % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
- % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
- \everypar = {\strut}%
- %
- % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
- % normal interline spacing.
- \offinterlineskip
- %
- % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
- % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
- % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
- % turned off the interline space. Simplest is to make them be an
- % empty paragraph.
- \ifx\par\lisppar
- \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
- %
- % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
- \obeylines
- \fi
- %
- % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
- % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
- % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
- % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
- % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
- % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
- \comment
-}
-%
-% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
-% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
-%
-\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
-group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
-where each line of input produces a line of output.}
-
-% @need space-in-mils
-% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
-
-\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
-
-\def\need{\parsearg\needx}
-
-% Old definition--didn't work.
-%\def\needx #1{\par %
-%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
-%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
-%{\baselineskip=0pt%
-%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
-%\prevdepth=-1000pt
-%}}
-
-\def\needx#1{%
- % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
- % paragraph.
- \par
- %
- % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
- \dimen0 = #1\mil
- \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
- \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
- \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
- %
- % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
- % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
- % And a page break here is fine.
- \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
- %
- % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
- % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
- % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
- % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
- % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
- %
- % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
- % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
- % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
- % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
- % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
- % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
- % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
- \penalty9999
- %
- % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
- \kern -#1\mil
- %
- % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
- \nobreak
- \fi
-}
-
-% @br forces paragraph break
-
-\let\br = \par
-
-% @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
-% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
-% font as three actual period characters.
-%
-\def\dots{%
- \leavevmode
- \hbox to 1.5em{%
- \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
- .\hss.\hss.%
- \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
- }%
-}
-
-% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
-%
-\def\enddots{%
- \leavevmode
- \hbox to 2em{%
- \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
- .\hss.\hss.\hss.%
- \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
- }%
- \spacefactor=3000
-}
-
-
-% @page forces the start of a new page
-%
-\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
-
-% @exdent text....
-% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
-
-% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
-% That's how much \exdent should take out.
-\newskip\exdentamount
-
-% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
-\def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
-\def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
-
-% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
-\def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
-\def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
-\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
-
-% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
-% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
-% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'.
-%
-\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
-\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
-%
-\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
- \nobreak
- \kern-\strutdepth
- \vtop to \strutdepth{%
- \baselineskip=\strutdepth
- \vss
- % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
- % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
- \ifx#1l%
- \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
- \else
- \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
- \fi
- \null
- }%
-}}
-\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
-\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
-%
-% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
-% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
-% else use TEXT for both).
-%
-\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
-\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
- \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
- \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
- \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
- \def\righttext{#2}%
- \else
- \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
- \def\righttext{#1}%
- \fi
- %
- \ifodd\pageno
- \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
- \else
- \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
- \fi
- \temp
-}
-
-% @include file insert text of that file as input.
-% Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name).
-\def\include{\begingroup
- \catcode`\\=\other
- \catcode`~=\other
- \catcode`^=\other
- \catcode`_=\other
- \catcode`|=\other
- \catcode`<=\other
- \catcode`>=\other
- \catcode`+=\other
- \parsearg\includezzz}
-% Restore active chars for included file.
-\def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
- % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
- \def\thisfile{#1}%
- \let\value=\expandablevalue
- \input\thisfile
-\endgroup}
-
-\def\thisfile{}
-
-% @center line
-% outputs that line, centered.
-%
-\def\center{\parsearg\docenter}
-\def\docenter#1{{%
- \ifhmode \hfil\break \fi
- \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
- \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
- \line{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
- \ifhmode \break \fi
-}}
-
-% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
-
-\def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
-\def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
-
-% @comment ...line which is ignored...
-% @c is the same as @comment
-% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
-
-\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
-\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
-\commentxxx}
-{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
-
-\let\c=\comment
-
-% @paragraphindent NCHARS
-% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
-% We cannot implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
-%
-\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
-\def\noneword{none}
-%
-\def\paragraphindent{\parsearg\doparagraphindent}
-\def\doparagraphindent#1{%
- \def\temp{#1}%
- \ifx\temp\asisword
- \else
- \ifx\temp\noneword
- \defaultparindent = 0pt
- \else
- \defaultparindent = #1em
- \fi
- \fi
- \parindent = \defaultparindent
-}
-
-% @exampleindent NCHARS
-% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
-% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
-% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
-\def\exampleindent{\parsearg\doexampleindent}
-\def\doexampleindent#1{%
- \def\temp{#1}%
- \ifx\temp\asisword
- \else
- \ifx\temp\noneword
- \lispnarrowing = 0pt
- \else
- \lispnarrowing = #1em
- \fi
- \fi
-}
-
-% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
-%
-\def\asis#1{#1}
-
-% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
-% We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because we need
-% to set catcodes according to plain TeX first, to allow for subscripts,
-% superscripts, special math chars, etc.
-%
-\let\implicitmath = $%$ font-lock fix
-%
-% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
-% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
-% _ within @math be active (mathcode "8000), and distinguish by seeing
-% if the current family is \slfam, which is what @var uses.
-%
-{\catcode\underChar = \active
-\gdef\mathunderscore{%
- \catcode\underChar=\active
- \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
-}}
-%
-% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
-% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
-% this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not
-% otherwise define @\.
-%
-% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
-\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
-%
-\def\math{%
- \tex
- \mathcode`\_="8000 \mathunderscore
- \let\\ = \mathbackslash
- \mathactive
- \implicitmath\finishmath}
-\def\finishmath#1{#1\implicitmath\Etex}
-
-% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
-% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an
-% argument to a command which set the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
-%
-{
- \catcode`^ = \active
- \catcode`< = \active
- \catcode`> = \active
- \catcode`+ = \active
- \gdef\mathactive{%
- \let^ = \ptexhat
- \let< = \ptexless
- \let> = \ptexgtr
- \let+ = \ptexplus
- }
-}
-
-% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
-\def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
-\def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
-
-% @refill is a no-op.
-\let\refill=\relax
-
-% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
-% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
-% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
-%
-\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
-\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
-
-% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
-% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
-% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
-\def\setfilename{%
- \iflinks
- \readauxfile
- \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
- \openindices
- \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
- \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
- %
- % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
- % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
- % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
- \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
- \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
- \closein1
- \temp
- %
- \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
-}
-
-% Called from \setfilename.
-%
-\def\openindices{%
- \newindex{cp}%
- \newcodeindex{fn}%
- \newcodeindex{vr}%
- \newcodeindex{tp}%
- \newcodeindex{ky}%
- \newcodeindex{pg}%
-}
-
-% @bye.
-\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
-
-
-\message{pdf,}
-% adobe `portable' document format
-\newcount\tempnum
-\newcount\lnkcount
-\newtoks\filename
-\newcount\filenamelength
-\newcount\pgn
-\newtoks\toksA
-\newtoks\toksB
-\newtoks\toksC
-\newtoks\toksD
-\newbox\boxA
-\newcount\countA
-\newif\ifpdf
-\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
-
-\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
- \pdffalse
- \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
- \let\pdfurl = \gobble
- \let\endlink = \relax
- \let\linkcolor = \relax
- \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
-\else
- \pdftrue
- \pdfoutput = 1
- \input pdfcolor
- \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
- \def\imagewidth{#2}%
- \def\imageheight{#3}%
- % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is
- % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
- \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
- \immediate\pdfimage
- \else
- \immediate\pdfximage
- \fi
- \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
- \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
- \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
- #1.pdf%
- \else
- {#1.pdf}%
- \fi
- \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
- \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
- \fi}
- \def\pdfmkdest#1{{\normalturnoffactive \pdfdest name{#1} xyz}}
- \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
- \let\linkcolor = \Blue % was Cyan, but that seems light?
- \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
- % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
- % come from Petr Olsak
- \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
- \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
- \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
- \advance\tempnum by1
- \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
- \def\pdfmakeoutlines{{%
- \openin 1 \jobname.toc
- \ifeof 1\else\begingroup
- \closein 1
- % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
- \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
- \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
- %
- \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{}
- \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
- \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
- \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
- \let\appendixentry = \chapentry
- \let\unnumbchapentry = \chapentry
- \let\unnumbsecentry = \secentry
- \let\unnumbsubsecentry = \subsecentry
- \let\unnumbsubsubsecentry = \subsubsecentry
- \input \jobname.toc
- \def\chapentry ##1##2##3{%
- \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}count-\expnumber{chap##2}{##1}}
- \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{%
- \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}count-\expnumber{sec##2.##3}{##1}}
- \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
- \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}count-\expnumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}{##1}}
- \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{%
- \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##6}}{##1}}
- \let\appendixentry = \chapentry
- \let\unnumbchapentry = \chapentry
- \let\unnumbsecentry = \secentry
- \let\unnumbsubsecentry = \subsecentry
- \let\unnumbsubsubsecentry = \subsubsecentry
- %
- % Make special characters normal for writing to the pdf file.
- %
- \indexnofonts
- \let\tt=\relax
- \turnoffactive
- \input \jobname.toc
- \endgroup\fi
- }}
- \def\makelinks #1,{%
- \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}%
- \ifx\params\E
- \let\nextmakelinks=\relax
- \else
- \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks
- \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi
- \picknum{#1}%
- \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}
- goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}%
- \linkcolor #1%
- \advance\lnkcount by 1%
- \endlink
- \fi
- \nextmakelinks
- }
- \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1}
- \def\pn#1{%
- \def\p{#1}%
- \ifx\p\lbrace
- \let\nextpn=\ppn
- \else
- \let\nextpn=\ppnn
- \def\first{#1}
- \fi
- \nextpn
- }
- \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble}
- \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first}
- \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,}
- \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
- \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
- \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
- \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
- \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
- \advance\filenamelength by 1
- \fi
- \fi
- \nextsp}
- \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
- \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
- \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
- \else
- \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
- \fi
- \def\pdfurl#1{%
- \begingroup
- \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}%
- \let\value=\expandablevalue
- \leavevmode\Red
- \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
- user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
- % #1
- \endgroup}
- \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
- \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
- \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
- \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
- \def\maketoks{%
- \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|
- \ifx\first0\adn0
- \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
- \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
- \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
- \else
- \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
- \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
- \let\next=\maketoks
- \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
- \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
- \fi
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
- \next}
- \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
- {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
- \def\pdflink#1{%
- \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
- \linkcolor #1\endlink}
- \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
-\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
-
-
-\message{fonts,}
-% Font-change commands.
-
-% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
-% So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
-\newfam\sffam
-\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
-\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
-
-% We don't need math for this one.
-\def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
-
-% Default leading.
-\newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt
-
-% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
-% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
-% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
-%
-\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
-\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
-\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
-%
-\def\setleading#1{%
- \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
- \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
- \normalbaselines
- \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
- \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
- depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
- }%
-}
-
-% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
-% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
-% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
-\def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
-
-% Use cm as the default font prefix.
-% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
-% before you read in texinfo.tex.
-\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
-\def\fontprefix{cm}
-\fi
-% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
-\def\rmshape{r}
-\def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold
-\def\bfshape{b}
-\def\bxshape{bx}
-\def\ttshape{tt}
-\def\ttbshape{tt}
-\def\ttslshape{sltt}
-\def\itshape{ti}
-\def\itbshape{bxti}
-\def\slshape{sl}
-\def\slbshape{bxsl}
-\def\sfshape{ss}
-\def\sfbshape{ss}
-\def\scshape{csc}
-\def\scbshape{csc}
-
-\newcount\mainmagstep
-\ifx\bigger\relax
- % not really supported.
- \mainmagstep=\magstep1
- \setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
- \setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
-\else
- \mainmagstep=\magstephalf
- \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
- \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
-\fi
-% Instead of cmb10, you may want to use cmbx10.
-% cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
-% looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10
-% (in Bob's opinion).
-\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
-\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
-\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
-\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
-\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
-\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
-\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
-\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
-
-% A few fonts for @defun, etc.
-\setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
-\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
-\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
-
-% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
-\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
-\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
-\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
-\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
-\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
-\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
-\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
-\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
-\font\smalli=cmmi9
-\font\smallsy=cmsy9
-
-% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
-\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
-\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}
-\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}
-\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}
-\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}
-\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}
-\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}
-\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}
-\font\smalleri=cmmi8
-\font\smallersy=cmsy8
-
-% Fonts for title page:
-\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
-\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
-\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
-\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
-\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
-\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
-\let\titlebf=\titlerm
-\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
-\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
-\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
-\def\authorrm{\secrm}
-\def\authortt{\sectt}
-
-% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
-\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
-\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
-\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
-\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
-\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
-\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
-\let\chapbf=\chaprm
-\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
-\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
-\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
-
-% Section fonts (14.4pt).
-\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
-\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
-\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
-\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
-\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
-\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
-\let\secbf\secrm
-\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
-\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
-\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
-
-% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
-\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
-\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
-\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
-\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
-\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
-\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
-\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
-\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
-\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
-\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
-% The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
-% but that is not a standard magnification.
-
-% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
-% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
-% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
-% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
-% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
-%
-\def\resetmathfonts{%
- \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
- \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
- \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
-}
-
-% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
-% of just \STYLE. We do this so that font changes will continue to work
-% in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
-% cases, not the current font. Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
-% \tenbf}, for example. By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
-% redefine \bf itself.
-\def\textfonts{%
- \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
- \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
- \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
- \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
-\def\titlefonts{%
- \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
- \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
- \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
- \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
- \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
-\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
-\def\chapfonts{%
- \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
- \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
- \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
- \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
-\def\secfonts{%
- \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
- \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
- \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
- \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
-\def\subsecfonts{%
- \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
- \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
- \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
- \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
-\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
-\def\smallfonts{%
- \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
- \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
- \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
- \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
- \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
-\def\smallerfonts{%
- \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
- \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
- \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
- \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
- \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
-
-% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
-\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
-
-% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
-% can fit this many characters:
-% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
-% If we use \smallerfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
-% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
-% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
-% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
-%
-% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
-% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
-%
-% I wish we used A4 paper on this side of the Atlantic.
-%
-% --karl, 24jan03.
-
-
-% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
-%
-\textfonts
-
-% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
-\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
-\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
-
-% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
-\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
-
-% Fonts for short table of contents.
-\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
-\setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
-\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
-\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
-
-%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
-%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
-
-% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
-% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
-\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi}
-\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
-\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
-
-\let\i=\smartitalic
-\let\var=\smartslanted
-\let\dfn=\smartslanted
-\let\emph=\smartitalic
-\let\cite=\smartslanted
-
-\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
-\let\strong=\b
-
-% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
-% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
-% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
-%
-\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
-\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
-
-% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
-% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
-% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
-%
-\catcode`@=11
- \def\frenchspacing{%
- \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
- \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
- }
-\catcode`@=\other
-
-\def\t#1{%
- {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
- \null
-}
-\let\ttfont=\t
-\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
-\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
-\font\keysy=cmsy9
-\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
- \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
- \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
- \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
- \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
- \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
-% The old definition, with no lozenge:
-%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
-\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
-
-% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
-\let\file=\samp
-\let\option=\samp
-
-% @code is a modification of @t,
-% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
-\def\tclose#1{%
- {%
- % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
- \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
- %
- % Switch to typewriter.
- \tt
- %
- % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
- \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
- %
- % Turn off hyphenation.
- \nohyphenation
- %
- \rawbackslash
- \frenchspacing
- #1%
- }%
- \null
-}
-
-% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
-% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
-% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
-
-% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
-% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
-% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
-% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
-% -- rms.
-{
- \catcode`\-=\active
- \catcode`\_=\active
- %
- \global\def\code{\begingroup
- \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
- \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
- \codex
- }
- %
- % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,
- % just treat them as a normal -.
- \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash}
-}
-
-\def\realdash{-}
-\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
-\def\codeunder{%
- % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
- % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
- % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
- % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
- \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
- \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
- \else\normalunderscore \fi
- \discretionary{}{}{}}%
- {\_}%
-}
-\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
-
-% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
-% then @kbd has no effect.
-
-% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
-% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
-% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
-\def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
-\def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
- \def\arg{#1}%
- \ifx\arg\worddistinct
- \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
- \else\ifx\arg\wordexample
- \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
- \else\ifx\arg\wordcode
- \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
- \else
- \errhelp = \EMsimple
- \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle `\arg'}%
- \fi\fi\fi
-}
-\def\worddistinct{distinct}
-\def\wordexample{example}
-\def\wordcode{code}
-
-% Default is `distinct.'
-\kbdinputstyle distinct
-
-\def\xkey{\key}
-\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
-\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
-\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
-\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
-
-% For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
-\let\url=\code
-\let\env=\code
-\let\command=\code
-
-% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
-% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
-% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
-% itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in
-% a hypertex \special here.
-%
-\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
-\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
- \unsepspaces
- \pdfurl{#1}%
- \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
- \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
- \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
- \else
- \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
- \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
- \ifpdf
- \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
- \else
- \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
- \fi
- \else
- \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
- \fi
- \fi
- \endlink
-\endgroup}
-
-% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
-% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
-%
-%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
-\ifpdf
- \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
- \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
- \unsepspaces
- \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
- \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
- \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
- \endlink
- \endgroup}
-\else
- \let\email=\uref
-\fi
-
-% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
-% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
-% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
-% this property, we can check that font parameter.
-%
-\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
-
-% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
-% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
-%
-\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
-
-\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
-
-% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
-% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
-% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
-%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
-
-% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
-\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
-\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
-\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
-
-% @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps.
-\def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}}
-
-% @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
-\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
-
-
-\message{page headings,}
-
-\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
-\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
-
-% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
-\newif\ifseenauthor
-\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
-
-% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
-% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
-%
-\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
- \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
-\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
- \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
-
-\def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
-\def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
- \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
-
-\def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
- \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
- \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
- %
- \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines
- \let\tt=\authortt}%
- %
- % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
- \vglue\titlepagetopglue
- %
- % Now you can print the title using @title.
- \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
- \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
- % print a rule at the page bottom also.
- \finishedtitlepagefalse
- \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
- % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
- \finishedtitlepagetrue
- %
- % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
- \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
- \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
- %
- % @author should come last, but may come many times.
- \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
- \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
- {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
- %
- % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
- % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
- \let\oldpage = \page
- \def\page{%
- \iffinishedtitlepage\else
- \finishtitlepage
- \fi
- \oldpage
- \let\page = \oldpage
- \hbox{}}%
-% \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
-}
-
-\def\Etitlepage{%
- \iffinishedtitlepage\else
- \finishtitlepage
- \fi
- % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
- % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
- % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
- % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
- \oldpage
- \endgroup
- %
- % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
- % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
- \HEADINGSon
- %
- % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
- \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
- \shortcontents
- \contents
- \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
- \global\let\contents = \relax
- \fi
- %
- \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
- \contents
- \global\let\contents = \relax
- \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
- \fi
-}
-
-\def\finishtitlepage{%
- \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
- \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
- \finishedtitlepagetrue
-}
-
-%%% Set up page headings and footings.
-
-\let\thispage=\folio
-
-\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
-\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
-\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
-\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
-
-% Now make Tex use those variables
-\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
- \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
-\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
- \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
-\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
-
-% Commands to set those variables.
-% For example, this is what @headings on does
-% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
-% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
-% @evenfooting @thisfile||
-% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
-
-\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
-\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
-\def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
-
-\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
-\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
-\def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
-
-{\catcode`\@=0 %
-
-\gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
-\gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
-\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
-
-\gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
-\gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
-\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
-
-\gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
-
-\gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
-\gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
-\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
-
-\gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
-\gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
- \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
- %
- % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
- % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
- \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
- \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
-}
-
-\gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
-%
-}% unbind the catcode of @.
-
-% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
-% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
-% @headings off turns them off.
-% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
-% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
-% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
-% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
-% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
-% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
-
-\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
-
-\def\HEADINGSoff{
-\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
-\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
-\HEADINGSoff
-% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
-% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
-% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
-% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
-% edge of all pages.
-\def\HEADINGSdouble{
-\global\pageno=1
-\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
-\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
-\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
-\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
-}
-\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
-
-% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
-% page number on top right.
-\def\HEADINGSsingle{
-\global\pageno=1
-\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
-\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
-\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
-\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
-}
-\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
-
-\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
-\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
-\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
-\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
-\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
-\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
-\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
-}
-
-\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
-\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
-\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
-\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
-\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
-\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
-}
-
-% Subroutines used in generating headings
-% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
-% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
-% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
-\ifx\today\undefined
-\def\today{%
- \number\day\space
- \ifcase\month
- \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
- \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
- \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
- \fi
- \space\number\year}
-\fi
-
-% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
-% It generates no output of its own.
-\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
-\def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
-\def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
-
-
-\message{tables,}
-% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
-
-% default indentation of table text
-\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
-% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
-\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
-% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
-\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
-
-% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
-\newdimen\itemmax
-
-% Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
-% these defs.
-% They also define \itemindex
-% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
-
-\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
-
-\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
-
-\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
-\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
-
-\def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
-\def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
-
-\def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
-\def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
-
-\def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
- \itemzzz {#1}}
-
-\def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
- \itemzzz {#1}}
-
-\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
- \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
- \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
- \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
- \itemindex{#1}%
- \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
- %
- % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
- % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
- % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
- % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
- % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
- \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
- %
- % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
- % but leave it ragged-right.
- \begingroup
- \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
- \advance\hsize by\tableindent
- \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
- \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
- \endgroup
- %
- % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
- % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
- \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
- %
- % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. (Unfortunately
- % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
- % \baselineskip glue.) However, if what follows is an environment
- % such as @example, there will be no \parskip glue; then
- % the negative vskip we just would cause the example and the item to
- % crash together. So we use this bizarre value of 10001 as a signal
- % to \aboveenvbreak to insert \parskip glue after all.
- % (Possibly there are other commands that could be followed by
- % @example which need the same treatment, but not section titles; or
- % maybe section titles are the only special case and they should be
- % penalty 10001...)
- \penalty 10001
- \endgroup
- \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
- \else
- % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
- % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
- \noindent
- % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
- % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
- % eventually be printed.
- \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
- \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
- \unhbox0
- \nobreak\kern\dimen0
- \endgroup
- \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
- \fi
-}
-
-\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
-\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
-\def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
-\def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
-\def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
-\def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
-
-% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.
-\def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
-
-% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
-\def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
-{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
-\gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
-\tabley\dontindex#1 \endtabley}}
-
-\def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
-{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
-\gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
-\tabley\fnitemindex#1 \endtabley
-\def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
-\let\Etable=\relax}}
-
-\def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
-{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
-\gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
-\tabley\vritemindex#1 \endtabley
-\def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
-\let\Etable=\relax}}
-
-\def\dontindex #1{}
-\def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
-\def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
-
-{\obeyspaces %
-\gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
-\tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
-
-\def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
-\aboveenvbreak %
-\begingroup %
-\def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
-\let\itemindex=#1%
-\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
-\ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
-\ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
-\def\itemfont{#2}%
-\itemmax=\tableindent %
-\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
-\advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
-\exdentamount=\tableindent
-\parindent = 0pt
-\parskip = \smallskipamount
-\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
-\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
-\let\item = \internalBitem %
-\let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
-\let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
-\let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
-\let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
-\let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
-}
-
-% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
-
-\newcount \itemno
-
-\def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
-
-\def\itemizezzz #1{%
- \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize
- \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
-}
-
-\def\itemizey #1#2{%
-\aboveenvbreak %
-\itemmax=\itemindent %
-\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
-\advance \leftskip by \itemindent %
-\exdentamount=\itemindent
-\parindent = 0pt %
-\parskip = \smallskipamount %
-\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
-\def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
-\def\itemcontents{#1}%
-\let\item=\itemizeitem}
-
-% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
-% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
-%
-\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
-
-% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
-% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
-% argument is the same as `1'.
-%
-\def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
-\def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
-\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
- \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
- %
- % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
- \def\thearg{#1}%
- \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
- %
- % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
- % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
- % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
- % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
- % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
- \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
- \ifx\rest\empty
- % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
- % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
- % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
- % not equal to itself.
- % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
- %
- % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
- % continuing to look for a <number>.
- %
- \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
- \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
- \else
- % It's a letter.
- \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
- \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
- \else
- \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
- \fi
- \fi
- \else
- % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
- \numericenumerate
- \fi
-}
-
-% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
-% given in \thearg.
-%
-\def\numericenumerate{%
- \itemno = \thearg
- \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
-}
-
-% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
-\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
- \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
- \startenumeration{%
- % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
- \ifnum\itemno=0
- \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
- alphabet}%
- \fi
- \char\lccode\itemno
- }%
-}
-
-% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
-\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
- \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
- \startenumeration{%
- % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
- \ifnum\itemno=0
- \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
- alphabet}
- \fi
- \char\uccode\itemno
- }%
-}
-
-% Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
-% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
-% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
-%
-\def\startenumeration#1{%
- \advance\itemno by -1
- \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
-}
-
-% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
-% to @enumerate.
-%
-\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
-\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
-\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
-\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
-
-% Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
-
-\def\itemizeitem{%
-\advance\itemno by 1
-{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
-\ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
-{\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
-\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
-\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
-\flushcr}
-
-% @multitable macros
-% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
-%
-% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
-% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
-% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
-% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
-
-% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
-
-% To make preamble:
-%
-% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
-% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
-% @item ...
-%
-% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
-% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
-% columns as desired.
-
-
-% Or use a template:
-% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
-% @item ...
-% using the widest term desired in each column.
-%
-% For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
-% the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
-% will parse correctly, i.e.,
-%
-% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
-% template}
-% Not:
-% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
-% {Column 3 template}
-
-% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
-% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
-% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
-% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
-
-% @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
-% own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
-
-% Sample multitable:
-
-% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
-% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
-% @item
-% first col stuff
-% @tab
-% second col stuff
-% @tab
-% third col
-% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
-% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
-%
-% They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
-% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
-% @end multitable
-
-% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
-% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
-% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
-% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
-% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
-% to baseline.
-% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
-%
-\newskip\multitableparskip
-\newskip\multitableparindent
-\newdimen\multitablecolspace
-\newskip\multitablelinespace
-\multitableparskip=0pt
-\multitableparindent=6pt
-\multitablecolspace=12pt
-\multitablelinespace=0pt
-
-% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
-%
-\let\endsetuptable\relax
-\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
-\let\columnfractions\relax
-\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
-\newif\ifsetpercent
-
-% #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which
-% is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we
-% just throw it away). #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the
-% percent of \hsize for this column.
-\def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {%
- \global\advance\colcount by 1
- \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}%
- \setuptable
-}
-
-\newcount\colcount
-\def\setuptable#1{%
- \def\firstarg{#1}%
- \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
- \let\go = \relax
- \else
- \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
- \global\setpercenttrue
- \else
- \ifsetpercent
- \let\go\pickupwholefraction
- \else
- \global\advance\colcount by 1
- \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
- % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
- \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
- \fi
- \fi
- \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
- % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
- % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
- \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
- \else
- \let\go = \setuptable
- \fi%
- \fi
- \go
-}
-
-% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
-%
-\def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
-\def\dotable#1{\bgroup
- \vskip\parskip
- \let\item=\crcrwithfootnotes
- % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template
- % line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just & until
- % we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again. --karl,
- % nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
- \let\tab=&%
- \let\startfootins=\startsavedfootnote
- \tolerance=9500
- \hbadness=9500
- \setmultitablespacing
- \parskip=\multitableparskip
- \parindent=\multitableparindent
- \overfullrule=0pt
- \global\colcount=0
- \def\Emultitable{%
- \global\setpercentfalse
- \crcrwithfootnotes\crcr
- \egroup\egroup
- }%
- %
- % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
- \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
- %
- % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
- % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
- % The table preamble
- % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
- \everycr{\noalign{%
- %
- % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
- % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
- % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the problem
- % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
- \global\colcount=0\relax}}%
- %
- % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
- % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
- % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
- % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
- \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax
- \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
- %
- % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
- % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
- % the first one.
- %
- % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
- % to the width of each template entry.
- %
- % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
- % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
- % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
- % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
- %
- % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
- \rightskip=0pt
- \ifnum\colcount=1
- % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
- \advance\hsize by\leftskip
- \else
- \ifsetpercent \else
- % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
- % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
- \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
- \fi
- % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
- \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
- \fi
- % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
- % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
- % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
- % For example:
- % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
- % @item @code{#}
- % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
- % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
- % characters.
- \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
-}
-
-\def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
-% If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
-% current baselineskip.
-\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
-\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
-\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
-%% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
-%% to keep lines equally spaced
-\let\multistrut = \strut
-\else
-%% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be?
-\gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
-width0pt\relax} \fi
-%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
-%% table. If not, do nothing.
-%% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
-\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
-\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
-\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
- %% than skip between lines in the table.
-\fi%
-\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
-\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
-\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
- %% than skip between lines in the table.
-\fi}
-
-% In case a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
-% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is
-% finished. Otherwise, the insertion is lost, it never migrates to the
-% main vertical list. --kasal, 22jan03.
-%
-\newbox\savedfootnotes
-%
-% \dotable \let's \startfootins to this, so that \dofootnote will call
-% it instead of starting the insertion right away.
-\def\startsavedfootnote{%
- \global\setbox\savedfootnotes = \vbox\bgroup
- \unvbox\savedfootnotes
-}
-\def\crcrwithfootnotes{%
- \crcr
- \ifvoid\savedfootnotes \else
- \noalign{\insert\footins{\box\savedfootnotes}}%
- \fi
-}
-
-\message{conditionals,}
-% Prevent errors for section commands.
-% Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
-\def\ignoresections{%
- \let\chapter=\relax
- \let\unnumbered=\relax
- \let\top=\relax
- \let\unnumberedsec=\relax
- \let\unnumberedsection=\relax
- \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
- \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
- \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
- \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
- \let\section=\relax
- \let\subsec=\relax
- \let\subsubsec=\relax
- \let\subsection=\relax
- \let\subsubsection=\relax
- \let\appendix=\relax
- \let\appendixsec=\relax
- \let\appendixsection=\relax
- \let\appendixsubsec=\relax
- \let\appendixsubsection=\relax
- \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
- \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
- \let\contents=\relax
- \let\smallbook=\relax
- \let\titlepage=\relax
-}
-
-% Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source
-% and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used
-% incorrectly.
-%
-% We use \empty instead of \relax for the @def... commands, so that \end
-% doesn't throw an error. For instance:
-% @ignore
-% @deffn ...
-% @end deffn
-% @end ignore
-%
-% The @end deffn is going to get expanded, because we're trying to allow
-% nested conditionals. But we don't want to expand the actual @deffn,
-% since it might be syntactically correct and intended to be ignored.
-% Since \end checks for \relax, using \empty does not cause an error.
-%
-\def\ignoremorecommands{%
- \let\defcodeindex = \relax
- \let\defcv = \empty
- \let\defcvx = \empty
- \let\Edefcv = \empty
- \let\deffn = \empty
- \let\deffnx = \empty
- \let\Edeffn = \empty
- \let\defindex = \relax
- \let\defivar = \empty
- \let\defivarx = \empty
- \let\Edefivar = \empty
- \let\defmac = \empty
- \let\defmacx = \empty
- \let\Edefmac = \empty
- \let\defmethod = \empty
- \let\defmethodx = \empty
- \let\Edefmethod = \empty
- \let\defop = \empty
- \let\defopx = \empty
- \let\Edefop = \empty
- \let\defopt = \empty
- \let\defoptx = \empty
- \let\Edefopt = \empty
- \let\defspec = \empty
- \let\defspecx = \empty
- \let\Edefspec = \empty
- \let\deftp = \empty
- \let\deftpx = \empty
- \let\Edeftp = \empty
- \let\deftypefn = \empty
- \let\deftypefnx = \empty
- \let\Edeftypefn = \empty
- \let\deftypefun = \empty
- \let\deftypefunx = \empty
- \let\Edeftypefun = \empty
- \let\deftypeivar = \empty
- \let\deftypeivarx = \empty
- \let\Edeftypeivar = \empty
- \let\deftypemethod = \empty
- \let\deftypemethodx = \empty
- \let\Edeftypemethod = \empty
- \let\deftypeop = \empty
- \let\deftypeopx = \empty
- \let\Edeftypeop = \empty
- \let\deftypevar = \empty
- \let\deftypevarx = \empty
- \let\Edeftypevar = \empty
- \let\deftypevr = \empty
- \let\deftypevrx = \empty
- \let\Edeftypevr = \empty
- \let\defun = \empty
- \let\defunx = \empty
- \let\Edefun = \empty
- \let\defvar = \empty
- \let\defvarx = \empty
- \let\Edefvar = \empty
- \let\defvr = \empty
- \let\defvrx = \empty
- \let\Edefvr = \empty
- \let\clear = \relax
- \let\down = \relax
- \let\evenfooting = \relax
- \let\evenheading = \relax
- \let\everyfooting = \relax
- \let\everyheading = \relax
- \let\headings = \relax
- \let\include = \relax
- \let\item = \relax
- \let\lowersections = \relax
- \let\oddfooting = \relax
- \let\oddheading = \relax
- \let\printindex = \relax
- \let\pxref = \relax
- \let\raisesections = \relax
- \let\ref = \relax
- \let\set = \relax
- \let\setchapternewpage = \relax
- \let\setchapterstyle = \relax
- \let\settitle = \relax
- \let\up = \relax
- \let\verbatiminclude = \relax
- \let\xref = \relax
-}
-
-% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
-%
-\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
-\def\documentdescriptionword{documentdescription}
-\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
-\def\html{\doignore{html}}
-\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
-\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
-\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
-\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
-\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
-\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
-\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
-\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
-
-% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
-% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
-\let\dircategory = \comment
-
-% Ignore text until a line `@end #1'.
-%
-\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
- % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
- \ignoresections
- %
- % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'.
- % This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in
- % this texinfo.tex file). We change the catcode of @ below to match.
- \long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}%
- %
- % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
- \catcode\spaceChar = 10
- %
- % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
- \catcode`\{ = 9
- \catcode`\} = 9
- %
- % We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence.
- \catcode`\@ = 12
- %
- \def\ignoreword{#1}%
- \ifx\ignoreword\documentdescriptionword
- % The c kludge breaks documentdescription, since
- % `documentdescription' contains a `c'. Means not everything will
- % be ignored inside @documentdescription, but oh well...
- \else
- % Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line
- % will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example)
- % @c @end ifinfo
- % and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored.
- % (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.)
- \catcode`\c = 14
- \fi
- %
- % And now expand the command defined above.
- \doignoretext
-}
-
-% What we do to finish off ignored text.
-%
-\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
-
-\newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse
-\def\obstexwarn{%
- \ifwarnedobs\relax\else
- % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0.
- % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines.
- \immediate\write16{}
- \immediate\write16{WARNING: for users of Unix TeX 3.0!}
- \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).}
- \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.}
- \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.}
- \immediate\write16{ Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.}
- \immediate\write16{ (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/non-gnu/TeX.README.)}
- \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the}
- \immediate\write16{ script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution}
- \immediate\write16{ to use a workaround.}
- \immediate\write16{}
- \global\warnedobstrue
- \fi
-}
-
-% **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex. For a
-% workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed),
-% uncomment the following line:
-%%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax
-
-% Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for
-% purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command.
-%
-\def\nestedignore#1{%
- \obstexwarn
- % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end
- % command, so that nested ignore constructs work. Thus, we put the
- % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result. To minimize
- % the chance of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on
- % page 401 of the TeXbook.
- %
- \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup
- % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
- \ignoresections
- %
- % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the
- % @end command again.
- \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}%
- %
- % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands. Most cause no
- % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do
- % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we
- % undefine them.
- %
- % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately;
- % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors.
- \ignoremorecommands
- %
- % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define
- % all the font commands to also use \nullfont. We don't use
- % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because some sites
- % might not have that installed. Therefore, math mode will still
- % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of
- % stuff compared to the main input.
- %
- \nullfont
- \let\tenrm=\nullfont \let\tenit=\nullfont \let\tensl=\nullfont
- \let\tenbf=\nullfont \let\tentt=\nullfont \let\smallcaps=\nullfont
- \let\tensf=\nullfont
- % Similarly for index fonts.
- \let\smallrm=\nullfont \let\smallit=\nullfont \let\smallsl=\nullfont
- \let\smallbf=\nullfont \let\smalltt=\nullfont \let\smallsc=\nullfont
- \let\smallsf=\nullfont
- % Similarly for smallexample fonts.
- \let\smallerrm=\nullfont \let\smallerit=\nullfont \let\smallersl=\nullfont
- \let\smallerbf=\nullfont \let\smallertt=\nullfont \let\smallersc=\nullfont
- \let\smallersf=\nullfont
- %
- % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts.
- \tracinglostchars = 0
- %
- % Don't bother to do space factor calculations.
- \frenchspacing
- %
- % Don't report underfull hboxes.
- \hbadness = 10000
- %
- % Do minimal line-breaking.
- \pretolerance = 10000
- %
- % Do not execute instructions in @tex.
- \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}%
- % Do not execute macro definitions.
- % `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off.
- \def\macro{\doignore{ma}}%
-}
-
-% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
-% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
-%
-% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
-% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
-% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
-% didn't need it. Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
-% losing inside @example, for instance.
-%
-\def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
- \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
- \parsearg\setxxx}
-\def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
-\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
- \def\temp{#2}%
- \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
- \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
- \fi
- \endgroup
-}
-% Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
-% \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
-% an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
-\def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
-
-% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
-%
-\def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
-\def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
-
-% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
-{
- \catcode`\_ = \active
- %
- % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if
- % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}. So \let any
- % such active characters to their normal equivalents.
- \gdef\value{\begingroup
- \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
- \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore
- \valuexxx}
-}
-\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
-
-% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
-% properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies). Ones
-% whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything
-% about that. The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable
-% is set), since the result winds up in the index file. This means that
-% if the variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost
-% certain it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with
-% sufficient work to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of
-% complete).
-%
-\def\expandablevalue#1{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
- {[No value for ``#1'']}%
- \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
- \else
- \csname SET#1\endcsname
- \fi
-}
-
-% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
-% with @set.
-%
-\def\ifset{\parsearg\doifset}
-\def\doifset#1{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
- \let\next=\ifsetfail
- \else
- \let\next=\ifsetsucceed
- \fi
- \next
-}
-\def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
-\def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}}
-\defineunmatchedend{ifset}
-
-% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
-% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
-%
-\def\ifclear{\parsearg\doifclear}
-\def\doifclear#1{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
- \let\next=\ifclearsucceed
- \else
- \let\next=\ifclearfail
- \fi
- \next
-}
-\def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
-\def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}}
-\defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
-
-% @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext always succeed; we
-% read the text following, through the first @end iftex (etc.). Make
-% `@end iftex' (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
-%
-\def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
-\def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
-\def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
-\def\ifnotplaintext{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotplaintext}}
-\defineunmatchedend{iftex}
-\defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
-\defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
-\defineunmatchedend{ifnotplaintext}
-
-% True conditional. Since \set globally defines its variables, we can
-% just start and end a group (to keep the @end definition undefined at
-% the outer level).
-%
-\def\conditionalsucceed#1{\begingroup
- \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\endgroup}%
-}
-
-% @defininfoenclose.
-\let\definfoenclose=\comment
-
-
-\message{indexing,}
-% Index generation facilities
-
-% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
-% except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
-{\catcode`\@=11
-\gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
-
-% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
-% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
-% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
-% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
-% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
-% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
-% for the sake of vms.
-%
-\def\newindex#1{%
- \iflinks
- \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
- \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
- \fi
- \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
- \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
-}
-
-% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
-%
-\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
-
-% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
-%
-\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
-%
-\def\newcodeindex#1{%
- \iflinks
- \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
- \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
- \fi
- \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
- \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
-}
-
-
-% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
-% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
-%
-% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
-% inside @code.
-%
-\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
-\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
-
-% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
-% #3 the target index (bar).
-\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
- % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
- % closing the target index.
- \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined
- % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
- % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
- \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
- \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
- \fi
- % redefine \fooindfile:
- \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
- \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
- % redefine \fooindex:
- \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
-}
-
-% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
-% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
-% and it is "foo", the name of the index.
-
-% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
-% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
-
-% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
-% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
-
-\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
-\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
-
-% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
-\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
-\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
-
-% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
-% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
-% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
-%
-\def\indexdummies{%
- \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
- \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
- % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
- % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
- % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
- \let\{ = \mylbrace
- \let\} = \myrbrace
- %
- % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \realbackslash #1\space, thus
- % effectively preventing its expansion. This is used only for control
- % words, not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect
- % for control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
- % from whatever follows.
- %
- % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
- % space.
- %
- % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
- % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
- % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
- %
- \def\definedummyword##1{%
- \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1\space}%
- }%
- \def\definedummyletter##1{%
- \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1}%
- }%
- %
- % Do the redefinitions.
- \commondummies
-}
-
-% For the aux file, @ is the escape character. So we want to redefine
-% everything using @ instead of \realbackslash. When everything uses
-% @, this will be simpler.
-%
-\def\atdummies{%
- \def\@{@@}%
- \def\ {@ }%
- \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
- \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
- %
- % (See comments in \indexdummies.)
- \def\definedummyword##1{%
- \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1\space}%
- }%
- \def\definedummyletter##1{%
- \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1}%
- }%
- %
- % Do the redefinitions.
- \commondummies
-}
-
-% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies. \definedummyword and
-% \definedummyletter must be defined first.
-%
-\def\commondummies{%
- %
- \normalturnoffactive
- %
- % Control letters and accents.
- \definedummyletter{_}%
- \definedummyletter{,}%
- \definedummyletter{"}%
- \definedummyletter{`}%
- \definedummyletter{'}%
- \definedummyletter{^}%
- \definedummyletter{~}%
- \definedummyletter{=}%
- \definedummyword{u}%
- \definedummyword{v}%
- \definedummyword{H}%
- \definedummyword{dotaccent}%
- \definedummyword{ringaccent}%
- \definedummyword{tieaccent}%
- \definedummyword{ubaraccent}%
- \definedummyword{udotaccent}%
- \definedummyword{dotless}%
- %
- % Other non-English letters.
- \definedummyword{AA}%
- \definedummyword{AE}%
- \definedummyword{L}%
- \definedummyword{OE}%
- \definedummyword{O}%
- \definedummyword{aa}%
- \definedummyword{ae}%
- \definedummyword{l}%
- \definedummyword{oe}%
- \definedummyword{o}%
- \definedummyword{ss}%
- %
- % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
- \definedummyword{bf}%
- \definedummyword{gtr}%
- \definedummyword{hat}%
- \definedummyword{less}%
- \definedummyword{sf}%
- \definedummyword{sl}%
- \definedummyword{tclose}%
- \definedummyword{tt}%
- %
- % Texinfo font commands.
- \definedummyword{b}%
- \definedummyword{i}%
- \definedummyword{r}%
- \definedummyword{sc}%
- \definedummyword{t}%
- %
- \definedummyword{TeX}%
- \definedummyword{acronym}%
- \definedummyword{cite}%
- \definedummyword{code}%
- \definedummyword{command}%
- \definedummyword{dfn}%
- \definedummyword{dots}%
- \definedummyword{emph}%
- \definedummyword{env}%
- \definedummyword{file}%
- \definedummyword{kbd}%
- \definedummyword{key}%
- \definedummyword{math}%
- \definedummyword{option}%
- \definedummyword{samp}%
- \definedummyword{strong}%
- \definedummyword{uref}%
- \definedummyword{url}%
- \definedummyword{var}%
- \definedummyword{w}%
- %
- % Assorted special characters.
- \definedummyword{bullet}%
- \definedummyword{copyright}%
- \definedummyword{dots}%
- \definedummyword{enddots}%
- \definedummyword{equiv}%
- \definedummyword{error}%
- \definedummyword{expansion}%
- \definedummyword{minus}%
- \definedummyword{pounds}%
- \definedummyword{point}%
- \definedummyword{print}%
- \definedummyword{result}%
- %
- % Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not
- % contain - or _, and the value does not contain any
- % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
- \let\value = \expandablevalue
- %
- % Normal spaces, not active ones.
- \unsepspaces
- %
- % No macro expansion.
- \turnoffmacros
-}
-
-% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
-% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
-% expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
-{\obeyspaces
- \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
-
-
-% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
-% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
-% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
-% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
-%
-\def\indexdummytex{TeX}
-\def\indexdummydots{...}
-%
-\def\indexnofonts{%
- \def\ { }%
- \def\@{@}%
- % how to handle braces?
- \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
- %
- \let\,=\asis
- \let\"=\asis
- \let\`=\asis
- \let\'=\asis
- \let\^=\asis
- \let\~=\asis
- \let\==\asis
- \let\u=\asis
- \let\v=\asis
- \let\H=\asis
- \let\dotaccent=\asis
- \let\ringaccent=\asis
- \let\tieaccent=\asis
- \let\ubaraccent=\asis
- \let\udotaccent=\asis
- \let\dotless=\asis
- %
- % Other non-English letters.
- \def\AA{AA}%
- \def\AE{AE}%
- \def\L{L}%
- \def\OE{OE}%
- \def\O{O}%
- \def\aa{aa}%
- \def\ae{ae}%
- \def\l{l}%
- \def\oe{oe}%
- \def\o{o}%
- \def\ss{ss}%
- \def\exclamdown{!}%
- \def\questiondown{?}%
- %
- % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
- % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
- % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
- %\let\tt=\asis
- %
- % Texinfo font commands.
- \let\b=\asis
- \let\i=\asis
- \let\r=\asis
- \let\sc=\asis
- \let\t=\asis
- %
- \let\TeX=\indexdummytex
- \let\acronym=\asis
- \let\cite=\asis
- \let\code=\asis
- \let\command=\asis
- \let\dfn=\asis
- \let\dots=\indexdummydots
- \let\emph=\asis
- \let\env=\asis
- \let\file=\asis
- \let\kbd=\asis
- \let\key=\asis
- \let\math=\asis
- \let\option=\asis
- \let\samp=\asis
- \let\strong=\asis
- \let\uref=\asis
- \let\url=\asis
- \let\var=\asis
- \let\w=\asis
-}
-
-\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
-\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
-
-% For \ifx comparisons.
-\def\emptymacro{\empty}
-
-% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
-%
-\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty}
-
-% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
-% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
-% \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are. The main exception
-% is with defuns, which call us directly.
-%
-\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
- % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
- \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
- \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
- \fi
- {%
- \count255=\lastpenalty
- {%
- \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
- \escapechar=`\\
- {%
- \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
- \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
- % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
- %
- % The main index entry text.
- \toks0 = {#2}%
- %
- % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key.
- \def\thirdarg{#3}%
- \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else
- % If the third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index
- % line to write.
- \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
- \fi
- %
- % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
- % get the string to sort by.
- {\indexnofonts
- \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
- \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
- }%
- %
- % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
- % the original text, including any font commands. We write
- % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
- % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
- % sorted result.
- \edef\temp{%
- \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
- \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
- }%
- %
- % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
- % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
- % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
- % \write will make \lastskip zero. The result is that sequences
- % like this:
- % @end defun
- % @tindex whatever
- % @defun ...
- % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
- % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
- % the previous defun.
- %
- % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
- % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
- %
- % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
- %
- \iflinks
- \ifvmode
- \skip0 = \lastskip
- \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\skip0 \fi
- \fi
- %
- \temp % do the write
- %
- \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi
- \fi
- }%
- }%
- \penalty\count255
- }%
-}
-
-% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
-% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
-% or
-% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
-% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
-% containing these kinds of lines:
-% \initial {c}
-% before the first topic whose initial is c
-% \entry {topic}{pagelist}
-% for a topic that is used without subtopics
-% \primary {topic}
-% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
-% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
-% for each subtopic.
-
-% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
-% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
-
-\def\findex {\fnindex}
-\def\kindex {\kyindex}
-\def\cindex {\cpindex}
-\def\vindex {\vrindex}
-\def\tindex {\tpindex}
-\def\pindex {\pgindex}
-
-\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
-{\obeylines %
-\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
-\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
-
-% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
-
-% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
-% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
-%
-\def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
-\def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
- \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
- %
- \smallfonts \rm
- \tolerance = 9500
- \indexbreaks
- %
- % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
- % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
- % \initial {@}
- % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
- % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
- \catcode`\@ = 11
- \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
- \ifeof 1
- % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
- % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
- % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
- % there is some text.
- \putwordIndexNonexistent
- \else
- %
- % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
- % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
- % it can discover if there is anything in it.
- \read 1 to \temp
- \ifeof 1
- \putwordIndexIsEmpty
- \else
- % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
- % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
- % to make right now.
- \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
- \catcode`\\ = 0
- \escapechar = `\\
- \begindoublecolumns
- \input \jobname.#1s
- \enddoublecolumns
- \fi
- \fi
- \closein 1
-\endgroup}
-
-% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
-% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
-
-\def\initial#1{{%
- % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
- \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
- %
- % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
- \removelastskip
- %
- % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
- \penalty -300
- %
- % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
- % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
- % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
- % we need before each entry, but it's better.
- %
- % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
- \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
- \leftline{\secbf #1}%
- \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
- %
- % Do our best not to break after the initial.
- \nobreak
-}}
-
-% This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
-% flush to the right margin. It is used for index and table of contents
-% entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
-%
-\def\entry#1#2{\begingroup
- %
- % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
- % affect previous text.
- \par
- %
- % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
- \parfillskip = 0in
- %
- % No extra space above this paragraph.
- \parskip = 0in
- %
- % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
- \finalhyphendemerits = 0
- %
- % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
- % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
- % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
- % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
- % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
- %
- % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
- % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
- \hangindent = 2em
- %
- % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
- % with blank space.
- \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
- %
- % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns.
- \vskip 0pt plus1pt
- %
- % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
- % parameters we've set above will have an effect.
- \noindent
- %
- % Insert the text of the index entry. TeX will do line-breaking on it.
- #1%
- % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
- % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
- % cursed by a Unix daemon.
- \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
- \def\tempb{#2}%
- \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
- \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
- \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
- %
- % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
- % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
- % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
- \hfil\penalty50
- \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
- %
- % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
- % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
- % \hbox ensues.
- \ifpdf
- \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
- \else
- \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
- \fi
- \fi%
- \par
-\endgroup}
-
-% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
-\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
- \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
-
-\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
-
-\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
-\def\secondary#1#2{{%
- \parfillskip=0in
- \parskip=0in
- \hangindent=1in
- \hangafter=1
- \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
- \ifpdf
- \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
- \else
- #2
- \fi
- \par
-}}
-
-% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
-% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
-% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
-\catcode`\@=11
-
-\newbox\partialpage
-\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
-
-\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
- % Grab any single-column material above us.
- \output = {%
- %
- % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
- % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
- % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
- % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
- % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
- % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
- % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case.
- \ifvoid\partialpage \else
- \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
- \fi
- %
- \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
- % Unvbox the main output page.
- \unvbox\PAGE
- \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
- }%
- }%
- \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
- %
- % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
- \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
- %
- % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
- % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
- % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
- % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
- % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
- %
- % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
- % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
- % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
- % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
- % as it did when we hard-coded it.
- %
- % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
- % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
- % been clobbered.
- %
- \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
- \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
- \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
- \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
- %
- % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
- % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
- \vsize = 2\vsize
-}
-
-% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
-% the last.
-%
-\def\doublecolumnout{%
- \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
- % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
- % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
- % previous page.
- \dimen@ = \vsize
- \divide\dimen@ by 2
- \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
- %
- % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
- \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
- \onepageout\pagesofar
- \unvbox255
- \penalty\outputpenalty
-}
-%
-% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
-% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
-\def\pagesofar{%
- \unvbox\partialpage
- %
- \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
- \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
- \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
-}
-%
-% All done with double columns.
-\def\enddoublecolumns{%
- \output = {%
- % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the
- % current page, no automatic page break.
- \balancecolumns
- %
- % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
- % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
- % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
- % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
- % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
- % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
- % the output somewhat more palatable.)
- \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
- }%
- \eject
- \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
- %
- % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
- % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
- % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
- % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
- \pagegoal = \vsize
-}
-%
-% Called at the end of the double column material.
-\def\balancecolumns{%
- \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
- \dimen@ = \ht0
- \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
- \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
- \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
- %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
- \splittopskip = \topskip
- % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
- {%
- \vbadness = 10000
- \loop
- \global\setbox3 = \copy0
- \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
- \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
- \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
- \repeat
- }%
- %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
- \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
- \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
- %
- \pagesofar
-}
-\catcode`\@ = \other
-
-
-\message{sectioning,}
-% Chapters, sections, etc.
-
-\newcount\chapno
-\newcount\secno \secno=0
-\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
-\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
-
-% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
-\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
-% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
-% We do the following for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
-% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
-\def\appendixletter{%
- \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
- % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
- % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
- % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
- % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
- \else\char\the\appendixno
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
-
-% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
-% page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise.
-\def\thischapter{}
-\def\thissection{}
-
-\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
-\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
-
-% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
-\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
-\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
-
-% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
-\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
-\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
-
-% Choose a numbered-heading macro
-% #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
-% #2 is text for heading
-\def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
-\ifcase\absseclevel
- \chapterzzz{#2}
-\or
- \seczzz{#2}
-\or
- \numberedsubseczzz{#2}
-\or
- \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
-\else
- \ifnum \absseclevel<0
- \chapterzzz{#2}
- \else
- \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
- \fi
-\fi
-}
-
-% like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
-\def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
-\ifcase\absseclevel
- \appendixzzz{#2}
-\or
- \appendixsectionzzz{#2}
-\or
- \appendixsubseczzz{#2}
-\or
- \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
-\else
- \ifnum \absseclevel<0
- \appendixzzz{#2}
- \else
- \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
- \fi
-\fi
-}
-
-% like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
-\def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
-\ifcase\absseclevel
- \unnumberedzzz{#2}
-\or
- \unnumberedseczzz{#2}
-\or
- \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
-\or
- \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
-\else
- \ifnum \absseclevel<0
- \unnumberedzzz{#2}
- \else
- \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
- \fi
-\fi
-}
-
-% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.
-\def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
-\outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
-\def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
-\def\chapterzzz #1{%
- \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
- \global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
- \chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
- \gdef\thissection{#1}%
- \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
- % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
- % because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
- \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
- \writetocentry{chap}{#1}{{\the\chapno}}
- \donoderef
- \global\let\section = \numberedsec
- \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
- \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
-}
-
-% we use \chapno to avoid indenting back
-\def\appendixbox#1{%
- \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} \the\chapno}%
- \hbox to \wd0{#1\hss}}
-
-\outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
-\def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
-\def\appendixzzz #1{%
- \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
- \global\advance \appendixno by 1
- \message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
- \chapmacro {#1}{\appendixbox{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}}%
- \gdef\thissection{#1}%
- \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
- \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
- \writetocentry{appendix}{#1}{{\appendixletter}}
- \appendixnoderef
- \global\let\section = \appendixsec
- \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
- \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
-}
-
-% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
-\outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
-\def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
-
-% @top is like @unnumbered.
-\outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
-
-\outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
-\def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
-\def\unnumberedzzz #1{%
- \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
- %
- % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
- % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
- % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
- % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
- % to be executed, not expanded).
- %
- % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
- % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
- % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
- % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
- % the toc entries.)
- \toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
- %
- \unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
- \gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
- \writetocentry{unnumbchap}{#1}{{\the\chapno}}
- \unnumbnoderef
- \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
- \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
- \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
-}
-
-% Sections.
-\outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
-\def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
-\def\seczzz #1{%
- \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
- \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
- \writetocentry{sec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}
- \donoderef
- \nobreak
-}
-
-\outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
-\outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
-\def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
-\def\appendixsectionzzz #1{%
- \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
- \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
- \writetocentry{sec}{#1}{{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}
- \appendixnoderef
- \nobreak
-}
-
-\outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
-\def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
-\def\unnumberedseczzz #1{%
- \plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
- \writetocentry{unnumbsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}
- \unnumbnoderef
- \nobreak
-}
-
-% Subsections.
-\outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
-\def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
-\def\numberedsubseczzz #1{%
- \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
- \subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
- \writetocentry{subsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}
- \donoderef
- \nobreak
-}
-
-\outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
-\def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
-\def\appendixsubseczzz #1{%
- \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
- \subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
- \writetocentry{subsec}{#1}{{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}
- \appendixnoderef
- \nobreak
-}
-
-\outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
-\def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
-\def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{%
- \plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
- \writetocentry{unnumbsubsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}
- \unnumbnoderef
- \nobreak
-}
-
-% Subsubsections.
-\outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
-\def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
-\def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
- \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
- \subsubsecheading {#1}
- {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
- \writetocentry{subsubsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}
- \donoderef
- \nobreak
-}
-
-\outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
-\def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
-\def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{%
- \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
- \subsubsecheading {#1}
- {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
- \writetocentry{subsubsec}{#1}{{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}
- \appendixnoderef
- \nobreak
-}
-
-\outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
-\def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
-\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
- \plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
- \writetocentry{unnumbsubsubsec}{#1}{{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}
- \unnumbnoderef
- \nobreak
-}
-
-% These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
-% Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
-\def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
-\def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
-\def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
-\def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
-\def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
-
-\def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
-\def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
-\def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
-\def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
-
-\def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
-\def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
-\def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
-\def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
-
-% These macros control what the section commands do, according
-% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
-% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
-\global\let\section = \numberedsec
-\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
-\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
-
-% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
-
-% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
-% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
-% overlong headings to fold.
-% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
-% heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
-% 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
-% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright.
-
-
-\def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz}
-\def\majorheadingzzz #1{%
- {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
- {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
- \parindent=0pt\raggedright
- \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
-
-\def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
-\def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak %
- {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
- \parindent=0pt\raggedright
- \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
-
-% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
-\def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading}
-\def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading}
-\def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading}
-
-% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
-% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
-% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
-
-%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
-\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
-
-\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
-
-%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
-% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
-
-\newskip\chapheadingskip
-
-\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
-\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
-\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
-
-\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
-
-\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
-\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
-\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
-
-\def\CHAPPAGon{%
-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
-\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
-\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
-\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
-
-\def\CHAPPAGodd{
-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
-\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
-\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
-\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
-
-\CHAPPAGon
-
-\def\CHAPFplain{
-\global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
-\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
-\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
-
-% Plain chapter opening.
-% #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
-\def\chfplain#1#2{%
- \pchapsepmacro
- {%
- \chapfonts \rm
- \def\chapnum{#2}%
- \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
- \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
- \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
- \unhbox0 #1\par}%
- }%
- \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
- \nobreak
-}
-
-% Plain opening for unnumbered.
-\def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
-
-% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
-\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
-\def\centerchfplain#1{{%
- \def\centerparametersmaybe{%
- \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
- \leftskip = \rightskip
- \parfillskip = 0pt
- }%
- \chfplain{#1}{}%
-}}
-
-\CHAPFplain % The default
-
-\def\unnchfopen #1{%
-\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
- \parindent=0pt\raggedright
- \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
-}
-
-\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
-\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
-\par\penalty 5000 %
-}
-
-\def\centerchfopen #1{%
-\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
- \parindent=0pt
- \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
-}
-
-\def\CHAPFopen{
-\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
-\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
-\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
-
-
-% Section titles.
-\newskip\secheadingskip
-\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
-\def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
-\def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
-
-% Subsection titles.
-\newskip \subsecheadingskip
-\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
-\def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
-\def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
-
-% Subsubsection titles.
-\let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
-\let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
-\def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
-\def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
-
-
-% Print any size section title.
-%
-% #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
-% number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
-\def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
- {%
- \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
- \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
- }%
- {%
- % Switch to the right set of fonts.
- \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
- %
- % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
- \def\secnum{#2}%
- \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
- %
- \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
- \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
- \unhbox0 #3}%
- }%
- % Add extra space after the heading -- either a line space or a
- % paragraph space, whichever is more. (Some people like to set
- % \parskip to large values for some reason.) Don't allow stretch, though.
- \nobreak
- \ifdim\parskip>\normalbaselineskip
- \kern\parskip
- \else
- \kern\normalbaselineskip
- \fi
- \nobreak
-}
-
-
-\message{toc,}
-% Table of contents.
-\newwrite\tocfile
-
-% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
-% Called from @chapter, etc. We supply {\folio} at the end of the
-% argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro.
-%
-% Usage: \writetocentry{chap}{The Name of The Game}{{\the\chapno}}
-% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
-% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
-%
-\newif\iftocfileopened
-\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
- \iftocfileopened\else
- \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
- \global\tocfileopenedtrue
- \fi
- %
- \iflinks
- \toks0 = {#2}%
- \edef\temp{\write\tocfile{\realbackslash #1entry{\the\toks0}#3{\folio}}}%
- \temp
- \fi
- %
- % Tell \shipout to create a page destination if we're doing pdf, which
- % will be the target of the links in the table of contents. We can't
- % just do it on every page because the title pages are numbered 1 and
- % 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first two pages
- % of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named `1', and
- % two named `2'.
- \ifpdf \pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
-}
-
-\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
-\newcount\savepageno
-\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
-
-% Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
-% to \tocfile.
-%
-\def\startcontents#1{%
- % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
- % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
- % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
- % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
- \contentsalignmacro
- \immediate\closeout\tocfile
- %
- % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
- % It is abundantly clear what they are.
- \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
- \savepageno = \pageno
- \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
- \catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=11
- % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
- % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation. --karl, 9jul97.
- %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
- \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
- \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
- %
- % Roman numerals for page numbers.
- \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
-}
-
-
-% Normal (long) toc.
-\def\contents{%
- \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
- \openin 1 \jobname.toc
- \ifeof 1 \else
- \closein 1
- \input \jobname.toc
- \fi
- \vfill \eject
- \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
- \pdfmakeoutlines
- \endgroup
- \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
- \global\pageno = \savepageno
-}
-
-% And just the chapters.
-\def\summarycontents{%
- \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
- %
- \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
- \let\appendixentry = \shortappendixentry
- \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
- % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
- \secfonts
- \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
- \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
- \rm
- \hyphenpenalty = 10000
- \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
- \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
- \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
- \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
- \let\unnumbsecentry = \secentry
- \let\unnumbsubsecentry = \subsecentry
- \let\unnumbsubsubsecentry = \subsubsecentry
- \openin 1 \jobname.toc
- \ifeof 1 \else
- \closein 1
- \input \jobname.toc
- \fi
- \vfill \eject
- \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
- \endgroup
- \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
- \global\pageno = \savepageno
-}
-\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
-
-\ifpdf
- \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
-\fi
-
-% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
-% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
-% The last argument is the page number.
-% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
-
-% Chapters, in the main contents.
-\def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
-%
-% Chapters, in the short toc.
-% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
-\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
- \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}%
-}
-
-% Appendices, in the main contents.
-\def\appendixentry#1#2#3{%
- \dochapentry{\appendixbox{\putwordAppendix{} #2}\labelspace#1}{#3}}
-%
-% Appendices, in the short toc.
-\let\shortappendixentry = \shortchapentry
-
-% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
-% The arg is, e.g., `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
-% We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
-% command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
-% for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
-%
-\newdimen\shortappendixwidth
-%
-\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
- % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
- % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
- % But use \hss just in case.
- % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
- % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
- \dimen0 = 1em
- \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hss}%
-}
-
-% Unnumbered chapters.
-\def\unnumbchapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#1}{#3}}
-\def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2#3{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}}
-
-% Sections.
-\def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
-\def\unnumbsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
-
-% Subsections.
-\def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
-\def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#5}}
-
-% And subsubsections.
-\def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
- \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
-\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#6}}
-
-% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
-\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
-
-% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
-% page number.
-%
-% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
-% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
-\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
- \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
- \begingroup
- \chapentryfonts
- \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
- \endgroup
- \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
-}
-
-\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
- \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
- \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
-\endgroup}
-
-\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
- \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
- \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
-\endgroup}
-
-\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
- \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
- \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
-\endgroup}
-
-% Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
-% the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here. (We
-% can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
-% of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
-\def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
- \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
- % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments. Since the toc is
- % typeset in cmr, characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
- % have to do the usual translation tricks.
- \entry{#1}{#2}%
-\endgroup}
-
-% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
-\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
-
-\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
-\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
-
-\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
-\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
-\let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
-\let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
-
-
-\message{environments,}
-% @foo ... @end foo.
-
-% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
-%
-% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
-% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
-%
-\def\point{$\star$}
-\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
-\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
-\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
-\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
-
-% The @error{} command.
-% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
-%
-\newbox\errorbox
-%
-{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
-\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
-% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
-\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
-%
-\global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
- \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
- \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
- \vbox{
- \hrule height\dimen2
- \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
- \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
- \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
- \hrule height\dimen2}
- \hfil}
-%
-\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
-
-% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
-% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
-% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
-
-\def\tex{\begingroup
- \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
- \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
- \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
- \catcode `\%=14
- \catcode `\+=\other
- \catcode `\"=\other
- \catcode `\==\other
- \catcode `\|=\other
- \catcode `\<=\other
- \catcode `\>=\other
- \escapechar=`\\
- %
- \let\b=\ptexb
- \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
- \let\c=\ptexc
- \let\,=\ptexcomma
- \let\.=\ptexdot
- \let\dots=\ptexdots
- \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
- \let\!=\ptexexclam
- \let\i=\ptexi
- \let\{=\ptexlbrace
- \let\+=\tabalign
- \let\}=\ptexrbrace
- \let\*=\ptexstar
- \let\t=\ptext
- %
- \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
- \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
- \def\@{@}%
-\let\Etex=\endgroup}
-
-% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
-% @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
-% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
-
-% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
-\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
-
-% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
-% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
-% have any width.
-\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
-
-% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
-% space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
-% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
-% should produce a line of output anyway.
-%
-{\obeyspaces %
-\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
-
-% Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is. This is
-% for use in \parsearg.
-{\sepspaces%
-\global\let\obeyedspace= }
-
-% This space is always present above and below environments.
-\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
-
-% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
-% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
-% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
-% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
-%
-\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
- % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz, q.v.
- \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
- \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
- \endgraf
- \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
- \removelastskip
- % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
- % or better ...
- \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \else \penalty-50 \fi
- \vskip\envskipamount
- \fi
- \fi
-}}
-
-\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
-
-% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
-\let\nonarrowing=\relax
-
-% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
-% environment contents.
-\font\circle=lcircle10
-\newdimen\circthick
-\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
-\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
-\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
-%
-\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
-\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
-\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
-\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
-\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
- \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
- \hskip\rskip}}
-\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
- \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
- \hskip\rskip}}
-%
-\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
-
-\def\cartouche{%
-\par % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
-\begingroup
- \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
- \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
- \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
- \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
- \cartouter=\hsize
- \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
-% side, and for 6pt waste from
-% each corner char, and rule thickness
- \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
- % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
- \let\nonarrowing=\comment
- \vbox\bgroup
- \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
- \carttop
- \hbox\bgroup
- \hskip\lskip
- \vrule\kern3pt
- \vbox\bgroup
- \hsize=\cartinner
- \kern3pt
- \begingroup
- \baselineskip=\normbskip
- \lineskip=\normlskip
- \parskip=\normpskip
- \vskip -\parskip
-\def\Ecartouche{%
- \endgroup
- \kern3pt
- \egroup
- \kern3pt\vrule
- \hskip\rskip
- \egroup
- \cartbot
- \egroup
-\endgroup
-}}
-
-
-% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
-% inside a group.
-\def\nonfillstart{%
- \aboveenvbreak
- \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
- \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
- \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
- \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
- \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
- \parskip = 0pt
- \parindent = 0pt
- \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
- % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
- % at next level down.
- \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
- \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
- \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
- \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
- \let\nonarrowing=\relax
- \fi
-}
-
-% Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular
-% environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
-%
-% To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via
-% \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group. That way we keep
-% the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be
-% inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after
-% the environment.
-%
-\def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}
-
-% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font.
-\def\lisp{\begingroup
- \nonfillstart
- \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
- \tt
- \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
- \gobble % eat return
-}
-
-% @example: Same as @lisp.
-\def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
-
-% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
-% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
-\def\smalllisp{\begingroup
- \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
- \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
- \smallexamplefonts
- \lisp
-}
-\let\smallexample = \smalllisp
-
-
-% @display: same as @lisp except keep current font.
-%
-\def\display{\begingroup
- \nonfillstart
- \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
- \gobble
-}
-%
-% @smalldisplay: @display plus smaller fonts.
-%
-\def\smalldisplay{\begingroup
- \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
- \smallexamplefonts \rm
- \display
-}
-
-% @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
-%
-\def\format{\begingroup
- \let\nonarrowing = t
- \nonfillstart
- \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
- \gobble
-}
-%
-% @smallformat: @format plus smaller fonts.
-%
-\def\smallformat{\begingroup
- \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
- \smallexamplefonts \rm
- \format
-}
-
-% @flushleft (same as @format).
-%
-\def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
-
-% @flushright.
-%
-\def\flushright{\begingroup
- \let\nonarrowing = t
- \nonfillstart
- \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
- \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
- \gobble
-}
-
-
-% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
-% and narrows the margins.
-%
-\def\quotation{%
- \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
- {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
- \parindent=0pt
- % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
- % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
- \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
- %
- % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
- \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
- \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
- \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
- \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
- \let\nonarrowing = \relax
- \fi
-}
-
-
-% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
-% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
-% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
-% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org
-%
-% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
-%
-% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
-% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
-% verbatim line.
-\def\dospecials{%
- \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
- \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
- \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
-}
-%
-% [Knuth] p. 380
-\def\uncatcodespecials{%
- \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=12}\dospecials}
-%
-% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
-% Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font
-\begingroup
- \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq}
-\endgroup
-%
-% Setup for the @verb command.
-%
-% Eight spaces for a tab
-\begingroup
- \catcode`\^^I=\active
- \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
-\endgroup
-%
-\def\setupverb{%
- \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
- \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
- \catcode`\`=\active
- \tabeightspaces
- % Respect line breaks,
- % print special symbols as themselves, and
- % make each space count
- % must do in this order:
- \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
-}
-
-% Setup for the @verbatim environment
-%
-% Real tab expansion
-\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
-%
-\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
-\begingroup
- \catcode`\^^I=\active
- \gdef\tabexpand{%
- \catcode`\^^I=\active
- \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
- \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
- \divide\dimen0 by\tabw
- \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
- \advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw
- \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
- }%
- }
-\endgroup
-\def\setupverbatim{%
- % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
- \tt
- \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
- \catcode`\`=\active
- \tabexpand
- % Respect line breaks,
- % print special symbols as themselves, and
- % make each space count
- % must do in this order:
- \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
- \everypar{\starttabbox}%
-}
-
-% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
-% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
-% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
-%
-% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
-%
-% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
-\begingroup
- \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12
- \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
-\endgroup
-%
-\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
-%
-%
-% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
-% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
-%
-% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
-%
-% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
-% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
-% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
-%
-% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
-%% Include LaTeX hack for completeness -- never know
-%% \begingroup
-%% \catcode`|=0 \catcode`[=1
-%% \catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12\catcode`\ =\active
-%% \catcode`\\=12|gdef|doverbatim#1@end verbatim[
-%% #1|endgroup|def|Everbatim[]|end[verbatim]]
-%% |endgroup
-%
-\begingroup
- \catcode`\ =\active
- \obeylines %
- % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
- % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank
- % line in the output.
- \gdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\end{verbatim}}%
-\endgroup
-%
-\def\verbatim{%
- \def\Everbatim{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
- \begingroup
- \nonfillstart
- \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
- \begingroup\setupverbatim\doverbatim
-}
-
-% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
-%
-% Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name).
-\def\verbatiminclude{%
- \begingroup
- \catcode`\\=\other
- \catcode`~=\other
- \catcode`^=\other
- \catcode`_=\other
- \catcode`|=\other
- \catcode`<=\other
- \catcode`>=\other
- \catcode`+=\other
- \parsearg\doverbatiminclude
-}
-\def\setupverbatiminclude{%
- \begingroup
- \nonfillstart
- \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
- \begingroup\setupverbatim
-}
-%
-\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
- % Restore active chars for included file.
- \endgroup
- \begingroup
- \let\value=\expandablevalue
- \def\thisfile{#1}%
- \expandafter\expandafter\setupverbatiminclude\input\thisfile
- \endgroup
- \nonfillfinish
- \endgroup
-}
-
-% @copying ... @end copying.
-% Save the text away for @insertcopying later. Many commands won't be
-% allowed in this context, but that's ok.
-%
-% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
-% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
-% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
-% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
-% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
-% possible is very desirable.
-%
-\def\copying{\begingroup
- % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end copying'.
- % \ is the escape char in this texinfo.tex file, so it is the
- % delimiter for the command; @ will be the escape char when we read
- % it, but that doesn't matter.
- \long\def\docopying##1\end copying{\gdef\copyingtext{##1}\enddocopying}%
- %
- % We must preserve ^^M's in the input file; see \insertcopying below.
- \catcode`\^^M = \active
- \docopying
-}
-
-% What we do to finish off the copying text.
-%
-\def\enddocopying{\endgroup\ignorespaces}
-
-% @insertcopying. Here we must play games with ^^M's. On the one hand,
-% we need them to delimit commands such as `@end quotation', so they
-% must be active. On the other hand, we certainly don't want every
-% end-of-line to be a \par, as would happen with the normal active
-% definition of ^^M. On the third hand, two ^^M's in a row should still
-% generate a \par.
-%
-% Our approach is to make ^^M insert a space and a penalty1 normally;
-% then it can also check if \lastpenalty=1. If it does, then manually
-% do \par.
-%
-% This messes up the normal definitions of @c[omment], so we redefine
-% it. Similarly for @ignore. (These commands are used in the gcc
-% manual for man page generation.)
-%
-% Seems pretty fragile, most line-oriented commands will presumably
-% fail, but for the limited use of getting the copying text (which
-% should be quite simple) inserted, we can hope it's ok.
-%
-{\catcode`\^^M=\active %
-\gdef\insertcopying{\begingroup %
- \parindent = 0pt % looks wrong on title page
- \def^^M{%
- \ifnum \lastpenalty=1 %
- \par %
- \else %
- \space \penalty 1 %
- \fi %
- }%
- %
- % Fix @c[omment] for catcode 13 ^^M's.
- \def\c##1^^M{\ignorespaces}%
- \let\comment = \c %
- %
- % Don't bother jumping through all the hoops that \doignore does, it
- % would be very hard since the catcodes are already set.
- \long\def\ignore##1\end ignore{\ignorespaces}%
- %
- \copyingtext %
-\endgroup}%
-}
-
-\message{defuns,}
-% @defun etc.
-
-% Allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
-\def\setdeffont#1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
-
-\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
-\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
-\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
-
-\newcount\parencount
-
-% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
-%
-\def\activeparens{%
- \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
- \catcode`\&=\active
- \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
-}
-
-% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
-\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
-
-{\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
-
-% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
-% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
-% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
-\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
-\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
-
-\gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
-\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
-% This is used to turn on special parens
-% but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
-\gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
-
-% Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
-% This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
-\gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
- \global\advance\parencount by 1
-}
-%
-% This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
-\gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
-%
-\gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
- % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
- \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
- \global\advance \parencount by -1 }
-% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
-\gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
-%
-\gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
-} % End of definition inside \activeparens
-%% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
-%% contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ]
-\def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
-\def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
-\let\ampnr = \&
-\def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
-\def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
-
-% Active &'s sneak into the index arguments, so make sure it's defined.
-{
- \catcode`& = \active
- \global\let& = \ampnr
-}
-
-% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
-% #1 is the function name.
-% #2 is the type of definition, such as "Function".
-%
-\def\defname#1#2{%
- % How we'll output the type name. Putting it in brackets helps
- % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
- % just below it.
- \ifempty{#2}%
- \def\defnametype{}%
- \else
- \def\defnametype{[\rm #2]}%
- \fi
- %
- % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
- \dimen2=\leftskip
- \advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
- %
- % Figure out values for the paragraph shape.
- \setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\defnametype}}%
- \dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line
- \dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent % size for continuations
- \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1
- %
- % Output arg 2 ("Function" or some such) but stuck inside a box of
- % width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking.
- \noindent
- %
- {% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
- % so that \rightline will obey them.
- \advance \hsize by -\dimen2
- \dimen3 = 0pt % was -1.25pc
- \rlap{\rightline{\defnametype\kern\dimen3}}%
- }%
- %
- % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
- \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
- \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
- \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
- {\df #1}\enskip % output function name
- % \defunargs will be called next to output the arguments, if any.
-}
-
-% Common pieces to start any @def...
-% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
-% #2 is the \...x control sequence (which our caller defines).
-% #3 is the control sequence to process the header, such as \defunheader.
-%
-\def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
- \begingroup\inENV
- % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
- % which is there to keep the function description together with its
- % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we want to allow a
- % break after all. Check for penalty 10002 (inserted by
- % \defargscommonending) instead of 10000, since the sectioning
- % commands insert a \penalty10000, and we don't want to allow a break
- % between a section heading and a defun.
- \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty0 \fi
- \medbreak
- %
- % Define the \E... end token that this defining construct specifies
- % so that it will exit this group.
- \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
- %
- \parindent=0in
- \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
- \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
-}
-
-% Common part of the \...x definitions.
-%
-\def\defxbodycommon{%
- % As with \parsebodycommon above, allow line break if we have multiple
- % x headers in a row. It's not a great place, though.
- \ifnum\lastpenalty=10000 \penalty1000 \fi
- %
- \begingroup\obeylines
-}
-
-% Process body of @defun, @deffn, @defmac, etc.
-%
-\def\defparsebody#1#2#3{%
- \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
- \def#2{\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit#3}%
- \catcode\equalChar=\active
- \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
- \spacesplit#3%
-}
-
-% #1, #2, #3 are the common arguments (see \parsebodycommon above).
-% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
-%
-\def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
- \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
- \def#2##1 {\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
- \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
- % The \empty here prevents misinterpretation of a construct such as
- % @deffn {whatever} {Enharmonic comma}
- % See comments at \deftpparsebody, although in our case we don't have
- % to remove the \empty afterwards, since it is empty.
- \spacesplit{#3{#4}}\empty
-}
-
-% Used for @deftypemethod and @deftypeivar.
-% #1, #2, #3 are the common arguments (see \defparsebody).
-% #4, delimited by a space, is the class name.
-% #5 is the method's return type.
-%
-\def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {%
- \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
- \def#2##1 ##2 {\defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}%
- \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
- \spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}%
-}
-
-% Used for @deftypeop. The change from \deftypemethparsebody is an
-% extra argument at the beginning which is the `category', instead of it
-% being the hardwired string `Method' or `Instance Variable'. We have
-% to account for this both in the \...x definition and in parsing the
-% input at hand. Thus also need a control sequence (passed as #5) for
-% the \E... definition to assign the category name to.
-%
-\def\deftypeopparsebody#1#2#3#4#5 #6 {%
- \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
- \def#2##1 ##2 ##3 {\def#4{##1}%
- \defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##2}{##3}}}%
- \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
- \spacesplit{#3{#5}{#6}}%
-}
-
-% For @defop.
-\def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {%
- \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
- \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
- \defxbodycommon \activeparens \spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
- \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
- \spacesplit{#3{#5}}%
-}
-
-% These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
-% except that they do not make parens into active characters.
-% These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
-%
-\def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{%
- \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
- \def#2{\defxbodycommon \spacesplit#3}%
- \catcode\equalChar=\active
- \begingroup\obeylines
- \spacesplit#3%
-}
-
-% @defopvar.
-\def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {%
- \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
- \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
- \defxbodycommon \spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
- \begingroup\obeylines
- \spacesplit{#3{#5}}%
-}
-
-\def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
- \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
- \def#2##1 {\defxbodycommon \spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
- \begingroup\obeylines
- \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
-}
-
-% This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
-% type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
-% termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument. Sigh.
-% \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
-%
-% So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name. That
-% way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
-% won't strip off the braces.
-%
-\def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
- \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
- \def#2##1 {\defxbodycommon \spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
- \begingroup\obeylines
- \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
-}
-
-% Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
-% braces (if any). That's what this does.
-%
-\def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
-
-% After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
-% thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
-% (which might be empty) the arguments.
-%
-\def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
- #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
-}%
-
-% Split up #2 (the rest of the input line) at the first space token.
-% call #1 with two arguments:
-% the first is all of #2 before the space token,
-% the second is all of #2 after that space token.
-% If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
-% and the second is passed as empty.
-%
-{\obeylines %
- \gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitx{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitx}%
- \long\gdef\spacesplitx#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitx{%
- \ifx\relax #3%
- #1{#2}{}%
- \else %
- #1{#2}{#3#4}%
- \fi}%
-}
-
-% Define @defun.
-
-% This is called to end the arguments processing for all the @def... commands.
-%
-\def\defargscommonending{%
- \interlinepenalty = 10000
- \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
- \endgraf
- \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
- \penalty 10002 % signal to \parsebodycommon.
-}
-
-% This expands the args and terminates the paragraph they comprise.
-%
-\def\defunargs#1{\functionparens \sl
-% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
-% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
-% Set the font temporarily and use \font in case \setfont made \tensl a macro.
-{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=0}%
-#1%
-{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=45}%
-\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
- \defargscommonending
-}
-
-\def\deftypefunargs #1{%
-% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
-% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
-% Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
-\boldbraxnoamp
-\tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
- \defargscommonending
-}
-
-% Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
-
-% @deffn Command forward-char nchars
-
-\def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
-
-\def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
-\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
-\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
-}
-
-% @defun == @deffn Function
-
-\def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
-
-\def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
-\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDeffunc}%
-\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
-\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
-}
-
-% @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
-
-\def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
-
-% #1 is the data type. #2 is the name and args.
-\def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
-% #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
-\def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
-\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
-\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypefun}%
-\deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
-\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
-}
-
-% @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
-
-\def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
-
-% \defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$
-% puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
-\def\defheaderxcond#1#2$.${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
-
-% #1 is the classification. #2 is the data type. #3 is the name and args.
-\def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
-% #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
-\def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
-\doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
-\begingroup
-\normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
-% at least some C++ text from working
-\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}%
-\deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
-\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
-}
-
-% @defmac == @deffn Macro
-
-\def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
-
-\def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
-\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefmac}%
-\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
-\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
-}
-
-% @defspec == @deffn Special Form
-
-\def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
-
-\def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
-\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefspec}%
-\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
-\catcode\equalChar=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
-}
-
-% @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...
-%
-\def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
-\defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
-%
-\def\defopheader#1#2#3{%
- \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% function index entry
- \begingroup
- \defname{#2}{\defoptype\ \putwordon\ #1}%
- \defunargs{#3}%
- \endgroup
-}
-
-% @deftypeop CATEGORY CLASS TYPE OPERATION ARG...
-%
-\def\deftypeop #1 {\def\deftypeopcategory{#1}%
- \deftypeopparsebody\Edeftypeop\deftypeopx\deftypeopheader
- \deftypeopcategory}
-%
-% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the operation name, #4 the args.
-\def\deftypeopheader#1#2#3#4{%
- \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
- \begingroup
- \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
- {\deftypeopcategory\ \putwordon\ \code{#1}}%
- \deftypefunargs{#4}%
- \endgroup
-}
-
-% @deftypemethod CLASS TYPE METHOD ARG...
-%
-\def\deftypemethod{%
- \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
-%
-% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
-\def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
- \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
- \begingroup
- \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
- \deftypefunargs{#4}%
- \endgroup
-}
-
-% @deftypeivar CLASS TYPE VARNAME
-%
-\def\deftypeivar{%
- \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypeivar\deftypeivarx\deftypeivarheader}
-%
-% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the variable name.
-\def\deftypeivarheader#1#2#3{%
- \dosubind{vr}{\code{#3}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in variable index
- \begingroup
- \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
- {\putwordInstanceVariableof\ \code{#1}}%
- \defvarargs{#3}%
- \endgroup
-}
-
-% @defmethod == @defop Method
-%
-\def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
-%
-% #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args.
-\def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{%
- \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
- \begingroup
- \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
- \defunargs{#3}%
- \endgroup
-}
-
-% @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
-
-\def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
-\defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
-
-\def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
- \dosubind{vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% variable index entry
- \begingroup
- \defname{#2}{\defcvtype\ \putwordof\ #1}%
- \defvarargs{#3}%
- \endgroup
-}
-
-% @defivar CLASS VARNAME == @defcv {Instance Variable} CLASS VARNAME
-%
-\def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
-%
-\def\defivarheader#1#2#3{%
- \dosubind{vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in var index
- \begingroup
- \defname{#2}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ #1}%
- \defvarargs{#3}%
- \endgroup
-}
-
-% @defvar
-% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
-% This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
-% This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
-\def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
- \defargscommonending
-}
-
-% @defvr Counter foo-count
-
-\def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
-
-\def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
-\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
-
-% @defvar == @defvr Variable
-
-\def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
-
-\def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
-\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefvar}%
-\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
-}
-
-% @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
-
-\def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
-
-\def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
-\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefopt}%
-\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
-}
-
-% @deftypevar int foobar
-
-\def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
-
-% #1 is the data type. #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
-% is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
-\def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
-\dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
-\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypevar}%
- \defargscommonending
-\endgroup}
-\def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
-
-% @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
-
-\def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
-
-\def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
-\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}
- \defargscommonending
-\endgroup}
-
-% Now define @deftp
-% Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
-
-\def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
-
-% @deftp Class window height width ...
-
-\def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
-
-\def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
-\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
-
-% These definitions are used if you use @defunx (etc.)
-% anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
-%
-\def\defcvx#1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
-\def\deffnx#1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
-\def\defivarx#1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
-\def\defmacx#1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
-\def\defmethodx#1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
-\def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
-\def\defopx#1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
-\def\defspecx#1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftpx#1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypefnx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypefunx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypeivarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeivarx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypemethodx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypeopx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeopx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypevarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
-\def\deftypevrx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
-\def\defunx#1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
-\def\defvarx#1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
-\def\defvrx#1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
-
-
-\message{macros,}
-% @macro.
-
-% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
-% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
-\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
- \newwrite\macscribble
- \def\scanmacro#1{%
- \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
- % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
- \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other \escapechar=`\@
- % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
- \toks0={#1\endinput}%
- \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
- \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
- \immediate\closeout\macscribble
- \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
- \input \jobname.tmp
- \endgroup
-}
-\else
-\def\scanmacro#1{%
-\begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
-% Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
-\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other \escapechar=`\@
-\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1\endinput}\endgroup}
-\fi
-
-\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
-\newtoks\macname % Macro name
-\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
-\def\macrolist{} % List of all defined macros in the form
- % \do\macro1\do\macro2...
-
-% Utility routines.
-% Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.
-\def\cslet#1#2{%
-\expandafter\expandafter
-\expandafter\let
-\expandafter\expandafter
-\csname#1\endcsname
-\csname#2\endcsname}
-
-% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
-% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
-{\catcode`\@=11
-\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
-\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
-\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
-\def\unbrace#1{#1}
-\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
-}
-
-% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
-{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
-\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
-\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
-\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
-}
-
-% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
-% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
-% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
-
-% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
-% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
-% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
-
-\def\macrobodyctxt{%
- \catcode`\~=\other
- \catcode`\^=\other
- \catcode`\_=\other
- \catcode`\|=\other
- \catcode`\<=\other
- \catcode`\>=\other
- \catcode`\+=\other
- \catcode`\{=\other
- \catcode`\}=\other
- \catcode`\@=\other
- \catcode`\^^M=\other
- \usembodybackslash}
-
-\def\macroargctxt{%
- \catcode`\~=\other
- \catcode`\^=\other
- \catcode`\_=\other
- \catcode`\|=\other
- \catcode`\<=\other
- \catcode`\>=\other
- \catcode`\+=\other
- \catcode`\@=\other
- \catcode`\\=\other}
-
-% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
-% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
-% where N is the macro parameter number.
-% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
-% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
-
-{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
- @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
- @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
-}
-\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
-
-\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
-\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
-
-\def\macroxxx#1{%
- \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
- \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
- \paramno=0%
- \else
- \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
- \fi
- \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
- \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
- \else
- \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
- \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
- \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
- \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
- % Add the macroname to \macrolist
- \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}%
- \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0
- \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}%
- \fi
- \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
- \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
- \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
- \fi}
-
-\def\unmacro{\parsearg\dounmacro}
-\def\dounmacro#1{%
- \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
- \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
- \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
- % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
- \begingroup
- \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
- \let\do\unmacrodo
- \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
- \endgroup
- \else
- \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
- \fi
-}
-
-% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any
-% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
-%
-\def\unmacrodo#1{%
- \ifx#1\relax
- % remove this
- \else
- \noexpand\do \noexpand #1%
- \fi
-}
-
-% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
-% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
-% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
-\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
-\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
-\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
-\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
-
-% Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist
-% so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah
-% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
-% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
-
-% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
-% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
-% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
-% it to # just before using the token list produced.
-%
-% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
-% the macro is used.
-
-\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
- \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
-\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
- \if#1;\let\next=\relax
- \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
- \advance\paramno by 1%
- \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
- {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
- \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
- \fi\next}
-
-% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
-% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
-
-\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
-{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
-\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
-{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
-
-% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
-% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
-% Much magic with \expandafter here.
-% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
-% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
-\def\defmacro{%
- \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
- \ifrecursive
- \ifcase\paramno
- % 0
- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
- \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
- \or % 1
- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
- \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
- \noexpand\braceorline
- \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
- \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
- \else % many
- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
- \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
- \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
- \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
- \expandafter\expandafter
- \expandafter\xdef
- \expandafter\expandafter
- \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
- \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
- \fi
- \else
- \ifcase\paramno
- % 0
- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
- \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
- \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
- \or % 1
- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
- \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
- \noexpand\braceorline
- \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
- \egroup
- \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
- \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
- \else % many
- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
- \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
- \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
- \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
- \expandafter\expandafter
- \expandafter\xdef
- \expandafter\expandafter
- \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
- \paramlist{%
- \egroup
- \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
- \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
- \fi
- \fi}
-
-\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
-
-% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
-% {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
-% line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
-% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
-\def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
-\def\braceorlinexxx{%
- \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
- \expandafter\parsearg
- \fi \next}
-
-% We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
-% expanded by \write.
-\def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
- \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
-
-
-% @alias.
-% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
-% sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
-\def\alias{\begingroup\obeyspaces\parsearg\aliasxxx}
-\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
-\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{\ignoreactivespaces
-\edef\next{\global\let\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname=%
- \expandafter\noexpand\csname#2\endcsname}%
-\expandafter\endgroup\next}
-
-
-\message{cross references,}
-% @xref etc.
-
-\newwrite\auxfile
-
-\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
-\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
-
-% @inforef is relatively simple.
-\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
-\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
- node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
-
-% @node's job is to define \lastnode.
-\def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
-\def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]}
-\def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
-\let\nwnode=\node
-\let\lastnode=\relax
-
-% The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these.
-\def\donoderef{%
- \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
- {Ysectionnumberandtype}%
- \global\let\lastnode=\relax
- \fi
-}
-\def\unnumbnoderef{%
- \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}%
- \global\let\lastnode=\relax
- \fi
-}
-\def\appendixnoderef{%
- \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
- {Yappendixletterandtype}%
- \global\let\lastnode=\relax
- \fi
-}
-
-
-% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
-%
-\newcount\savesfregister
-\gdef\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
-\gdef\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
-\gdef\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
-
-% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
-% anchor), namely NAME-title (the corresponding @chapter/etc. name),
-% NAME-pg (the page number), and NAME-snt (section number and type).
-% Called from \foonoderef.
-%
-% We have to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section
-% title aren't expanded. It would be nicer not to expand the titles in
-% the first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do.
-%
-% Likewise, use \turnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
-% and backslash work in node names.
-%
-\def\setref#1#2{{%
- \atdummies
- \pdfmkdest{#1}%
- %
- \turnoffactive
- \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
- \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
- \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}%
-}}
-
-% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
-% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
-% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
-% manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
-%
-\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
-\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
-\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
-\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
- \unsepspaces
- \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
- \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
- \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
- \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
- \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
- % No printed node name was explicitly given.
- \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
- % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
- \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
- \else
- % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
- % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it.
- \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
- % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
- \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
- \else
- \ifhavexrefs
- % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
- \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
- \else
- % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
- \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
- \fi%
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- %
- % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
- % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
- % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
- % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
- % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
- % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
- \ifpdf
- \leavevmode
- \getfilename{#4}%
- {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash
- \ifnum\filenamelength>0
- \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
- goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1}%
- \else
- \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
- goto name{#1}%
- \fi
- }%
- \linkcolor
- \fi
- %
- \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
- \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
- \else
- % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
- % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
- % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
- % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
- % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
- {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash
- % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
- % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
- \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
- \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
- }%
- % [mynode],
- [\printednodename],\space
- % page 3
- \turnoffactive \otherbackslash \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
- \fi
- \endlink
-\endgroup}
-
-% \dosetq is called from \setref to do the actual \write (\iflinks).
-%
-\def\dosetq#1#2{%
- {\let\folio=0%
- \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}%
- \iflinks \next \fi
- }%
-}
-
-% \internalsetq{foo}{page} expands into
-% CHARACTERS @xrdef{foo}{...expansion of \page...}
-\def\internalsetq#1#2{@xrdef{#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
-
-% Things to be expanded by \internalsetq.
-%
-\def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
-\def\Ytitle{\thissection}
-\def\Ynothing{}
-\def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
- \ifnum\secno=0
- \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
- \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
- \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
- \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
- \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
- \else
- \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
- \fi\fi\fi
-}
-
-\def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
- \ifnum\secno=0
- \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
- \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
- \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
- \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
- \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
- \else
- \putwordSection@tie
- @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
- \fi\fi\fi
-}
-
-% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
-% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
-%
-\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
- \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
-\else
- \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
-\fi
-
-% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
-% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
-%
-\def\refx#1#2{%
- {%
- \indexnofonts
- \otherbackslash
- \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
- \csname X#1\endcsname
- }%
- \ifx\thisrefX\relax
- % If not defined, say something at least.
- \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
- \iflinks
- \ifhavexrefs
- \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
- \else
- \ifwarnedxrefs\else
- \global\warnedxrefstrue
- \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \else
- % It's defined, so just use it.
- \thisrefX
- \fi
- #2% Output the suffix in any case.
-}
-
-% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
-%
-\def\xrdef#1{\expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname}
-
-% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
-\def\readauxfile{\begingroup
- \catcode`\^^@=\other
- \catcode`\^^A=\other
- \catcode`\^^B=\other
- \catcode`\^^C=\other
- \catcode`\^^D=\other
- \catcode`\^^E=\other
- \catcode`\^^F=\other
- \catcode`\^^G=\other
- \catcode`\^^H=\other
- \catcode`\^^K=\other
- \catcode`\^^L=\other
- \catcode`\^^N=\other
- \catcode`\^^P=\other
- \catcode`\^^Q=\other
- \catcode`\^^R=\other
- \catcode`\^^S=\other
- \catcode`\^^T=\other
- \catcode`\^^U=\other
- \catcode`\^^V=\other
- \catcode`\^^W=\other
- \catcode`\^^X=\other
- \catcode`\^^Z=\other
- \catcode`\^^[=\other
- \catcode`\^^\=\other
- \catcode`\^^]=\other
- \catcode`\^^^=\other
- \catcode`\^^_=\other
- % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
- % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
- % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
- % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
- % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
- % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
- % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
- % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
- %
- % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
- % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
- % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
- %
- \catcode`\^=\other
- %
- % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but...
- \catcode`\~=\other
- \catcode`\[=\other
- \catcode`\]=\other
- \catcode`\"=\other
- \catcode`\_=\other
- \catcode`\|=\other
- \catcode`\<=\other
- \catcode`\>=\other
- \catcode`\$=\other
- \catcode`\#=\other
- \catcode`\&=\other
- \catcode`\%=\other
- \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
- %
- % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
- {%
- \count 1=128
- \def\loop{%
- \catcode\count 1=\other
- \advance\count 1 by 1
- \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
- }%
- }%
- %
- % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
- % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
- % For example, @xrdef{$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
- % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
- % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
- \catcode`\\=\other
- %
- % @ is our escape character in .aux files.
- \catcode`\{=1
- \catcode`\}=2
- \catcode`\@=0
- %
- \openin 1 \jobname.aux
- \ifeof 1 \else
- \closein 1
- \input \jobname.aux
- \global\havexrefstrue
- \global\warnedobstrue
- \fi
- % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
- \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
-\endgroup}
-
-
-% Footnotes.
-
-\newcount \footnoteno
-
-% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
-% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
-% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
-% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
-% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
-\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
-
-% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
-\let\footnotestyle=\comment
-
-\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
-
-{\catcode `\@=11
-%
-% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
-\gdef\footnote{%
- \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
- \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
- %
- % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
- % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
- \let\@sf\empty
- \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
- %
- % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
- \unskip
- \thisfootno\@sf
- \dofootnote
-}%
-
-% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
-% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
-%
-% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
-% \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
-% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
-%
-% The start of the footnote looks usually like this:
-\gdef\startfootins{\insert\footins\bgroup}
-%
-% ... but this macro is redefined inside @multitable.
-%
-\gdef\dofootnote{%
- \startfootins
- % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
- % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
- % So reset some parameters.
- \hsize=\pagewidth
- \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
- \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
- \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
- \floatingpenalty\@MM
- \leftskip\z@skip
- \rightskip\z@skip
- \spaceskip\z@skip
- \xspaceskip\z@skip
- \parindent\defaultparindent
- %
- \smallfonts \rm
- %
- % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
- % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use
- % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
- % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
- \let\noindent = \relax
- %
- % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the
- % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
- \everypar = {\hang}%
- \textindent{\thisfootno}%
- %
- % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
- % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
- % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
- \footstrut
- \futurelet\next\fo@t
-}
-}%end \catcode `\@=11
-
-% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
-% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
-% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
-% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
-% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
-%
-\def\|{%
- % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
- \leavevmode
- %
- % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
- \vadjust{%
- % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
- % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
- \vskip-\baselineskip
- %
- % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
- % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
- \llap{%
- %
- % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
- \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
- %
- % This is the space between the bar and the text.
- \hskip 12pt
- }%
- }%
-}
-
-% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
-% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
-% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
-%
-\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
-
-% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
-% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
-%
-% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
-% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
-% undone and the next image would fail.
-\openin 1 = epsf.tex
-\ifeof 1 \else
- \closein 1
- % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
- % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
- \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
- \input epsf.tex
-\fi
-%
-% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
-\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
-\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
- work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
- it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
-%
-\def\image#1{%
- \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
- \ifwarnednoepsf \else
- \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
- \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
- \global\warnednoepsftrue
- \fi
- \else
- \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
- \fi
-}
-%
-% Arguments to @image:
-% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
-% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
-% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
-% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
-% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
-\newif\ifimagevmode
-\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
- \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
- \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names
- % If the image is by itself, center it.
- \ifvmode
- \imagevmodetrue
- \nobreak\bigskip
- % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
- % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
- % above and below.
- \nobreak\vskip\parskip
- \nobreak
- \line\bgroup\hss
- \fi
- %
- % Output the image.
- \ifpdf
- \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
- \else
- % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
- \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
- \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
- \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
- \fi
- %
- \ifimagevmode \hss \egroup \bigbreak \fi % space after the image
-\endgroup}
-
-
-\message{localization,}
-% and i18n.
-
-% @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
-% @setfilename. If done too late, it may not override everything
-% properly. Single argument is the language abbreviation.
-% It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
-%
-\def\documentlanguage{\parsearg\dodocumentlanguage}
-\def\dodocumentlanguage#1{%
- \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
- % Read the file if it exists.
- \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
- \ifeof1
- \errhelp = \nolanghelp
- \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
- \let\temp = \relax
- \else
- \def\temp{\input txi-#1.tex }%
- \fi
- \temp
- \endgroup
-}
-\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
-is empty. Maybe you need to install it? In the current directory
-should work if nowhere else does.}
-
-
-% @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most
-% likely, but for now just recognize it.
-\let\documentencoding = \comment
-
-
-% Page size parameters.
-%
-\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
-
-\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
-\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
-\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
-
-% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
-\vbadness = 10000
-
-% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
-\hbadness = 2000
-
-% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
-\widowpenalty=10000
-\clubpenalty=10000
-
-% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
-% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
-% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
-% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
-%
-\def\setemergencystretch{%
- \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
- % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
- \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
- \else
- \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
- \fi
-}
-
-% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
-% 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 7) physical page height; 8)
-% physical page width.
-%
-% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
-% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip.
-%
-\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
- \voffset = #3\relax
- \topskip = #6\relax
- \splittopskip = \topskip
- %
- \vsize = #1\relax
- \advance\vsize by \topskip
- \outervsize = \vsize
- \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
- \pageheight = \vsize
- %
- \hsize = #2\relax
- \outerhsize = \hsize
- \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
- \pagewidth = \hsize
- %
- \normaloffset = #4\relax
- \bindingoffset = #5\relax
- %
- \ifpdf
- \pdfpageheight #7\relax
- \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
- \fi
- %
- \setleading{\textleading}
- %
- \parindent = \defaultparindent
- \setemergencystretch
-}
-
-% @letterpaper (the default).
-\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
- \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
- \textleading = 13.2pt
- %
- % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
- \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}%
- {\voffset}{.25in}%
- {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
- {11in}{8.5in}%
-}}
-
-% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
-\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
- \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
- \textleading = 12pt
- %
- \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
- {\voffset}{.25in}%
- {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
- {9.25in}{7in}%
- %
- \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
- \tolerance = 700
- \hfuzz = 1pt
- \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
- \defbodyindent = .5cm
-}}
-
-% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
-\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
- \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
- \textleading = 13.2pt
- %
- % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
- % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
- % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
- % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then
- % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in
- % your texinfo source file like this:
- % @tex
- % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
- % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
- % @end tex
- \internalpagesizes{51\baselineskip}{160mm}
- {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
- {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
- {297mm}{210mm}%
- %
- \tolerance = 700
- \hfuzz = 1pt
- \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
- \defbodyindent = 5mm
-}}
-
-% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
-% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
-% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
-\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
- \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
- \textleading = 12.5pt
- %
- \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
- {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
- {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
- {210mm}{148mm}%
- %
- \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
- \tolerance = 800
- \hfuzz = 1.2pt
- \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
- \defbodyindent = 2mm
- \tableindent = 12mm
-}}
-
-% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
-\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
- \afourpaper
- \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
- {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
- {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
- {297mm}{210mm}%
- %
- % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
- \globaldefs = 0
-}}
-
-% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
-\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
- \afourpaper
- \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
- {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
- {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
- {297mm}{210mm}%
- \globaldefs = 0
-}}
-
-% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
-% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
-% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
-%
-\def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx}
-\def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
-\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
- \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
- \globaldefs = 1
- %
- \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
- \setleading{\textleading}%
- %
- \dimen0 = #1
- \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
- %
- \dimen2 = \hsize
- \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
- %
- \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
- {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
- {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
- {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
-}}
-
-% Set default to letter.
-%
-\letterpaper
-
-
-\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
-
-% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
-\catcode`\"=\other
-\catcode`\~=\other
-\catcode`\^=\other
-\catcode`\_=\other
-\catcode`\|=\other
-\catcode`\<=\other
-\catcode`\>=\other
-\catcode`\+=\other
-\catcode`\$=\other
-\def\normaldoublequote{"}
-\def\normaltilde{~}
-\def\normalcaret{^}
-\def\normalunderscore{_}
-\def\normalverticalbar{|}
-\def\normalless{<}
-\def\normalgreater{>}
-\def\normalplus{+}
-\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
-
-% This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
-% where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
-% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
-%
-% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
-% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
-% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
-% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
-%
-\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
-
-% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
-% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
-% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
-% this is not a problem.
-\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
-
-% Turn off all special characters except @
-% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
-% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
-% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
-
-\catcode`\"=\active
-\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
-\let"=\activedoublequote
-\catcode`\~=\active
-\def~{{\tt\char126}}
-\chardef\hat=`\^
-\catcode`\^=\active
-\def^{{\tt \hat}}
-
-\catcode`\_=\active
-\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
-% Subroutine for the previous macro.
-\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
-
-\catcode`\|=\active
-\def|{{\tt\char124}}
-\chardef \less=`\<
-\catcode`\<=\active
-\def<{{\tt \less}}
-\chardef \gtr=`\>
-\catcode`\>=\active
-\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
-\catcode`\+=\active
-\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
-\catcode`\$=\active
-\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
-
-% Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
-{\catcode`\==\active
-\global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
-
-\catcode`+=\active
-\catcode`\_=\active
-
-% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
-% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
-% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
-% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
-\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
-
-\catcode`\@=0
-
-% \rawbackslashxx outputs one backslash character in current font,
-% as in \char`\\.
-\global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
-
-% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \rawbackslashxx.
-% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
-% catcode other.
-{\catcode`\\=\active
- @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx}
- @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
-}
-
-% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other.
-{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
-
-% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
-\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
-
-\catcode`\\=\active
-
-% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
-% even after parsing them.
-@def@turnoffactive{%
- @let"=@normaldoublequote
- @let\=@realbackslash
- @let~=@normaltilde
- @let^=@normalcaret
- @let_=@normalunderscore
- @let|=@normalverticalbar
- @let<=@normalless
- @let>=@normalgreater
- @let+=@normalplus
- @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
-}
-
-% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
-% the literal character `\'. (Thus, \ is not expandable when this is in
-% effect.)
-%
-@def@normalturnoffactive{@turnoffactive @let\=@normalbackslash}
-
-% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
-% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
-@otherifyactive
-
-% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
-% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
-% a backslash.
-%
-@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
-@global@let\ = @eatinput
-
-% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
-% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
-% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
-% Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
-% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
-%
-@gdef@fixbackslash{%
- @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
- @catcode`+=@active
- @catcode`@_=@active
-}
-
-% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
-@escapechar = `@@
-
-% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
-@catcode`@& = @other
-@catcode`@# = @other
-@catcode`@% = @other
-
-@c Set initial fonts.
-@textfonts
-@rm
-
-
-@c Local variables:
-@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
-@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
-@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
-@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
-@c time-stamp-end: "}"
-@c End:
--- /dev/null
+texinfo.tex.20030205
\ No newline at end of file
+++ /dev/null
-/* ansi_stdlib.h -- An ANSI Standard stdlib.h. */
-/* A minimal stdlib.h containing extern declarations for those functions
- that bash uses. */
-
-/* Copyright (C) 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
- This file is part of GNU Bash, the Bourne Again SHell.
-
- Bash is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
- the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
- Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later
- version.
-
- Bash is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
- WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
- FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
- for more details.
-
- You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
- with Bash; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software
- Foundation, 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA. */
-
-#if !defined (_STDLIB_H_)
-#define _STDLIB_H_ 1
-
-/* String conversion functions. */
-extern int atoi ();
-
-extern double atof ();
-extern double strtod ();
-
-/* Memory allocation functions. */
-/* Generic pointer type. */
-#ifndef PTR_T
-
-#if defined (__STDC__)
-# define PTR_T void *
-#else
-# define PTR_T char *
-#endif
-
-#endif /* PTR_T */
-
-extern PTR_T malloc ();
-extern PTR_T realloc ();
-extern void free ();
-
-/* Other miscellaneous functions. */
-extern void abort ();
-extern void exit ();
-extern char *getenv ();
-extern void qsort ();
-
-#endif /* _STDLIB_H */
--- /dev/null
+../../include/ansi_stdlib.h
\ No newline at end of file
+++ /dev/null
-
-@node GNU Free Documentation License
-@appendixsec GNU Free Documentation License
-
-@cindex FDL, GNU Free Documentation License
-@center Version 1.2, November 2002
-
-@display
-Copyright @copyright{} 2000,2001,2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
-
-Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
-of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
-@end display
-
-@enumerate 0
-@item
-PREAMBLE
-
-The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
-functional and useful document @dfn{free} in the sense of freedom: to
-assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
-with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.
-Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way
-to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible
-for modifications made by others.
-
-This License is a kind of ``copyleft'', which means that derivative
-works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It
-complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
-license designed for free software.
-
-We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free
-software, because free software needs free documentation: a free
-program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the
-software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals;
-it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or
-whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License
-principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
-
-@item
-APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
-
-This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that
-contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be
-distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a
-world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that
-work under the conditions stated herein. The ``Document'', below,
-refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a
-licensee, and is addressed as ``you''. You accept the license if you
-copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission
-under copyright law.
-
-A ``Modified Version'' of the Document means any work containing the
-Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
-modifications and/or translated into another language.
-
-A ``Secondary Section'' is a named appendix or a front-matter section
-of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
-publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall
-subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall
-directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in
-part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain
-any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical
-connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal,
-commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding
-them.
-
-The ``Invariant Sections'' are certain Secondary Sections whose titles
-are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice
-that says that the Document is released under this License. If a
-section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not
-allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero
-Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant
-Sections then there are none.
-
-The ``Cover Texts'' are certain short passages of text that are listed,
-as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that
-the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may
-be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
-
-A ``Transparent'' copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
-represented in a format whose specification is available to the
-general public, that is suitable for revising the document
-straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of
-pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available
-drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or
-for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input
-to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file
-format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart
-or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent.
-An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount
-of text. A copy that is not ``Transparent'' is called ``Opaque''.
-
-Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
-@sc{ascii} without markup, Texinfo input format, La@TeX{} input
-format, @acronym{SGML} or @acronym{XML} using a publicly available
-@acronym{DTD}, and standard-conforming simple @acronym{HTML},
-PostScript or @acronym{PDF} designed for human modification. Examples
-of transparent image formats include @acronym{PNG}, @acronym{XCF} and
-@acronym{JPG}. Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be
-read and edited only by proprietary word processors, @acronym{SGML} or
-@acronym{XML} for which the @acronym{DTD} and/or processing tools are
-not generally available, and the machine-generated @acronym{HTML},
-PostScript or @acronym{PDF} produced by some word processors for
-output purposes only.
-
-The ``Title Page'' means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
-plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material
-this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in
-formats which do not have any title page as such, ``Title Page'' means
-the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title,
-preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
-
-A section ``Entitled XYZ'' means a named subunit of the Document whose
-title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following
-text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a
-specific section name mentioned below, such as ``Acknowledgements'',
-``Dedications'', ``Endorsements'', or ``History''.) To ``Preserve the Title''
-of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a
-section ``Entitled XYZ'' according to this definition.
-
-The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which
-states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty
-Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this
-License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
-implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has
-no effect on the meaning of this License.
-
-@item
-VERBATIM COPYING
-
-You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
-commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
-copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies
-to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other
-conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use
-technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further
-copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept
-compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough
-number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
-
-You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and
-you may publicly display copies.
-
-@item
-COPYING IN QUANTITY
-
-If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have
-printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the
-Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the
-copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover
-Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on
-the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify
-you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present
-the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and
-visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition.
-Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve
-the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated
-as verbatim copying in other respects.
-
-If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
-legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
-reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent
-pages.
-
-If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering
-more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent
-copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy
-a computer-network location from which the general network-using
-public has access to download using public-standard network protocols
-a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material.
-If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps,
-when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure
-that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
-location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an
-Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that
-edition to the public.
-
-It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the
-Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give
-them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
-
-@item
-MODIFICATIONS
-
-You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under
-the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release
-the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified
-Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution
-and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy
-of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
-
-@enumerate A
-@item
-Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct
-from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions
-(which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section
-of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version
-if the original publisher of that version gives permission.
-
-@item
-List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities
-responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified
-Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the
-Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than five),
-unless they release you from this requirement.
-
-@item
-State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
-Modified Version, as the publisher.
-
-@item
-Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
-
-@item
-Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
-adjacent to the other copyright notices.
-
-@item
-Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice
-giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the
-terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below.
-
-@item
-Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections
-and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice.
-
-@item
-Include an unaltered copy of this License.
-
-@item
-Preserve the section Entitled ``History'', Preserve its Title, and add
-to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
-publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If
-there is no section Entitled ``History'' in the Document, create one
-stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as
-given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified
-Version as stated in the previous sentence.
-
-@item
-Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for
-public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise
-the network locations given in the Document for previous versions
-it was based on. These may be placed in the ``History'' section.
-You may omit a network location for a work that was published at
-least four years before the Document itself, or if the original
-publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
-
-@item
-For any section Entitled ``Acknowledgements'' or ``Dedications'', Preserve
-the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all the
-substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or
-dedications given therein.
-
-@item
-Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
-unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers
-or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
-
-@item
-Delete any section Entitled ``Endorsements''. Such a section
-may not be included in the Modified Version.
-
-@item
-Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled ``Endorsements'' or
-to conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
-
-@item
-Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
-@end enumerate
-
-If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
-appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material
-copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all
-of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the
-list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice.
-These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
-
-You may add a section Entitled ``Endorsements'', provided it contains
-nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
-parties---for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
-been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a
-standard.
-
-You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a
-passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list
-of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of
-Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
-through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already
-includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or
-by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of,
-you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit
-permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
-
-The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License
-give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or
-imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
-
-@item
-COMBINING DOCUMENTS
-
-You may combine the Document with other documents released under this
-License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified
-versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the
-Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and
-list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its
-license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
-
-The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
-multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
-copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but
-different contents, make the title of each such section unique by
-adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original
-author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number.
-Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of
-Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
-
-In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled ``History''
-in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled
-``History''; likewise combine any sections Entitled ``Acknowledgements'',
-and any sections Entitled ``Dedications''. You must delete all
-sections Entitled ``Endorsements.''
-
-@item
-COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
-
-You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents
-released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this
-License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in
-the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for
-verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.
-
-You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute
-it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this
-License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all
-other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
-
-@item
-AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
-
-A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate
-and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or
-distribution medium, is called an ``aggregate'' if the copyright
-resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights
-of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit.
-When the Document is included an aggregate, this License does not
-apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves
-derivative works of the Document.
-
-If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
-copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of
-the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on
-covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
-electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form.
-Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole
-aggregate.
-
-@item
-TRANSLATION
-
-Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
-distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4.
-Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
-permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
-translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
-original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a
-translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
-Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include
-the original English version of this License and the original versions
-of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between
-the translation and the original version of this License or a notice
-or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.
-
-If a section in the Document is Entitled ``Acknowledgements'',
-``Dedications'', or ``History'', the requirement (section 4) to Preserve
-its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual
-title.
-
-@item
-TERMINATION
-
-You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except
-as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to
-copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will
-automatically terminate your rights under this License. However,
-parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this
-License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
-parties remain in full compliance.
-
-@item
-FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
-
-The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions
-of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new
-versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
-differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See
-@uref{http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/}.
-
-Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number.
-If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this
-License ``or any later version'' applies to it, you have the option of
-following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or
-of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the
-Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version
-number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not
-as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.
-@end enumerate
-
-@page
-@appendixsubsec ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
-
-To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
-the License in the document and put the following copyright and
-license notices just after the title page:
-
-@smallexample
-@group
- Copyright (C) @var{year} @var{your name}.
- Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
- under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2
- or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
- with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts.
- A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
- Free Documentation License''.
-@end group
-@end smallexample
-
-If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts,
-replace the ``with...Texts.'' line with this:
-
-@smallexample
-@group
- with the Invariant Sections being @var{list their titles}, with
- the Front-Cover Texts being @var{list}, and with the Back-Cover Texts
- being @var{list}.
-@end group
-@end smallexample
-
-If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
-combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
-situation.
-
-If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
-recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
-free software license, such as the GNU General Public License,
-to permit their use in free software.
-
-@c Local Variables:
-@c ispell-local-pdict: "ispell-dict"
-@c End:
-
--- /dev/null
+../../../doc/fdl.texi
\ No newline at end of file
+++ /dev/null
-/* posixdir.h -- Posix directory reading includes and defines. */
-
-/* Copyright (C) 1987,1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
- This file is part of GNU Bash, the Bourne Again SHell.
-
- Bash is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
- under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
- the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
- any later version.
-
- Bash is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
- ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
- or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
- License for more details.
-
- You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
- along with Bash; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free
- Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA. */
-
-/* This file should be included instead of <dirent.h> or <sys/dir.h>. */
-
-#if !defined (_POSIXDIR_H_)
-#define _POSIXDIR_H_
-
-#if defined (HAVE_DIRENT_H)
-# include <dirent.h>
-# if defined (HAVE_STRUCT_DIRENT_D_NAMLEN)
-# define D_NAMLEN(d) ((d)->d_namlen)
-# else
-# define D_NAMLEN(d) (strlen ((d)->d_name))
-# endif /* !HAVE_STRUCT_DIRENT_D_NAMLEN */
-#else
-# if defined (HAVE_SYS_NDIR_H)
-# include <sys/ndir.h>
-# endif
-# if defined (HAVE_SYS_DIR_H)
-# include <sys/dir.h>
-# endif
-# if defined (HAVE_NDIR_H)
-# include <ndir.h>
-# endif
-# if !defined (dirent)
-# define dirent direct
-# endif /* !dirent */
-# define D_NAMLEN(d) ((d)->d_namlen)
-#endif /* !HAVE_DIRENT_H */
-
-#if defined (HAVE_STRUCT_DIRENT_D_INO) && !defined (HAVE_STRUCT_DIRENT_D_FILENO)
-# define d_fileno d_ino
-#endif
-
-#if defined (_POSIX_SOURCE) && (!defined (HAVE_STRUCT_DIRENT_D_INO) || defined (BROKEN_DIRENT_D_INO))
-/* Posix does not require that the d_ino field be present, and some
- systems do not provide it. */
-# define REAL_DIR_ENTRY(dp) 1
-#else
-# define REAL_DIR_ENTRY(dp) (dp->d_ino != 0)
-#endif /* _POSIX_SOURCE */
-
-#endif /* !_POSIXDIR_H_ */
--- /dev/null
+../../include/posixdir.h
\ No newline at end of file
+++ /dev/null
-/* posixjmp.h -- wrapper for setjmp.h with changes for POSIX systems. */
-
-/* Copyright (C) 1987,1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
- This file is part of GNU Bash, the Bourne Again SHell.
-
- Bash is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
- under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
- the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
- any later version.
-
- Bash is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
- ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
- or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
- License for more details.
-
- You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
- along with Bash; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free
- Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA. */
-
-#ifndef _POSIXJMP_H_
-#define _POSIXJMP_H_
-
-#include <setjmp.h>
-
-/* This *must* be included *after* config.h */
-
-#if defined (HAVE_POSIX_SIGSETJMP)
-# define procenv_t sigjmp_buf
-# if !defined (__OPENNT)
-# undef setjmp
-# define setjmp(x) sigsetjmp((x), 1)
-# undef longjmp
-# define longjmp(x, n) siglongjmp((x), (n))
-# endif /* !__OPENNT */
-#else
-# define procenv_t jmp_buf
-#endif
-
-#endif /* _POSIXJMP_H_ */
--- /dev/null
+../../include/posixjmp.h
\ No newline at end of file
+++ /dev/null
-/* posixstat.h -- Posix stat(2) definitions for systems that
- don't have them. */
-
-/* Copyright (C) 1987,1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
- This file is part of GNU Bash, the Bourne Again SHell.
-
- Bash is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
- under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
- the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
- any later version.
-
- Bash is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
- ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
- or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
- License for more details.
-
- You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
- along with Bash; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free
- Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA. */
-
-/* This file should be included instead of <sys/stat.h>.
- It relies on the local sys/stat.h to work though. */
-#if !defined (_POSIXSTAT_H_)
-#define _POSIXSTAT_H_
-
-#include <sys/stat.h>
-
-#if defined (STAT_MACROS_BROKEN)
-# undef S_ISBLK
-# undef S_ISCHR
-# undef S_ISDIR
-# undef S_ISFIFO
-# undef S_ISREG
-# undef S_ISLNK
-#endif /* STAT_MACROS_BROKEN */
-
-/* These are guaranteed to work only on isc386 */
-#if !defined (S_IFDIR) && !defined (S_ISDIR)
-# define S_IFDIR 0040000
-#endif /* !S_IFDIR && !S_ISDIR */
-#if !defined (S_IFMT)
-# define S_IFMT 0170000
-#endif /* !S_IFMT */
-
-/* Posix 1003.1 5.6.1.1 <sys/stat.h> file types */
-
-/* Some Posix-wannabe systems define _S_IF* macros instead of S_IF*, but
- do not provide the S_IS* macros that Posix requires. */
-
-#if defined (_S_IFMT) && !defined (S_IFMT)
-#define S_IFMT _S_IFMT
-#endif
-#if defined (_S_IFIFO) && !defined (S_IFIFO)
-#define S_IFIFO _S_IFIFO
-#endif
-#if defined (_S_IFCHR) && !defined (S_IFCHR)
-#define S_IFCHR _S_IFCHR
-#endif
-#if defined (_S_IFDIR) && !defined (S_IFDIR)
-#define S_IFDIR _S_IFDIR
-#endif
-#if defined (_S_IFBLK) && !defined (S_IFBLK)
-#define S_IFBLK _S_IFBLK
-#endif
-#if defined (_S_IFREG) && !defined (S_IFREG)
-#define S_IFREG _S_IFREG
-#endif
-#if defined (_S_IFLNK) && !defined (S_IFLNK)
-#define S_IFLNK _S_IFLNK
-#endif
-#if defined (_S_IFSOCK) && !defined (S_IFSOCK)
-#define S_IFSOCK _S_IFSOCK
-#endif
-
-/* Test for each symbol individually and define the ones necessary (some
- systems claiming Posix compatibility define some but not all). */
-
-#if defined (S_IFBLK) && !defined (S_ISBLK)
-#define S_ISBLK(m) (((m)&S_IFMT) == S_IFBLK) /* block device */
-#endif
-
-#if defined (S_IFCHR) && !defined (S_ISCHR)
-#define S_ISCHR(m) (((m)&S_IFMT) == S_IFCHR) /* character device */
-#endif
-
-#if defined (S_IFDIR) && !defined (S_ISDIR)
-#define S_ISDIR(m) (((m)&S_IFMT) == S_IFDIR) /* directory */
-#endif
-
-#if defined (S_IFREG) && !defined (S_ISREG)
-#define S_ISREG(m) (((m)&S_IFMT) == S_IFREG) /* file */
-#endif
-
-#if defined (S_IFIFO) && !defined (S_ISFIFO)
-#define S_ISFIFO(m) (((m)&S_IFMT) == S_IFIFO) /* fifo - named pipe */
-#endif
-
-#if defined (S_IFLNK) && !defined (S_ISLNK)
-#define S_ISLNK(m) (((m)&S_IFMT) == S_IFLNK) /* symbolic link */
-#endif
-
-#if defined (S_IFSOCK) && !defined (S_ISSOCK)
-#define S_ISSOCK(m) (((m)&S_IFMT) == S_IFSOCK) /* socket */
-#endif
-
-/*
- * POSIX 1003.1 5.6.1.2 <sys/stat.h> File Modes
- */
-
-#if !defined (S_IRWXU)
-# if !defined (S_IREAD)
-# define S_IREAD 00400
-# define S_IWRITE 00200
-# define S_IEXEC 00100
-# endif /* S_IREAD */
-
-# if !defined (S_IRUSR)
-# define S_IRUSR S_IREAD /* read, owner */
-# define S_IWUSR S_IWRITE /* write, owner */
-# define S_IXUSR S_IEXEC /* execute, owner */
-
-# define S_IRGRP (S_IREAD >> 3) /* read, group */
-# define S_IWGRP (S_IWRITE >> 3) /* write, group */
-# define S_IXGRP (S_IEXEC >> 3) /* execute, group */
-
-# define S_IROTH (S_IREAD >> 6) /* read, other */
-# define S_IWOTH (S_IWRITE >> 6) /* write, other */
-# define S_IXOTH (S_IEXEC >> 6) /* execute, other */
-# endif /* !S_IRUSR */
-
-# define S_IRWXU (S_IRUSR | S_IWUSR | S_IXUSR)
-# define S_IRWXG (S_IRGRP | S_IWGRP | S_IXGRP)
-# define S_IRWXO (S_IROTH | S_IWOTH | S_IXOTH)
-#endif /* !S_IRWXU */
-
-/* These are non-standard, but are used in builtins.c$symbolic_umask() */
-#define S_IRUGO (S_IRUSR | S_IRGRP | S_IROTH)
-#define S_IWUGO (S_IWUSR | S_IWGRP | S_IWOTH)
-#define S_IXUGO (S_IXUSR | S_IXGRP | S_IXOTH)
-
-#endif /* _POSIXSTAT_H_ */
--- /dev/null
+../../include/posixstat.h
\ No newline at end of file
+++ /dev/null
-/* tilde.c -- Tilde expansion code (~/foo := $HOME/foo). */
-
-/* Copyright (C) 1988,1989 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
- This file is part of GNU Readline, a library for reading lines
- of text with interactive input and history editing.
-
- Readline is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
- under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the
- Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any
- later version.
-
- Readline is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
- WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
- MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
- General Public License for more details.
-
- You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
- along with Readline; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free
- Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA. */
-
-#if defined (HAVE_CONFIG_H)
-# include <config.h>
-#endif
-
-#if defined (HAVE_UNISTD_H)
-# ifdef _MINIX
-# include <sys/types.h>
-# endif
-# include <unistd.h>
-#endif
-
-#if defined (HAVE_STRING_H)
-# include <string.h>
-#else /* !HAVE_STRING_H */
-# include <strings.h>
-#endif /* !HAVE_STRING_H */
-
-#if defined (HAVE_STDLIB_H)
-# include <stdlib.h>
-#else
-# include "ansi_stdlib.h"
-#endif /* HAVE_STDLIB_H */
-
-#include <sys/types.h>
-#include <pwd.h>
-
-#include "tilde.h"
-
-#if defined (TEST) || defined (STATIC_MALLOC)
-static void *xmalloc (), *xrealloc ();
-#else
-# include "xmalloc.h"
-#endif /* TEST || STATIC_MALLOC */
-
-#if !defined (HAVE_GETPW_DECLS)
-extern struct passwd *getpwuid PARAMS((uid_t));
-extern struct passwd *getpwnam PARAMS((const char *));
-#endif /* !HAVE_GETPW_DECLS */
-
-#if !defined (savestring)
-#define savestring(x) strcpy ((char *)xmalloc (1 + strlen (x)), (x))
-#endif /* !savestring */
-
-#if !defined (NULL)
-# if defined (__STDC__)
-# define NULL ((void *) 0)
-# else
-# define NULL 0x0
-# endif /* !__STDC__ */
-#endif /* !NULL */
-
-/* If being compiled as part of bash, these will be satisfied from
- variables.o. If being compiled as part of readline, they will
- be satisfied from shell.o. */
-extern char *sh_get_home_dir PARAMS((void));
-extern char *sh_get_env_value PARAMS((const char *));
-
-/* The default value of tilde_additional_prefixes. This is set to
- whitespace preceding a tilde so that simple programs which do not
- perform any word separation get desired behaviour. */
-static const char *default_prefixes[] =
- { " ~", "\t~", (const char *)NULL };
-
-/* The default value of tilde_additional_suffixes. This is set to
- whitespace or newline so that simple programs which do not
- perform any word separation get desired behaviour. */
-static const char *default_suffixes[] =
- { " ", "\n", (const char *)NULL };
-
-/* If non-null, this contains the address of a function that the application
- wants called before trying the standard tilde expansions. The function
- is called with the text sans tilde, and returns a malloc()'ed string
- which is the expansion, or a NULL pointer if the expansion fails. */
-tilde_hook_func_t *tilde_expansion_preexpansion_hook = (tilde_hook_func_t *)NULL;
-
-/* If non-null, this contains the address of a function to call if the
- standard meaning for expanding a tilde fails. The function is called
- with the text (sans tilde, as in "foo"), and returns a malloc()'ed string
- which is the expansion, or a NULL pointer if there is no expansion. */
-tilde_hook_func_t *tilde_expansion_failure_hook = (tilde_hook_func_t *)NULL;
-
-/* When non-null, this is a NULL terminated array of strings which
- are duplicates for a tilde prefix. Bash uses this to expand
- `=~' and `:~'. */
-char **tilde_additional_prefixes = (char **)default_prefixes;
-
-/* When non-null, this is a NULL terminated array of strings which match
- the end of a username, instead of just "/". Bash sets this to
- `:' and `=~'. */
-char **tilde_additional_suffixes = (char **)default_suffixes;
-
-static int tilde_find_prefix PARAMS((const char *, int *));
-static int tilde_find_suffix PARAMS((const char *));
-static char *isolate_tilde_prefix PARAMS((const char *, int *));
-static char *glue_prefix_and_suffix PARAMS((char *, const char *, int));
-
-/* Find the start of a tilde expansion in STRING, and return the index of
- the tilde which starts the expansion. Place the length of the text
- which identified this tilde starter in LEN, excluding the tilde itself. */
-static int
-tilde_find_prefix (string, len)
- const char *string;
- int *len;
-{
- register int i, j, string_len;
- register char **prefixes;
-
- prefixes = tilde_additional_prefixes;
-
- string_len = strlen (string);
- *len = 0;
-
- if (*string == '\0' || *string == '~')
- return (0);
-
- if (prefixes)
- {
- for (i = 0; i < string_len; i++)
- {
- for (j = 0; prefixes[j]; j++)
- {
- if (strncmp (string + i, prefixes[j], strlen (prefixes[j])) == 0)
- {
- *len = strlen (prefixes[j]) - 1;
- return (i + *len);
- }
- }
- }
- }
- return (string_len);
-}
-
-/* Find the end of a tilde expansion in STRING, and return the index of
- the character which ends the tilde definition. */
-static int
-tilde_find_suffix (string)
- const char *string;
-{
- register int i, j, string_len;
- register char **suffixes;
-
- suffixes = tilde_additional_suffixes;
- string_len = strlen (string);
-
- for (i = 0; i < string_len; i++)
- {
-#if defined (__MSDOS__)
- if (string[i] == '/' || string[i] == '\\' /* || !string[i] */)
-#else
- if (string[i] == '/' /* || !string[i] */)
-#endif
- break;
-
- for (j = 0; suffixes && suffixes[j]; j++)
- {
- if (strncmp (string + i, suffixes[j], strlen (suffixes[j])) == 0)
- return (i);
- }
- }
- return (i);
-}
-
-/* Return a new string which is the result of tilde expanding STRING. */
-char *
-tilde_expand (string)
- const char *string;
-{
- char *result;
- int result_size, result_index;
-
- result_index = result_size = 0;
- if (result = strchr (string, '~'))
- result = (char *)xmalloc (result_size = (strlen (string) + 16));
- else
- result = (char *)xmalloc (result_size = (strlen (string) + 1));
-
- /* Scan through STRING expanding tildes as we come to them. */
- while (1)
- {
- register int start, end;
- char *tilde_word, *expansion;
- int len;
-
- /* Make START point to the tilde which starts the expansion. */
- start = tilde_find_prefix (string, &len);
-
- /* Copy the skipped text into the result. */
- if ((result_index + start + 1) > result_size)
- result = (char *)xrealloc (result, 1 + (result_size += (start + 20)));
-
- strncpy (result + result_index, string, start);
- result_index += start;
-
- /* Advance STRING to the starting tilde. */
- string += start;
-
- /* Make END be the index of one after the last character of the
- username. */
- end = tilde_find_suffix (string);
-
- /* If both START and END are zero, we are all done. */
- if (!start && !end)
- break;
-
- /* Expand the entire tilde word, and copy it into RESULT. */
- tilde_word = (char *)xmalloc (1 + end);
- strncpy (tilde_word, string, end);
- tilde_word[end] = '\0';
- string += end;
-
- expansion = tilde_expand_word (tilde_word);
- free (tilde_word);
-
- len = strlen (expansion);
-#ifdef __CYGWIN__
- /* Fix for Cygwin to prevent ~user/xxx from expanding to //xxx when
- $HOME for `user' is /. On cygwin, // denotes a network drive. */
- if (len > 1 || *expansion != '/' || *string != '/')
-#endif
- {
- if ((result_index + len + 1) > result_size)
- result = (char *)xrealloc (result, 1 + (result_size += (len + 20)));
-
- strcpy (result + result_index, expansion);
- result_index += len;
- }
- free (expansion);
- }
-
- result[result_index] = '\0';
-
- return (result);
-}
-
-/* Take FNAME and return the tilde prefix we want expanded. If LENP is
- non-null, the index of the end of the prefix into FNAME is returned in
- the location it points to. */
-static char *
-isolate_tilde_prefix (fname, lenp)
- const char *fname;
- int *lenp;
-{
- char *ret;
- int i;
-
- ret = (char *)xmalloc (strlen (fname));
-#if defined (__MSDOS__)
- for (i = 1; fname[i] && fname[i] != '/' && fname[i] != '\\'; i++)
-#else
- for (i = 1; fname[i] && fname[i] != '/'; i++)
-#endif
- ret[i - 1] = fname[i];
- ret[i - 1] = '\0';
- if (lenp)
- *lenp = i;
- return ret;
-}
-
-/* Return a string that is PREFIX concatenated with SUFFIX starting at
- SUFFIND. */
-static char *
-glue_prefix_and_suffix (prefix, suffix, suffind)
- char *prefix;
- const char *suffix;
- int suffind;
-{
- char *ret;
- int plen, slen;
-
- plen = (prefix && *prefix) ? strlen (prefix) : 0;
- slen = strlen (suffix + suffind);
- ret = (char *)xmalloc (plen + slen + 1);
- if (plen)
- strcpy (ret, prefix);
- strcpy (ret + plen, suffix + suffind);
- return ret;
-}
-
-/* Do the work of tilde expansion on FILENAME. FILENAME starts with a
- tilde. If there is no expansion, call tilde_expansion_failure_hook.
- This always returns a newly-allocated string, never static storage. */
-char *
-tilde_expand_word (filename)
- const char *filename;
-{
- char *dirname, *expansion, *username;
- int user_len;
- struct passwd *user_entry;
-
- if (filename == 0)
- return ((char *)NULL);
-
- if (*filename != '~')
- return (savestring (filename));
-
- /* A leading `~/' or a bare `~' is *always* translated to the value of
- $HOME or the home directory of the current user, regardless of any
- preexpansion hook. */
- if (filename[1] == '\0' || filename[1] == '/')
- {
- /* Prefix $HOME to the rest of the string. */
- expansion = sh_get_env_value ("HOME");
-
- /* If there is no HOME variable, look up the directory in
- the password database. */
- if (expansion == 0)
- expansion = sh_get_home_dir ();
-
- return (glue_prefix_and_suffix (expansion, filename, 1));
- }
-
- username = isolate_tilde_prefix (filename, &user_len);
-
- if (tilde_expansion_preexpansion_hook)
- {
- expansion = (*tilde_expansion_preexpansion_hook) (username);
- if (expansion)
- {
- dirname = glue_prefix_and_suffix (expansion, filename, user_len);
- free (username);
- free (expansion);
- return (dirname);
- }
- }
-
- /* No preexpansion hook, or the preexpansion hook failed. Look in the
- password database. */
- dirname = (char *)NULL;
- user_entry = getpwnam (username);
- if (user_entry == 0)
- {
- /* If the calling program has a special syntax for expanding tildes,
- and we couldn't find a standard expansion, then let them try. */
- if (tilde_expansion_failure_hook)
- {
- expansion = (*tilde_expansion_failure_hook) (username);
- if (expansion)
- {
- dirname = glue_prefix_and_suffix (expansion, filename, user_len);
- free (expansion);
- }
- }
- free (username);
- /* If we don't have a failure hook, or if the failure hook did not
- expand the tilde, return a copy of what we were passed. */
- if (dirname == 0)
- dirname = savestring (filename);
- }
- else
- {
- free (username);
- dirname = glue_prefix_and_suffix (user_entry->pw_dir, filename, user_len);
- }
-
- endpwent ();
- return (dirname);
-}
-
-\f
-#if defined (TEST)
-#undef NULL
-#include <stdio.h>
-
-main (argc, argv)
- int argc;
- char **argv;
-{
- char *result, line[512];
- int done = 0;
-
- while (!done)
- {
- printf ("~expand: ");
- fflush (stdout);
-
- if (!gets (line))
- strcpy (line, "done");
-
- if ((strcmp (line, "done") == 0) ||
- (strcmp (line, "quit") == 0) ||
- (strcmp (line, "exit") == 0))
- {
- done = 1;
- break;
- }
-
- result = tilde_expand (line);
- printf (" --> %s\n", result);
- free (result);
- }
- exit (0);
-}
-
-static void memory_error_and_abort ();
-
-static void *
-xmalloc (bytes)
- size_t bytes;
-{
- void *temp = (char *)malloc (bytes);
-
- if (!temp)
- memory_error_and_abort ();
- return (temp);
-}
-
-static void *
-xrealloc (pointer, bytes)
- void *pointer;
- int bytes;
-{
- void *temp;
-
- if (!pointer)
- temp = malloc (bytes);
- else
- temp = realloc (pointer, bytes);
-
- if (!temp)
- memory_error_and_abort ();
-
- return (temp);
-}
-
-static void
-memory_error_and_abort ()
-{
- fprintf (stderr, "readline: out of virtual memory\n");
- abort ();
-}
-
-/*
- * Local variables:
- * compile-command: "gcc -g -DTEST -o tilde tilde.c"
- * end:
- */
-#endif /* TEST */
--- /dev/null
+../tilde/tilde.c
\ No newline at end of file
+++ /dev/null
-/* tilde.h: Externally available variables and function in libtilde.a. */
-
-/* Copyright (C) 1992 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
- This file contains the Readline Library (the Library), a set of
- routines for providing Emacs style line input to programs that ask
- for it.
-
- The Library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
- it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
- the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
- any later version.
-
- The Library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
- WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
- MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
- General Public License for more details.
-
- The GNU General Public License is often shipped with GNU software, and
- is generally kept in a file called COPYING or LICENSE. If you do not
- have a copy of the license, write to the Free Software Foundation,
- 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA. */
-
-#if !defined (_TILDE_H_)
-# define _TILDE_H_
-
-#ifdef __cplusplus
-extern "C" {
-#endif
-
-/* A function can be defined using prototypes and compile on both ANSI C
- and traditional C compilers with something like this:
- extern char *func PARAMS((char *, char *, int)); */
-
-#if !defined (PARAMS)
-# if defined (__STDC__) || defined (__GNUC__) || defined (__cplusplus)
-# define PARAMS(protos) protos
-# else
-# define PARAMS(protos) ()
-# endif
-#endif
-
-typedef char *tilde_hook_func_t PARAMS((char *));
-
-/* If non-null, this contains the address of a function that the application
- wants called before trying the standard tilde expansions. The function
- is called with the text sans tilde, and returns a malloc()'ed string
- which is the expansion, or a NULL pointer if the expansion fails. */
-extern tilde_hook_func_t *tilde_expansion_preexpansion_hook;
-
-/* If non-null, this contains the address of a function to call if the
- standard meaning for expanding a tilde fails. The function is called
- with the text (sans tilde, as in "foo"), and returns a malloc()'ed string
- which is the expansion, or a NULL pointer if there is no expansion. */
-extern tilde_hook_func_t *tilde_expansion_failure_hook;
-
-/* When non-null, this is a NULL terminated array of strings which
- are duplicates for a tilde prefix. Bash uses this to expand
- `=~' and `:~'. */
-extern char **tilde_additional_prefixes;
-
-/* When non-null, this is a NULL terminated array of strings which match
- the end of a username, instead of just "/". Bash sets this to
- `:' and `=~'. */
-extern char **tilde_additional_suffixes;
-
-/* Return a new string which is the result of tilde expanding STRING. */
-extern char *tilde_expand PARAMS((const char *));
-
-/* Do the work of tilde expansion on FILENAME. FILENAME starts with a
- tilde. If there is no expansion, call tilde_expansion_failure_hook. */
-extern char *tilde_expand_word PARAMS((const char *));
-
-#ifdef __cplusplus
-}
-#endif
-
-#endif /* _TILDE_H_ */
--- /dev/null
+../tilde/tilde.h
\ No newline at end of file
--- /dev/null
+/* subst.c -- The part of the shell that does parameter, command, and
+ globbing substitutions. */
+
+/* ``Have a little faith, there's magic in the night. You ain't a
+ beauty, but, hey, you're alright.'' */
+
+/* Copyright (C) 1987-2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+ This file is part of GNU Bash, the Bourne Again SHell.
+
+ Bash is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
+ the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
+ Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later
+ version.
+
+ Bash is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
+ WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
+ FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
+ for more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
+ with Bash; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free Software
+ Foundation, 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA. */
+
+#include "config.h"
+
+#include "bashtypes.h"
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include "chartypes.h"
+#include <pwd.h>
+#include <signal.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+
+#if defined (HAVE_UNISTD_H)
+# include <unistd.h>
+#endif
+
+#include "bashansi.h"
+#include "posixstat.h"
+#include "bashintl.h"
+
+#include "shell.h"
+#include "flags.h"
+#include "jobs.h"
+#include "execute_cmd.h"
+#include "filecntl.h"
+#include "trap.h"
+#include "pathexp.h"
+#include "mailcheck.h"
+
+#include "shmbutil.h"
+
+#include "builtins/getopt.h"
+#include "builtins/common.h"
+
+#include <tilde/tilde.h>
+#include <glob/strmatch.h>
+
+#if !defined (errno)
+extern int errno;
+#endif /* !errno */
+
+/* The size that strings change by. */
+#define DEFAULT_INITIAL_ARRAY_SIZE 112
+#define DEFAULT_ARRAY_SIZE 128
+
+/* Variable types. */
+#define VT_VARIABLE 0
+#define VT_POSPARMS 1
+#define VT_ARRAYVAR 2
+#define VT_ARRAYMEMBER 3
+
+#define VT_STARSUB 128 /* $* or ${array[*]} -- used to split */
+
+/* Flags for quoted_strchr */
+#define ST_BACKSL 0x01
+#define ST_CTLESC 0x02
+#define ST_SQUOTE 0x04 /* unused yet */
+#define ST_DQUOTE 0x08 /* unused yet */
+
+/* Flags for the string extraction functions. */
+#define EX_NOALLOC 0x01 /* just skip; don't return substring */
+#define EX_VARNAME 0x02 /* variable name; for string_extract () */
+
+/* Flags for the `pflags' argument to param_expand() */
+#define PF_NOCOMSUB 0x01 /* Do not perform command substitution */
+
+/* These defs make it easier to use the editor. */
+#define LBRACE '{'
+#define RBRACE '}'
+#define LPAREN '('
+#define RPAREN ')'
+
+/* Evaluates to 1 if C is one of the shell's special parameters whose length
+ can be taken, but is also one of the special expansion characters. */
+#define VALID_SPECIAL_LENGTH_PARAM(c) \
+ ((c) == '-' || (c) == '?' || (c) == '#')
+
+/* Evaluates to 1 if C is one of the shell's special parameters for which an
+ indirect variable reference may be made. */
+#define VALID_INDIR_PARAM(c) \
+ ((c) == '#' || (c) == '?' || (c) == '@' || (c) == '*')
+
+/* Evaluates to 1 if C is one of the OP characters that follows the parameter
+ in ${parameter[:]OPword}. */
+#define VALID_PARAM_EXPAND_CHAR(c) (sh_syntaxtab[(unsigned char)c] & CSUBSTOP)
+
+/* Evaluates to 1 if this is one of the shell's special variables. */
+#define SPECIAL_VAR(name, wi) \
+ ((DIGIT (*name) && all_digits (name)) || \
+ (name[1] == '\0' && (sh_syntaxtab[(unsigned char)*name] & CSPECVAR)) || \
+ (wi && name[2] == '\0' && VALID_INDIR_PARAM (name[1])))
+
+/* An expansion function that takes a string and a quoted flag and returns
+ a WORD_LIST *. Used as the type of the third argument to
+ expand_string_if_necessary(). */
+typedef WORD_LIST *EXPFUNC __P((char *, int));
+
+/* Process ID of the last command executed within command substitution. */
+pid_t last_command_subst_pid = NO_PID;
+pid_t current_command_subst_pid = NO_PID;
+
+/* Variables used to keep track of the characters in IFS. */
+SHELL_VAR *ifs_var;
+char *ifs_value;
+unsigned char ifs_cmap[UCHAR_MAX + 1];
+unsigned char ifs_firstc;
+
+/* Extern functions and variables from different files. */
+extern int last_command_exit_value, last_command_exit_signal;
+extern int subshell_environment;
+extern int subshell_level;
+extern int eof_encountered;
+extern int return_catch_flag, return_catch_value;
+extern pid_t dollar_dollar_pid;
+extern int posixly_correct;
+extern char *this_command_name;
+extern struct fd_bitmap *current_fds_to_close;
+extern int wordexp_only;
+extern int expanding_redir;
+
+/* Non-zero means to allow unmatched globbed filenames to expand to
+ a null file. */
+int allow_null_glob_expansion;
+
+/* Non-zero means to throw an error when globbing fails to match anything. */
+int fail_glob_expansion;
+
+#if 0
+/* Variables to keep track of which words in an expanded word list (the
+ output of expand_word_list_internal) are the result of globbing
+ expansions. GLOB_ARGV_FLAGS is used by execute_cmd.c.
+ (CURRENTLY UNUSED). */
+char *glob_argv_flags;
+static int glob_argv_flags_size;
+#endif
+
+static WORD_LIST expand_word_error, expand_word_fatal;
+static char expand_param_error, expand_param_fatal;
+
+/* Tell the expansion functions to not longjmp back to top_level on fatal
+ errors. Enabled when doing completion and prompt string expansion. */
+static int no_longjmp_on_fatal_error = 0;
+
+/* Set by expand_word_unsplit; used to inhibit splitting and re-joining
+ $* on $IFS, primarily when doing assignment statements. */
+static int expand_no_split_dollar_star = 0;
+
+/* Used to hold a list of variable assignments preceding a command. Global
+ so the SIGCHLD handler in jobs.c can unwind-protect it when it runs a
+ SIGCHLD trap. */
+WORD_LIST *subst_assign_varlist = (WORD_LIST *)NULL;
+
+/* A WORD_LIST of words to be expanded by expand_word_list_internal,
+ without any leading variable assignments. */
+static WORD_LIST *garglist = (WORD_LIST *)NULL;
+
+static char *quoted_substring __P((char *, int, int));
+static int quoted_strlen __P((char *));
+static char *quoted_strchr __P((char *, int, int));
+
+static char *expand_string_if_necessary __P((char *, int, EXPFUNC *));
+static inline char *expand_string_to_string_internal __P((char *, int, EXPFUNC *));
+static WORD_LIST *call_expand_word_internal __P((WORD_DESC *, int, int, int *, int *));
+static WORD_LIST *expand_string_internal __P((char *, int));
+static WORD_LIST *expand_string_leave_quoted __P((char *, int));
+static WORD_LIST *expand_string_for_rhs __P((char *, int, int *, int *));
+
+static WORD_LIST *list_quote_escapes __P((WORD_LIST *));
+static char *dequote_escapes __P((char *));
+static char *make_quoted_char __P((int));
+static WORD_LIST *quote_list __P((WORD_LIST *));
+static WORD_LIST *dequote_list __P((WORD_LIST *));
+static char *remove_quoted_escapes __P((char *));
+static char *remove_quoted_nulls __P((char *));
+
+static int unquoted_substring __P((char *, char *));
+static int unquoted_member __P((int, char *));
+
+static int do_assignment_internal __P((const char *, int));
+
+static char *string_extract_verbatim __P((char *, int *, char *));
+static char *string_extract __P((char *, int *, char *, int));
+static char *string_extract_double_quoted __P((char *, int *, int));
+static inline char *string_extract_single_quoted __P((char *, int *));
+static inline int skip_single_quoted __P((char *, size_t, int));
+static int skip_double_quoted __P((char *, size_t, int));
+static char *extract_delimited_string __P((char *, int *, char *, char *, char *, int));
+static char *extract_dollar_brace_string __P((char *, int *, int, int));
+
+static char *pos_params __P((char *, int, int, int));
+
+static unsigned char *mb_getcharlens __P((char *, int));
+
+static char *remove_upattern __P((char *, char *, int));
+#if defined (HANDLE_MULTIBYTE)
+# if !defined (HAVE_WCSDUP)
+static wchar_t *wcsdup __P((wchar_t *));
+# endif
+static wchar_t *remove_wpattern __P((wchar_t *, size_t, wchar_t *, int));
+#endif
+static char *remove_pattern __P((char *, char *, int));
+
+static int match_pattern_char __P((char *, char *));
+static int match_upattern __P((char *, char *, int, char **, char **));
+#if defined (HANDLE_MULTIBYTE)
+static int match_pattern_wchar __P((wchar_t *, wchar_t *));
+static int match_wpattern __P((wchar_t *, char **, size_t, wchar_t *, int, char **, char **));
+#endif
+static int match_pattern __P((char *, char *, int, char **, char **));
+static int getpatspec __P((int, char *));
+static char *getpattern __P((char *, int, int));
+static char *variable_remove_pattern __P((char *, char *, int, int));
+static char *list_remove_pattern __P((WORD_LIST *, char *, int, int, int));
+static char *parameter_list_remove_pattern __P((int, char *, int, int));
+#ifdef ARRAY_VARS
+static char *array_remove_pattern __P((ARRAY *, char *, int, char *, int));
+#endif
+static char *parameter_brace_remove_pattern __P((char *, char *, char *, int, int));
+
+static char *process_substitute __P((char *, int));
+
+static char *read_comsub __P((int, int));
+
+#ifdef ARRAY_VARS
+static arrayind_t array_length_reference __P((char *));
+#endif
+
+static int valid_brace_expansion_word __P((char *, int));
+static int chk_atstar __P((char *, int, int *, int *));
+
+static char *parameter_brace_expand_word __P((char *, int, int));
+static char *parameter_brace_expand_indir __P((char *, int, int, int *, int *));
+static char *parameter_brace_expand_rhs __P((char *, char *, int, int, int *, int *));
+static void parameter_brace_expand_error __P((char *, char *));
+
+static int valid_length_expression __P((char *));
+static intmax_t parameter_brace_expand_length __P((char *));
+
+static char *skiparith __P((char *, int));
+static int verify_substring_values __P((char *, char *, int, intmax_t *, intmax_t *));
+static int get_var_and_type __P((char *, char *, int, SHELL_VAR **, char **));
+static char *mb_substring __P((char *, int, int));
+static char *parameter_brace_substring __P((char *, char *, char *, int));
+
+static char *pos_params_pat_subst __P((char *, char *, char *, int));
+
+static char *parameter_brace_patsub __P((char *, char *, char *, int));
+
+static char *parameter_brace_expand __P((char *, int *, int, int *, int *));
+static char *param_expand __P((char *, int *, int, int *, int *, int *, int *, int));
+
+static WORD_LIST *expand_word_internal __P((WORD_DESC *, int, int, int *, int *));
+
+static WORD_LIST *word_list_split __P((WORD_LIST *));
+
+static void exp_jump_to_top_level __P((int));
+
+static WORD_LIST *separate_out_assignments __P((WORD_LIST *));
+static WORD_LIST *glob_expand_word_list __P((WORD_LIST *, int));
+#ifdef BRACE_EXPANSION
+static WORD_LIST *brace_expand_word_list __P((WORD_LIST *, int));
+#endif
+static WORD_LIST *shell_expand_word_list __P((WORD_LIST *, int));
+static WORD_LIST *expand_word_list_internal __P((WORD_LIST *, int));
+
+/* **************************************************************** */
+/* */
+/* Utility Functions */
+/* */
+/* **************************************************************** */
+
+#ifdef INCLUDE_UNUSED
+static char *
+quoted_substring (string, start, end)
+ char *string;
+ int start, end;
+{
+ register int len, l;
+ register char *result, *s, *r;
+
+ len = end - start;
+
+ /* Move to string[start], skipping quoted characters. */
+ for (s = string, l = 0; *s && l < start; )
+ {
+ if (*s == CTLESC)
+ {
+ s++;
+ continue;
+ }
+ l++;
+ if (*s == 0)
+ break;
+ }
+
+ r = result = (char *)xmalloc (2*len + 1); /* save room for quotes */
+
+ /* Copy LEN characters, including quote characters. */
+ s = string + l;
+ for (l = 0; l < len; s++)
+ {
+ if (*s == CTLESC)
+ *r++ = *s++;
+ *r++ = *s;
+ l++;
+ if (*s == 0)
+ break;
+ }
+ *r = '\0';
+ return result;
+}
+#endif
+
+#ifdef INCLUDE_UNUSED
+/* Return the length of S, skipping over quoted characters */
+static int
+quoted_strlen (s)
+ char *s;
+{
+ register char *p;
+ int i;
+
+ i = 0;
+ for (p = s; *p; p++)
+ {
+ if (*p == CTLESC)
+ {
+ p++;
+ if (*p == 0)
+ return (i + 1);
+ }
+ i++;
+ }
+
+ return i;
+}
+#endif
+
+/* Find the first occurrence of character C in string S, obeying shell
+ quoting rules. If (FLAGS & ST_BACKSL) is non-zero, backslash-escaped
+ characters are skipped. If (FLAGS & ST_CTLESC) is non-zero, characters
+ escaped with CTLESC are skipped. */
+static char *
+quoted_strchr (s, c, flags)
+ char *s;
+ int c, flags;
+{
+ register char *p;
+
+ for (p = s; *p; p++)
+ {
+ if (((flags & ST_BACKSL) && *p == '\\')
+ || ((flags & ST_CTLESC) && *p == CTLESC))
+ {
+ p++;
+ if (*p == '\0')
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+ continue;
+ }
+ else if (*p == c)
+ return p;
+ }
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+}
+
+/* Return 1 if CHARACTER appears in an unquoted portion of
+ STRING. Return 0 otherwise. CHARACTER must be a single-byte character. */
+static int
+unquoted_member (character, string)
+ int character;
+ char *string;
+{
+ size_t slen;
+ int sindex, c;
+ DECLARE_MBSTATE;
+
+ slen = strlen (string);
+ sindex = 0;
+ while (c = string[sindex])
+ {
+ if (c == character)
+ return (1);
+
+ switch (c)
+ {
+ default:
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, sindex);
+ break;
+
+ case '\\':
+ sindex++;
+ if (string[sindex])
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, sindex);
+ break;
+
+ case '\'':
+ sindex = skip_single_quoted (string, slen, ++sindex);
+ break;
+
+ case '"':
+ sindex = skip_double_quoted (string, slen, ++sindex);
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ return (0);
+}
+
+/* Return 1 if SUBSTR appears in an unquoted portion of STRING. */
+static int
+unquoted_substring (substr, string)
+ char *substr, *string;
+{
+ size_t slen;
+ int sindex, c, sublen;
+ DECLARE_MBSTATE;
+
+ if (substr == 0 || *substr == '\0')
+ return (0);
+
+ slen = strlen (string);
+ sublen = strlen (substr);
+ for (sindex = 0; c = string[sindex]; )
+ {
+ if (STREQN (string + sindex, substr, sublen))
+ return (1);
+
+ switch (c)
+ {
+ case '\\':
+ sindex++;
+
+ if (string[sindex])
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, sindex);
+ break;
+
+ case '\'':
+ sindex = skip_single_quoted (string, slen, ++sindex);
+ break;
+
+ case '"':
+ sindex = skip_double_quoted (string, slen, ++sindex);
+ break;
+
+ default:
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, sindex);
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ return (0);
+}
+
+/* Most of the substitutions must be done in parallel. In order
+ to avoid using tons of unclear goto's, I have some functions
+ for manipulating malloc'ed strings. They all take INDX, a
+ pointer to an integer which is the offset into the string
+ where manipulation is taking place. They also take SIZE, a
+ pointer to an integer which is the current length of the
+ character array for this string. */
+
+/* Append SOURCE to TARGET at INDEX. SIZE is the current amount
+ of space allocated to TARGET. SOURCE can be NULL, in which
+ case nothing happens. Gets rid of SOURCE by freeing it.
+ Returns TARGET in case the location has changed. */
+INLINE char *
+sub_append_string (source, target, indx, size)
+ char *source, *target;
+ int *indx, *size;
+{
+ if (source)
+ {
+ int srclen, n;
+
+ srclen = STRLEN (source);
+ if (srclen >= (int)(*size - *indx))
+ {
+ n = srclen + *indx;
+ n = (n + DEFAULT_ARRAY_SIZE) - (n % DEFAULT_ARRAY_SIZE);
+ target = (char *)xrealloc (target, (*size = n));
+ }
+
+ FASTCOPY (source, target + *indx, srclen);
+ *indx += srclen;
+ target[*indx] = '\0';
+
+ free (source);
+ }
+ return (target);
+}
+
+#if 0
+/* UNUSED */
+/* Append the textual representation of NUMBER to TARGET.
+ INDX and SIZE are as in SUB_APPEND_STRING. */
+char *
+sub_append_number (number, target, indx, size)
+ intmax_t number;
+ int *indx, *size;
+ char *target;
+{
+ char *temp;
+
+ temp = itos (number);
+ return (sub_append_string (temp, target, indx, size));
+}
+#endif
+
+/* Extract a substring from STRING, starting at SINDEX and ending with
+ one of the characters in CHARLIST. Don't make the ending character
+ part of the string. Leave SINDEX pointing at the ending character.
+ Understand about backslashes in the string. If (flags & EX_VARNAME)
+ is non-zero, and array variables have been compiled into the shell,
+ everything between a `[' and a corresponding `]' is skipped over.
+ If (flags & EX_NOALLOC) is non-zero, don't return the substring, just
+ update SINDEX. */
+static char *
+string_extract (string, sindex, charlist, flags)
+ char *string;
+ int *sindex;
+ char *charlist;
+ int flags;
+{
+ register int c, i;
+ size_t slen;
+ char *temp;
+ DECLARE_MBSTATE;
+
+ slen = strlen (string + *sindex) + *sindex;
+ i = *sindex;
+ while (c = string[i])
+ {
+ if (c == '\\')
+ {
+ if (string[i + 1])
+ i++;
+ else
+ break;
+ }
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+ else if ((flags & EX_VARNAME) && c == '[')
+ {
+ int ni;
+ /* If this is an array subscript, skip over it and continue. */
+ ni = skipsubscript (string, i);
+ if (string[ni] == ']')
+ i = ni;
+ }
+#endif
+ else if (MEMBER (c, charlist))
+ break;
+
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, i);
+ }
+
+ temp = (flags & EX_NOALLOC) ? (char *)NULL : substring (string, *sindex, i);
+ *sindex = i;
+ return (temp);
+}
+
+/* Extract the contents of STRING as if it is enclosed in double quotes.
+ SINDEX, when passed in, is the offset of the character immediately
+ following the opening double quote; on exit, SINDEX is left pointing after
+ the closing double quote. If STRIPDQ is non-zero, unquoted double
+ quotes are stripped and the string is terminated by a null byte.
+ Backslashes between the embedded double quotes are processed. If STRIPDQ
+ is zero, an unquoted `"' terminates the string. */
+static char *
+string_extract_double_quoted (string, sindex, stripdq)
+ char *string;
+ int *sindex, stripdq;
+{
+ size_t slen;
+ char *send;
+ int j, i, t;
+ unsigned char c;
+ char *temp, *ret; /* The new string we return. */
+ int pass_next, backquote, si; /* State variables for the machine. */
+ int dquote;
+ DECLARE_MBSTATE;
+
+ slen = strlen (string + *sindex) + *sindex;
+ send = string + slen;
+
+ pass_next = backquote = dquote = 0;
+ temp = (char *)xmalloc (1 + slen - *sindex);
+
+ j = 0;
+ i = *sindex;
+ while (c = string[i])
+ {
+ /* Process a character that was quoted by a backslash. */
+ if (pass_next)
+ {
+ /* Posix.2 sez:
+
+ ``The backslash shall retain its special meaning as an escape
+ character only when followed by one of the characters:
+ $ ` " \ <newline>''.
+
+ If STRIPDQ is zero, we handle the double quotes here and let
+ expand_word_internal handle the rest. If STRIPDQ is non-zero,
+ we have already been through one round of backslash stripping,
+ and want to strip these backslashes only if DQUOTE is non-zero,
+ indicating that we are inside an embedded double-quoted string. */
+
+ /* If we are in an embedded quoted string, then don't strip
+ backslashes before characters for which the backslash
+ retains its special meaning, but remove backslashes in
+ front of other characters. If we are not in an
+ embedded quoted string, don't strip backslashes at all.
+ This mess is necessary because the string was already
+ surrounded by double quotes (and sh has some really weird
+ quoting rules).
+ The returned string will be run through expansion as if
+ it were double-quoted. */
+ if ((stripdq == 0 && c != '"') ||
+ (stripdq && ((dquote && (sh_syntaxtab[c] & CBSDQUOTE)) || dquote == 0)))
+ temp[j++] = '\\';
+ pass_next = 0;
+
+add_one_character:
+ COPY_CHAR_I (temp, j, string, send, i);
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /* A backslash protects the next character. The code just above
+ handles preserving the backslash in front of any character but
+ a double quote. */
+ if (c == '\\')
+ {
+ pass_next++;
+ i++;
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /* Inside backquotes, ``the portion of the quoted string from the
+ initial backquote and the characters up to the next backquote
+ that is not preceded by a backslash, having escape characters
+ removed, defines that command''. */
+ if (backquote)
+ {
+ if (c == '`')
+ backquote = 0;
+ temp[j++] = c;
+ i++;
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ if (c == '`')
+ {
+ temp[j++] = c;
+ backquote++;
+ i++;
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /* Pass everything between `$(' and the matching `)' or a quoted
+ ${ ... } pair through according to the Posix.2 specification. */
+ if (c == '$' && ((string[i + 1] == LPAREN) || (string[i + 1] == LBRACE)))
+ {
+ int free_ret = 1;
+
+ si = i + 2;
+ if (string[i + 1] == LPAREN)
+ ret = extract_delimited_string (string, &si, "$(", "(", ")", 0); /*)*/
+ else
+ ret = extract_dollar_brace_string (string, &si, 1, 0);
+
+ temp[j++] = '$';
+ temp[j++] = string[i + 1];
+
+ /* Just paranoia; ret will not be 0 unless no_longjmp_on_fatal_error
+ is set. */
+ if (ret == 0 && no_longjmp_on_fatal_error)
+ {
+ free_ret = 0;
+ ret = string + i + 2;
+ }
+
+ for (t = 0; ret[t]; t++, j++)
+ temp[j] = ret[t];
+ temp[j++] = string[si];
+
+ i = si + 1;
+ if (free_ret)
+ free (ret);
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /* Add any character but a double quote to the quoted string we're
+ accumulating. */
+ if (c != '"')
+ goto add_one_character;
+
+ /* c == '"' */
+ if (stripdq)
+ {
+ dquote ^= 1;
+ i++;
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ break;
+ }
+ temp[j] = '\0';
+
+ /* Point to after the closing quote. */
+ if (c)
+ i++;
+ *sindex = i;
+
+ return (temp);
+}
+
+/* This should really be another option to string_extract_double_quoted. */
+static int
+skip_double_quoted (string, slen, sind)
+ char *string;
+ size_t slen;
+ int sind;
+{
+ int c, i;
+ char *ret;
+ int pass_next, backquote, si;
+ DECLARE_MBSTATE;
+
+ pass_next = backquote = 0;
+ i = sind;
+ while (c = string[i])
+ {
+ if (pass_next)
+ {
+ pass_next = 0;
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, i);
+ continue;
+ }
+ else if (c == '\\')
+ {
+ pass_next++;
+ i++;
+ continue;
+ }
+ else if (backquote)
+ {
+ if (c == '`')
+ backquote = 0;
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, i);
+ continue;
+ }
+ else if (c == '`')
+ {
+ backquote++;
+ i++;
+ continue;
+ }
+ else if (c == '$' && ((string[i + 1] == LPAREN) || (string[i + 1] == LBRACE)))
+ {
+ si = i + 2;
+ if (string[i + 1] == LPAREN)
+ ret = extract_delimited_string (string, &si, "$(", "(", ")", EX_NOALLOC);
+ else
+ ret = extract_dollar_brace_string (string, &si, 0, EX_NOALLOC);
+
+ i = si + 1;
+ continue;
+ }
+ else if (c != '"')
+ {
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, i);
+ continue;
+ }
+ else
+ break;
+ }
+
+ if (c)
+ i++;
+
+ return (i);
+}
+
+/* Extract the contents of STRING as if it is enclosed in single quotes.
+ SINDEX, when passed in, is the offset of the character immediately
+ following the opening single quote; on exit, SINDEX is left pointing after
+ the closing single quote. */
+static inline char *
+string_extract_single_quoted (string, sindex)
+ char *string;
+ int *sindex;
+{
+ register int i;
+ size_t slen;
+ char *t;
+ DECLARE_MBSTATE;
+
+ slen = strlen (string + *sindex) + *sindex;
+ i = *sindex;
+ while (string[i] && string[i] != '\'')
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, i);
+
+ t = substring (string, *sindex, i);
+
+ if (string[i])
+ i++;
+ *sindex = i;
+
+ return (t);
+}
+
+static inline int
+skip_single_quoted (string, slen, sind)
+ char *string;
+ size_t slen;
+ int sind;
+{
+ register int c;
+ DECLARE_MBSTATE;
+
+ c = sind;
+ while (string[c] && string[c] != '\'')
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, c);
+
+ if (string[c])
+ c++;
+ return c;
+}
+
+/* Just like string_extract, but doesn't hack backslashes or any of
+ that other stuff. Obeys CTLESC quoting. Used to do splitting on $IFS. */
+static char *
+string_extract_verbatim (string, sindex, charlist)
+ char *string;
+ int *sindex;
+ char *charlist;
+{
+ register int i = *sindex;
+ int c;
+ char *temp;
+
+ if (charlist[0] == '\'' && charlist[1] == '\0')
+ {
+ temp = string_extract_single_quoted (string, sindex);
+ --*sindex; /* leave *sindex at separator character */
+ return temp;
+ }
+
+ for (i = *sindex; c = string[i]; i++)
+ {
+ if (c == CTLESC)
+ {
+ i++;
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ if (MEMBER (c, charlist))
+ break;
+ }
+
+ temp = substring (string, *sindex, i);
+ *sindex = i;
+
+ return (temp);
+}
+
+/* Extract the $( construct in STRING, and return a new string.
+ Start extracting at (SINDEX) as if we had just seen "$(".
+ Make (SINDEX) get the position of the matching ")". */
+char *
+extract_command_subst (string, sindex)
+ char *string;
+ int *sindex;
+{
+ return (extract_delimited_string (string, sindex, "$(", "(", ")", 0));
+}
+
+/* Extract the $[ construct in STRING, and return a new string. (])
+ Start extracting at (SINDEX) as if we had just seen "$[".
+ Make (SINDEX) get the position of the matching "]". */
+char *
+extract_arithmetic_subst (string, sindex)
+ char *string;
+ int *sindex;
+{
+ return (extract_delimited_string (string, sindex, "$[", "[", "]", 0)); /*]*/
+}
+
+#if defined (PROCESS_SUBSTITUTION)
+/* Extract the <( or >( construct in STRING, and return a new string.
+ Start extracting at (SINDEX) as if we had just seen "<(".
+ Make (SINDEX) get the position of the matching ")". */ /*))*/
+char *
+extract_process_subst (string, starter, sindex)
+ char *string;
+ char *starter;
+ int *sindex;
+{
+ return (extract_delimited_string (string, sindex, starter, "(", ")", 0));
+}
+#endif /* PROCESS_SUBSTITUTION */
+
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+char *
+extract_array_assignment_list (string, sindex)
+ char *string;
+ int *sindex;
+{
+ return (extract_delimited_string (string, sindex, "(", (char *)NULL, ")", 0));
+}
+#endif
+
+/* Extract and create a new string from the contents of STRING, a
+ character string delimited with OPENER and CLOSER. SINDEX is
+ the address of an int describing the current offset in STRING;
+ it should point to just after the first OPENER found. On exit,
+ SINDEX gets the position of the last character of the matching CLOSER.
+ If OPENER is more than a single character, ALT_OPENER, if non-null,
+ contains a character string that can also match CLOSER and thus
+ needs to be skipped. */
+static char *
+extract_delimited_string (string, sindex, opener, alt_opener, closer, flags)
+ char *string;
+ int *sindex;
+ char *opener, *alt_opener, *closer;
+ int flags;
+{
+ int i, c, si;
+ size_t slen;
+ char *t, *result;
+ int pass_character, nesting_level;
+ int len_closer, len_opener, len_alt_opener;
+ DECLARE_MBSTATE;
+
+ slen = strlen (string + *sindex) + *sindex;
+ len_opener = STRLEN (opener);
+ len_alt_opener = STRLEN (alt_opener);
+ len_closer = STRLEN (closer);
+
+ pass_character = 0;
+
+ nesting_level = 1;
+ i = *sindex;
+
+ while (nesting_level)
+ {
+ c = string[i];
+
+ if (c == 0)
+ break;
+
+ if (pass_character) /* previous char was backslash */
+ {
+ pass_character = 0;
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, i);
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ if (c == CTLESC || c == '\\')
+ {
+ pass_character++;
+ i++;
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /* Process a nested OPENER. */
+ if (STREQN (string + i, opener, len_opener))
+ {
+ si = i + len_opener;
+ t = extract_delimited_string (string, &si, opener, alt_opener, closer, flags|EX_NOALLOC);
+ i = si + 1;
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /* Process a nested ALT_OPENER */
+ if (len_alt_opener && STREQN (string + i, alt_opener, len_alt_opener))
+ {
+ si = i + len_alt_opener;
+ t = extract_delimited_string (string, &si, alt_opener, alt_opener, closer, flags|EX_NOALLOC);
+ i = si + 1;
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /* If the current substring terminates the delimited string, decrement
+ the nesting level. */
+ if (STREQN (string + i, closer, len_closer))
+ {
+ i += len_closer - 1; /* move to last byte of the closer */
+ nesting_level--;
+ if (nesting_level == 0)
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Pass old-style command substitution through verbatim. */
+ if (c == '`')
+ {
+ si = i + 1;
+ t = string_extract (string, &si, "`", flags|EX_NOALLOC);
+ i = si + 1;
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /* Pass single-quoted and double-quoted strings through verbatim. */
+ if (c == '\'' || c == '"')
+ {
+ si = i + 1;
+ i = (c == '\'') ? skip_single_quoted (string, slen, si)
+ : skip_double_quoted (string, slen, si);
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /* move past this character, which was not special. */
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, i);
+ }
+
+ if (c == 0 && nesting_level)
+ {
+ if (no_longjmp_on_fatal_error == 0)
+ {
+ report_error (_("bad substitution: no closing `%s' in %s"), closer, string);
+ last_command_exit_value = EXECUTION_FAILURE;
+ exp_jump_to_top_level (DISCARD);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ *sindex = i;
+ return (char *)NULL;
+ }
+ }
+
+ si = i - *sindex - len_closer + 1;
+ if (flags & EX_NOALLOC)
+ result = (char *)NULL;
+ else
+ {
+ result = (char *)xmalloc (1 + si);
+ strncpy (result, string + *sindex, si);
+ result[si] = '\0';
+ }
+ *sindex = i;
+
+ return (result);
+}
+
+/* Extract a parameter expansion expression within ${ and } from STRING.
+ Obey the Posix.2 rules for finding the ending `}': count braces while
+ skipping over enclosed quoted strings and command substitutions.
+ SINDEX is the address of an int describing the current offset in STRING;
+ it should point to just after the first `{' found. On exit, SINDEX
+ gets the position of the matching `}'. QUOTED is non-zero if this
+ occurs inside double quotes. */
+/* XXX -- this is very similar to extract_delimited_string -- XXX */
+static char *
+extract_dollar_brace_string (string, sindex, quoted, flags)
+ char *string;
+ int *sindex, quoted, flags;
+{
+ register int i, c;
+ size_t slen;
+ int pass_character, nesting_level, si;
+ char *result, *t;
+ DECLARE_MBSTATE;
+
+ pass_character = 0;
+ nesting_level = 1;
+ slen = strlen (string + *sindex) + *sindex;
+
+ i = *sindex;
+ while (c = string[i])
+ {
+ if (pass_character)
+ {
+ pass_character = 0;
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, i);
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /* CTLESCs and backslashes quote the next character. */
+ if (c == CTLESC || c == '\\')
+ {
+ pass_character++;
+ i++;
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ if (string[i] == '$' && string[i+1] == LBRACE)
+ {
+ nesting_level++;
+ i += 2;
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ if (c == RBRACE)
+ {
+ nesting_level--;
+ if (nesting_level == 0)
+ break;
+ i++;
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /* Pass the contents of old-style command substitutions through
+ verbatim. */
+ if (c == '`')
+ {
+ si = i + 1;
+ t = string_extract (string, &si, "`", flags|EX_NOALLOC);
+ i = si + 1;
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /* Pass the contents of new-style command substitutions and
+ arithmetic substitutions through verbatim. */
+ if (string[i] == '$' && string[i+1] == LPAREN)
+ {
+ si = i + 2;
+ t = extract_delimited_string (string, &si, "$(", "(", ")", flags|EX_NOALLOC); /*)*/
+ i = si + 1;
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /* Pass the contents of single-quoted and double-quoted strings
+ through verbatim. */
+ if (c == '\'' || c == '"')
+ {
+ si = i + 1;
+ i = (c == '\'') ? skip_single_quoted (string, slen, si)
+ : skip_double_quoted (string, slen, si);
+ /* skip_XXX_quoted leaves index one past close quote */
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /* move past this character, which was not special. */
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, i);
+ }
+
+ if (c == 0 && nesting_level)
+ {
+ if (no_longjmp_on_fatal_error == 0)
+ { /* { */
+ report_error ("bad substitution: no closing `%s' in %s", "}", string);
+ last_command_exit_value = EXECUTION_FAILURE;
+ exp_jump_to_top_level (DISCARD);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ *sindex = i;
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+ }
+ }
+
+ result = (flags & EX_NOALLOC) ? (char *)NULL : substring (string, *sindex, i);
+ *sindex = i;
+
+ return (result);
+}
+
+/* Remove backslashes which are quoting backquotes from STRING. Modifies
+ STRING, and returns a pointer to it. */
+char *
+de_backslash (string)
+ char *string;
+{
+ register size_t slen;
+ register int i, j, prev_i;
+ DECLARE_MBSTATE;
+
+ slen = strlen (string);
+ i = j = 0;
+
+ /* Loop copying string[i] to string[j], i >= j. */
+ while (i < slen)
+ {
+ if (string[i] == '\\' && (string[i + 1] == '`' || string[i + 1] == '\\' ||
+ string[i + 1] == '$'))
+ i++;
+ prev_i = i;
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, i);
+ if (j < prev_i)
+ do string[j++] = string[prev_i++]; while (prev_i < i);
+ else
+ j = i;
+ }
+ string[j] = '\0';
+
+ return (string);
+}
+
+#if 0
+/*UNUSED*/
+/* Replace instances of \! in a string with !. */
+void
+unquote_bang (string)
+ char *string;
+{
+ register int i, j;
+ register char *temp;
+
+ temp = (char *)xmalloc (1 + strlen (string));
+
+ for (i = 0, j = 0; (temp[j] = string[i]); i++, j++)
+ {
+ if (string[i] == '\\' && string[i + 1] == '!')
+ {
+ temp[j] = '!';
+ i++;
+ }
+ }
+ strcpy (string, temp);
+ free (temp);
+}
+#endif
+
+#if defined (READLINE)
+/* Return 1 if the portion of STRING ending at EINDEX is quoted (there is
+ an unclosed quoted string), or if the character at EINDEX is quoted
+ by a backslash. NO_LONGJMP_ON_FATAL_ERROR is used to flag that the various
+ single and double-quoted string parsing functions should not return an
+ error if there are unclosed quotes or braces. The characters that this
+ recognizes need to be the same as the contents of
+ rl_completer_quote_characters. */
+
+#define CQ_RETURN(x) do { no_longjmp_on_fatal_error = 0; return (x); } while (0)
+
+int
+char_is_quoted (string, eindex)
+ char *string;
+ int eindex;
+{
+ int i, pass_next, c;
+ size_t slen;
+ DECLARE_MBSTATE;
+
+ slen = strlen (string);
+ no_longjmp_on_fatal_error = 1;
+ i = pass_next = 0;
+ while (i <= eindex)
+ {
+ c = string[i];
+
+ if (pass_next)
+ {
+ pass_next = 0;
+ if (i >= eindex) /* XXX was if (i >= eindex - 1) */
+ CQ_RETURN(1);
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, i);
+ continue;
+ }
+ else if (c == '\\')
+ {
+ pass_next = 1;
+ i++;
+ continue;
+ }
+ else if (c == '\'' || c == '"')
+ {
+ i = (c == '\'') ? skip_single_quoted (string, slen, ++i)
+ : skip_double_quoted (string, slen, ++i);
+ if (i > eindex)
+ CQ_RETURN(1);
+ /* no increment, the skip_xxx functions go one past end */
+ }
+ else
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, i);
+ }
+
+ CQ_RETURN(0);
+}
+
+int
+unclosed_pair (string, eindex, openstr)
+ char *string;
+ int eindex;
+ char *openstr;
+{
+ int i, pass_next, openc, olen;
+ size_t slen;
+ DECLARE_MBSTATE;
+
+ slen = strlen (string);
+ olen = strlen (openstr);
+ i = pass_next = openc = 0;
+ while (i <= eindex)
+ {
+ if (pass_next)
+ {
+ pass_next = 0;
+ if (i >= eindex) /* XXX was if (i >= eindex - 1) */
+ return 0;
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, i);
+ continue;
+ }
+ else if (string[i] == '\\')
+ {
+ pass_next = 1;
+ i++;
+ continue;
+ }
+ else if (STREQN (string + i, openstr, olen))
+ {
+ openc = 1 - openc;
+ i += olen;
+ }
+ else if (string[i] == '\'' || string[i] == '"')
+ {
+ i = (string[i] == '\'') ? skip_single_quoted (string, slen, i)
+ : skip_double_quoted (string, slen, i);
+ if (i > eindex)
+ return 0;
+ }
+ else
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, i);
+ }
+ return (openc);
+}
+
+/* Skip characters in STRING until we find a character in DELIMS, and return
+ the index of that character. START is the index into string at which we
+ begin. This is similar in spirit to strpbrk, but it returns an index into
+ STRING and takes a starting index. This little piece of code knows quite
+ a lot of shell syntax. It's very similar to skip_double_quoted and other
+ functions of that ilk. */
+int
+skip_to_delim (string, start, delims)
+ char *string;
+ int start;
+ char *delims;
+{
+ int i, pass_next, backq, si, c;
+ size_t slen;
+ char *temp;
+ DECLARE_MBSTATE;
+
+ slen = strlen (string + start) + start;
+ no_longjmp_on_fatal_error = 1;
+ i = start;
+ pass_next = backq = 0;
+ while (c = string[i])
+ {
+ if (pass_next)
+ {
+ pass_next = 0;
+ if (c == 0)
+ CQ_RETURN(i);
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, i);
+ continue;
+ }
+ else if (c == '\\')
+ {
+ pass_next = 1;
+ i++;
+ continue;
+ }
+ else if (backq)
+ {
+ if (c == '`')
+ backq = 0;
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, i);
+ continue;
+ }
+ else if (c == '`')
+ {
+ backq = 1;
+ i++;
+ continue;
+ }
+ else if (c == '\'' || c == '"')
+ {
+ i = (c == '\'') ? skip_single_quoted (string, slen, ++i)
+ : skip_double_quoted (string, slen, ++i);
+ /* no increment, the skip functions increment past the closing quote. */
+ }
+ else if (c == '$' && (string[i+1] == LPAREN || string[i+1] == LBRACE))
+ {
+ si = i + 2;
+ if (string[si] == '\0')
+ CQ_RETURN(si);
+
+ if (string[i+1] == LPAREN)
+ temp = extract_delimited_string (string, &si, "$(", "(", ")", EX_NOALLOC); /* ) */
+ else
+ temp = extract_dollar_brace_string (string, &si, 0, EX_NOALLOC);
+ i = si;
+ if (string[i] == '\0') /* don't increment i past EOS in loop */
+ break;
+ i++;
+ continue;
+ }
+ else if (member (c, delims))
+ break;
+ else
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, i);
+ }
+
+ CQ_RETURN(i);
+}
+
+/* Split STRING (length SLEN) at DELIMS, and return a WORD_LIST with the
+ individual words. If DELIMS is NULL, the current value of $IFS is used
+ to split the string, and the function follows the shell field splitting
+ rules. SENTINEL is an index to look for. NWP, if non-NULL,
+ gets the number of words in the returned list. CWP, if non-NULL, gets
+ the index of the word containing SENTINEL. Non-whitespace chars in
+ DELIMS delimit separate fields. */
+WORD_LIST *
+split_at_delims (string, slen, delims, sentinel, nwp, cwp)
+ char *string;
+ int slen;
+ char *delims;
+ int sentinel;
+ int *nwp, *cwp;
+{
+ int ts, te, i, nw, cw, ifs_split;
+ char *token, *d, *d2;
+ WORD_LIST *ret, *tl;
+
+ if (string == 0 || *string == '\0')
+ {
+ if (nwp)
+ *nwp = 0;
+ if (cwp)
+ *cwp = 0;
+ return ((WORD_LIST *)NULL);
+ }
+
+ d = (delims == 0) ? ifs_value : delims;
+ ifs_split = delims == 0;
+
+ /* Make d2 the non-whitespace characters in delims */
+ d2 = 0;
+ if (delims)
+ {
+ d2 = (char *)xmalloc (strlen (delims) + 1);
+ for (i = ts = 0; delims[i]; i++)
+ {
+ if (whitespace(delims[i]) == 0)
+ d2[ts++] = delims[i];
+ }
+ d2[ts] = '\0';
+ }
+
+ ret = (WORD_LIST *)NULL;
+
+ /* Remove sequences of whitspace characters at the start of the string, as
+ long as those characters are delimiters. */
+ for (i = 0; member (string[i], d) && spctabnl (string[i]); i++)
+ ;
+ if (string[i] == '\0')
+ return (ret);
+
+ ts = i;
+ nw = 0;
+ cw = -1;
+ while (1)
+ {
+ te = skip_to_delim (string, ts, d);
+
+ /* If we have a non-whitespace delimiter character, use it to make a
+ separate field. This is just about what $IFS splitting does and
+ is closer to the behavior of the shell parser. */
+ if (ts == te && d2 && member (string[ts], d2))
+ {
+ te = ts + 1;
+ /* If we're using IFS splitting, the non-whitespace delimiter char
+ and any additional IFS whitespace delimits a field. */
+ if (ifs_split)
+ while (member (string[te], d) && spctabnl (string[te]))
+ te++;
+ else
+ while (member (string[te], d2))
+ te++;
+ }
+
+ token = substring (string, ts, te);
+
+ ret = add_string_to_list (token, ret);
+ free (token);
+ nw++;
+
+ if (sentinel >= ts && sentinel <= te)
+ cw = nw;
+
+ /* If the cursor is at whitespace just before word start, set the
+ sentinel word to the current word. */
+ if (cwp && cw == -1 && sentinel == ts-1)
+ cw = nw;
+
+ /* If the cursor is at whitespace between two words, make a new, empty
+ word, add it before (well, after, since the list is in reverse order)
+ the word we just added, and set the current word to that one. */
+ if (cwp && cw == -1 && sentinel < ts)
+ {
+ tl = make_word_list (make_word (""), ret->next);
+ ret->next = tl;
+ cw = nw;
+ nw++;
+ }
+
+ if (string[te] == 0)
+ break;
+
+ i = te;
+ while (member (string[i], d) && (ifs_split || spctabnl(string[i])))
+ i++;
+
+ if (string[i])
+ ts = i;
+ else
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Special case for SENTINEL at the end of STRING. If we haven't found
+ the word containing SENTINEL yet, and the index we're looking for is at
+ the end of STRING, add an additional null argument and set the current
+ word pointer to that. */
+ if (cwp && cw == -1 && sentinel >= slen)
+ {
+ if (whitespace (string[sentinel - 1]))
+ {
+ token = "";
+ ret = add_string_to_list (token, ret);
+ nw++;
+ }
+ cw = nw;
+ }
+
+ if (nwp)
+ *nwp = nw;
+ if (cwp)
+ *cwp = cw;
+
+ return (REVERSE_LIST (ret, WORD_LIST *));
+}
+#endif /* READLINE */
+
+#if 0
+/* UNUSED */
+/* Extract the name of the variable to bind to from the assignment string. */
+char *
+assignment_name (string)
+ char *string;
+{
+ int offset;
+ char *temp;
+
+ offset = assignment (string, 0);
+ if (offset == 0)
+ return (char *)NULL;
+ temp = substring (string, 0, offset);
+ return (temp);
+}
+#endif
+
+/* **************************************************************** */
+/* */
+/* Functions to convert strings to WORD_LISTs and vice versa */
+/* */
+/* **************************************************************** */
+
+/* Return a single string of all the words in LIST. SEP is the separator
+ to put between individual elements of LIST in the output string. */
+char *
+string_list_internal (list, sep)
+ WORD_LIST *list;
+ char *sep;
+{
+ register WORD_LIST *t;
+ char *result, *r;
+ int word_len, sep_len, result_size;
+
+ if (list == 0)
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+
+ /* Short-circuit quickly if we don't need to separate anything. */
+ if (list->next == 0)
+ return (savestring (list->word->word));
+
+ /* This is nearly always called with either sep[0] == 0 or sep[1] == 0. */
+ sep_len = STRLEN (sep);
+ result_size = 0;
+
+ for (t = list; t; t = t->next)
+ {
+ if (t != list)
+ result_size += sep_len;
+ result_size += strlen (t->word->word);
+ }
+
+ r = result = (char *)xmalloc (result_size + 1);
+
+ for (t = list; t; t = t->next)
+ {
+ if (t != list && sep_len)
+ {
+ if (sep_len > 1)
+ {
+ FASTCOPY (sep, r, sep_len);
+ r += sep_len;
+ }
+ else
+ *r++ = sep[0];
+ }
+
+ word_len = strlen (t->word->word);
+ FASTCOPY (t->word->word, r, word_len);
+ r += word_len;
+ }
+
+ *r = '\0';
+ return (result);
+}
+
+/* Return a single string of all the words present in LIST, separating
+ each word with a space. */
+char *
+string_list (list)
+ WORD_LIST *list;
+{
+ return (string_list_internal (list, " "));
+}
+
+/* Return a single string of all the words present in LIST, obeying the
+ quoting rules for "$*", to wit: (P1003.2, draft 11, 3.5.2) "If the
+ expansion [of $*] appears within a double quoted string, it expands
+ to a single field with the value of each parameter separated by the
+ first character of the IFS variable, or by a <space> if IFS is unset." */
+char *
+string_list_dollar_star (list)
+ WORD_LIST *list;
+{
+ char sep[2];
+
+ sep[0] = ifs_firstc;
+ sep[1] = '\0';
+
+ return (string_list_internal (list, sep));
+}
+
+/* Turn $@ into a string. If (quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES))
+ is non-zero, the $@ appears within double quotes, and we should quote
+ the list before converting it into a string. If IFS is unset, and the
+ word is not quoted, we just need to quote CTLESC and CTLNUL characters
+ in the words in the list, because the default value of $IFS is
+ <space><tab><newline>, IFS characters in the words in the list should
+ also be split. If IFS is null, and the word is not quoted, we need
+ to quote the words in the list to preserve the positional parameters
+ exactly. */
+char *
+string_list_dollar_at (list, quoted)
+ WORD_LIST *list;
+ int quoted;
+{
+ char *ifs, sep[2];
+ WORD_LIST *tlist;
+
+ /* XXX this could just be ifs = ifs_value; */
+ ifs = ifs_var ? value_cell (ifs_var) : (char *)0;
+
+ sep[0] = (ifs == 0 || *ifs == 0) ? ' ' : *ifs;
+ sep[1] = '\0';
+
+ tlist = ((quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) || (ifs && *ifs == 0))
+ ? quote_list (list)
+ : list_quote_escapes (list);
+ return (string_list_internal (tlist, sep));
+}
+
+/* Return the list of words present in STRING. Separate the string into
+ words at any of the characters found in SEPARATORS. If QUOTED is
+ non-zero then word in the list will have its quoted flag set, otherwise
+ the quoted flag is left as make_word () deemed fit.
+
+ This obeys the P1003.2 word splitting semantics. If `separators' is
+ exactly <space><tab><newline>, then the splitting algorithm is that of
+ the Bourne shell, which treats any sequence of characters from `separators'
+ as a delimiter. If IFS is unset, which results in `separators' being set
+ to "", no splitting occurs. If separators has some other value, the
+ following rules are applied (`IFS white space' means zero or more
+ occurrences of <space>, <tab>, or <newline>, as long as those characters
+ are in `separators'):
+
+ 1) IFS white space is ignored at the start and the end of the
+ string.
+ 2) Each occurrence of a character in `separators' that is not
+ IFS white space, along with any adjacent occurrences of
+ IFS white space delimits a field.
+ 3) Any nonzero-length sequence of IFS white space delimits a field.
+ */
+
+/* BEWARE! list_string strips null arguments. Don't call it twice and
+ expect to have "" preserved! */
+
+/* This performs word splitting and quoted null character removal on
+ STRING. */
+#define issep(c) \
+ (((separators)[0]) ? ((separators)[1] ? isifs(c) \
+ : (c) == (separators)[0]) \
+ : 0)
+
+WORD_LIST *
+list_string (string, separators, quoted)
+ register char *string, *separators;
+ int quoted;
+{
+ WORD_LIST *result;
+ WORD_DESC *t;
+ char *current_word, *s;
+ int sindex, sh_style_split, whitesep;
+
+ if (!string || !*string)
+ return ((WORD_LIST *)NULL);
+
+ sh_style_split = separators && separators[0] == ' ' &&
+ separators[1] == '\t' &&
+ separators[2] == '\n' &&
+ separators[3] == '\0';
+
+ /* Remove sequences of whitespace at the beginning of STRING, as
+ long as those characters appear in IFS. Do not do this if
+ STRING is quoted or if there are no separator characters. */
+ if (!quoted || !separators || !*separators)
+ {
+ for (s = string; *s && spctabnl (*s) && issep (*s); s++);
+
+ if (!*s)
+ return ((WORD_LIST *)NULL);
+
+ string = s;
+ }
+
+ /* OK, now STRING points to a word that does not begin with white space.
+ The splitting algorithm is:
+ extract a word, stopping at a separator
+ skip sequences of spc, tab, or nl as long as they are separators
+ This obeys the field splitting rules in Posix.2. */
+ for (result = (WORD_LIST *)NULL, sindex = 0; string[sindex]; )
+ {
+ current_word = string_extract_verbatim (string, &sindex, separators);
+ if (current_word == 0)
+ break;
+
+ /* If we have a quoted empty string, add a quoted null argument. We
+ want to preserve the quoted null character iff this is a quoted
+ empty string; otherwise the quoted null characters are removed
+ below. */
+ if (QUOTED_NULL (current_word))
+ {
+ t = make_bare_word ("");
+ t->flags |= W_QUOTED;
+ free (t->word);
+ t->word = make_quoted_char ('\0');
+ result = make_word_list (t, result);
+ }
+ else if (current_word[0] != '\0')
+ {
+ /* If we have something, then add it regardless. However,
+ perform quoted null character removal on the current word. */
+ remove_quoted_nulls (current_word);
+ result = add_string_to_list (current_word, result);
+ if (quoted & (Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES|Q_HERE_DOCUMENT))
+ result->word->flags |= W_QUOTED;
+ }
+
+ /* If we're not doing sequences of separators in the traditional
+ Bourne shell style, then add a quoted null argument. */
+ else if (!sh_style_split && !spctabnl (string[sindex]))
+ {
+ t = make_bare_word ("");
+ t->flags |= W_QUOTED;
+ free (t->word);
+ t->word = make_quoted_char ('\0');
+ result = make_word_list (t, result);
+ }
+
+ free (current_word);
+
+ /* Note whether or not the separator is IFS whitespace, used later. */
+ whitesep = string[sindex] && spctabnl (string[sindex]);
+
+ /* Move past the current separator character. */
+ if (string[sindex])
+ sindex++;
+
+ /* Now skip sequences of space, tab, or newline characters if they are
+ in the list of separators. */
+ while (string[sindex] && spctabnl (string[sindex]) && issep (string[sindex]))
+ sindex++;
+
+ /* If the first separator was IFS whitespace and the current character
+ is a non-whitespace IFS character, it should be part of the current
+ field delimiter, not a separate delimiter that would result in an
+ empty field. Look at POSIX.2, 3.6.5, (3)(b). */
+ if (string[sindex] && whitesep && issep (string[sindex]) && !spctabnl (string[sindex]))
+ sindex++;
+ }
+ return (REVERSE_LIST (result, WORD_LIST *));
+}
+
+/* Parse a single word from STRING, using SEPARATORS to separate fields.
+ ENDPTR is set to the first character after the word. This is used by
+ the `read' builtin. This is never called with SEPARATORS != $IFS;
+ it should be simplified.
+
+ XXX - this function is very similar to list_string; they should be
+ combined - XXX */
+char *
+get_word_from_string (stringp, separators, endptr)
+ char **stringp, *separators, **endptr;
+{
+ register char *s;
+ char *current_word;
+ int sindex, sh_style_split, whitesep;
+
+ if (!stringp || !*stringp || !**stringp)
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+
+ s = *stringp;
+
+ sh_style_split = separators && separators[0] == ' ' &&
+ separators[1] == '\t' &&
+ separators[2] == '\n' &&
+ separators[3] == '\0';
+
+ /* Remove sequences of whitespace at the beginning of STRING, as
+ long as those characters appear in IFS. */
+ if (sh_style_split || !separators || !*separators)
+ {
+ for (; *s && spctabnl (*s) && isifs (*s); s++);
+
+ /* If the string is nothing but whitespace, update it and return. */
+ if (!*s)
+ {
+ *stringp = s;
+ if (endptr)
+ *endptr = s;
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* OK, S points to a word that does not begin with white space.
+ Now extract a word, stopping at a separator, save a pointer to
+ the first character after the word, then skip sequences of spc,
+ tab, or nl as long as they are separators.
+
+ This obeys the field splitting rules in Posix.2. */
+ sindex = 0;
+ current_word = string_extract_verbatim (s, &sindex, separators);
+
+ /* Set ENDPTR to the first character after the end of the word. */
+ if (endptr)
+ *endptr = s + sindex;
+
+ /* Note whether or not the separator is IFS whitespace, used later. */
+ whitesep = s[sindex] && spctabnl (s[sindex]);
+
+ /* Move past the current separator character. */
+ if (s[sindex])
+ sindex++;
+
+ /* Now skip sequences of space, tab, or newline characters if they are
+ in the list of separators. */
+ while (s[sindex] && spctabnl (s[sindex]) && isifs (s[sindex]))
+ sindex++;
+
+ /* If the first separator was IFS whitespace and the current character is
+ a non-whitespace IFS character, it should be part of the current field
+ delimiter, not a separate delimiter that would result in an empty field.
+ Look at POSIX.2, 3.6.5, (3)(b). */
+ if (s[sindex] && whitesep && isifs (s[sindex]) && !spctabnl (s[sindex]))
+ sindex++;
+
+ /* Update STRING to point to the next field. */
+ *stringp = s + sindex;
+ return (current_word);
+}
+
+/* Remove IFS white space at the end of STRING. Start at the end
+ of the string and walk backwards until the beginning of the string
+ or we find a character that's not IFS white space and not CTLESC.
+ Only let CTLESC escape a white space character if SAW_ESCAPE is
+ non-zero. */
+char *
+strip_trailing_ifs_whitespace (string, separators, saw_escape)
+ char *string, *separators;
+ int saw_escape;
+{
+ char *s;
+
+ s = string + STRLEN (string) - 1;
+ while (s > string && ((spctabnl (*s) && isifs (*s)) ||
+ (saw_escape && *s == CTLESC && spctabnl (s[1]))))
+ s--;
+ *++s = '\0';
+ return string;
+}
+
+#if 0
+/* UNUSED */
+/* Split STRING into words at whitespace. Obeys shell-style quoting with
+ backslashes, single and double quotes. */
+WORD_LIST *
+list_string_with_quotes (string)
+ char *string;
+{
+ WORD_LIST *list;
+ char *token, *s;
+ size_t s_len;
+ int c, i, tokstart, len;
+
+ for (s = string; s && *s && spctabnl (*s); s++)
+ ;
+ if (s == 0 || *s == 0)
+ return ((WORD_LIST *)NULL);
+
+ s_len = strlen (s);
+ tokstart = i = 0;
+ list = (WORD_LIST *)NULL;
+ while (1)
+ {
+ c = s[i];
+ if (c == '\\')
+ {
+ i++;
+ if (s[i])
+ i++;
+ }
+ else if (c == '\'')
+ i = skip_single_quoted (s, s_len, ++i);
+ else if (c == '"')
+ i = skip_double_quoted (s, s_len, ++i);
+ else if (c == 0 || spctabnl (c))
+ {
+ /* We have found the end of a token. Make a word out of it and
+ add it to the word list. */
+ token = substring (s, tokstart, i);
+ list = add_string_to_list (token, list);
+ free (token);
+ while (spctabnl (s[i]))
+ i++;
+ if (s[i])
+ tokstart = i;
+ else
+ break;
+ }
+ else
+ i++; /* normal character */
+ }
+ return (REVERSE_LIST (list, WORD_LIST *));
+}
+#endif
+
+/********************************************************/
+/* */
+/* Functions to perform assignment statements */
+/* */
+/********************************************************/
+
+/* Given STRING, an assignment string, get the value of the right side
+ of the `=', and bind it to the left side. If EXPAND is true, then
+ perform parameter expansion, command substitution, and arithmetic
+ expansion on the right-hand side. Perform tilde expansion in any
+ case. Do not perform word splitting on the result of expansion. */
+static int
+do_assignment_internal (string, expand)
+ const char *string;
+ int expand;
+{
+ int offset;
+ char *name, *value;
+ SHELL_VAR *entry;
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+ char *t;
+ int ni;
+#endif
+ int assign_list = 0;
+
+ offset = assignment (string, 0);
+ name = savestring (string);
+ value = (char *)NULL;
+
+ if (name[offset] == '=')
+ {
+ char *temp;
+
+ name[offset] = 0;
+ temp = name + offset + 1;
+
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+ if (expand && temp[0] == LPAREN && xstrchr (temp, RPAREN))
+ {
+ assign_list = ni = 1;
+ value = extract_delimited_string (temp, &ni, "(", (char *)NULL, ")", 0);
+ }
+ else
+#endif
+
+ /* Perform tilde expansion. */
+ if (expand && temp[0])
+ {
+ temp = (xstrchr (temp, '~') && unquoted_member ('~', temp))
+ ? bash_tilde_expand (temp, 1)
+ : savestring (temp);
+
+ value = expand_string_if_necessary (temp, 0, expand_string_unsplit);
+ free (temp);
+ }
+ else
+ value = savestring (temp);
+ }
+
+ if (value == 0)
+ {
+ value = (char *)xmalloc (1);
+ value[0] = '\0';
+ }
+
+ if (echo_command_at_execute)
+ xtrace_print_assignment (name, value, assign_list, 1);
+
+#define ASSIGN_RETURN(r) do { FREE (value); free (name); return (r); } while (0)
+
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+ if (t = xstrchr (name, '[')) /*]*/
+ {
+ if (assign_list)
+ {
+ report_error (_("%s: cannot assign list to array member"), name);
+ ASSIGN_RETURN (0);
+ }
+ entry = assign_array_element (name, value);
+ if (entry == 0)
+ ASSIGN_RETURN (0);
+ }
+ else if (assign_list)
+ entry = assign_array_from_string (name, value);
+ else
+#endif /* ARRAY_VARS */
+ entry = bind_variable (name, value);
+
+ stupidly_hack_special_variables (name);
+
+ if (entry)
+ VUNSETATTR (entry, att_invisible);
+
+ /* Return 1 if the assignment seems to have been performed correctly. */
+ ASSIGN_RETURN (entry ? ((readonly_p (entry) == 0) && noassign_p (entry) == 0) : 0);
+}
+
+/* Perform the assignment statement in STRING, and expand the
+ right side by doing command and parameter expansion. */
+int
+do_assignment (string)
+ const char *string;
+{
+ return do_assignment_internal (string, 1);
+}
+
+/* Given STRING, an assignment string, get the value of the right side
+ of the `=', and bind it to the left side. Do not do command and
+ parameter substitution on the right hand side. */
+int
+do_assignment_no_expand (string)
+ const char *string;
+{
+ return do_assignment_internal (string, 0);
+}
+
+/***************************************************
+ * *
+ * Functions to manage the positional parameters *
+ * *
+ ***************************************************/
+
+/* Return the word list that corresponds to `$*'. */
+WORD_LIST *
+list_rest_of_args ()
+{
+ register WORD_LIST *list, *args;
+ int i;
+
+ /* Break out of the loop as soon as one of the dollar variables is null. */
+ for (i = 1, list = (WORD_LIST *)NULL; i < 10 && dollar_vars[i]; i++)
+ list = make_word_list (make_bare_word (dollar_vars[i]), list);
+
+ for (args = rest_of_args; args; args = args->next)
+ list = make_word_list (make_bare_word (args->word->word), list);
+
+ return (REVERSE_LIST (list, WORD_LIST *));
+}
+
+int
+number_of_args ()
+{
+ register WORD_LIST *list;
+ int n;
+
+ for (n = 0; n < 9 && dollar_vars[n+1]; n++)
+ ;
+ for (list = rest_of_args; list; list = list->next)
+ n++;
+ return n;
+}
+
+/* Return the value of a positional parameter. This handles values > 10. */
+char *
+get_dollar_var_value (ind)
+ intmax_t ind;
+{
+ char *temp;
+ WORD_LIST *p;
+
+ if (ind < 10)
+ temp = dollar_vars[ind] ? savestring (dollar_vars[ind]) : (char *)NULL;
+ else /* We want something like ${11} */
+ {
+ ind -= 10;
+ for (p = rest_of_args; p && ind--; p = p->next)
+ ;
+ temp = p ? savestring (p->word->word) : (char *)NULL;
+ }
+ return (temp);
+}
+
+/* Make a single large string out of the dollar digit variables,
+ and the rest_of_args. If DOLLAR_STAR is 1, then obey the special
+ case of "$*" with respect to IFS. */
+char *
+string_rest_of_args (dollar_star)
+ int dollar_star;
+{
+ register WORD_LIST *list;
+ char *string;
+
+ list = list_rest_of_args ();
+ string = dollar_star ? string_list_dollar_star (list) : string_list (list);
+ dispose_words (list);
+ return (string);
+}
+
+/* Return a string containing the positional parameters from START to
+ END, inclusive. If STRING[0] == '*', we obey the rules for $*,
+ which only makes a difference if QUOTED is non-zero. If QUOTED includes
+ Q_HERE_DOCUMENT or Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES, this returns a quoted list, otherwise
+ no quoting chars are added. */
+static char *
+pos_params (string, start, end, quoted)
+ char *string;
+ int start, end, quoted;
+{
+ WORD_LIST *save, *params, *h, *t;
+ char *ret;
+ int i;
+
+ /* see if we can short-circuit. if start == end, we want 0 parameters. */
+ if (start == end)
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+
+ save = params = list_rest_of_args ();
+ if (save == 0)
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+
+ for (i = 1; params && i < start; i++)
+ params = params->next;
+ if (params == 0)
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+ for (h = t = params; params && i < end; i++)
+ {
+ t = params;
+ params = params->next;
+ }
+
+ t->next = (WORD_LIST *)NULL;
+ if (string[0] == '*')
+#if 0
+ ret = (quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) ? string_list_dollar_star (quote_list (h)) : string_list (h);
+#else
+ {
+ if (quoted & Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)
+ ret = string_list_dollar_star (quote_list (h));
+ else if (quoted & Q_HERE_DOCUMENT)
+ ret = string_list (quote_list (h));
+ else
+ ret = string_list (h);
+ }
+#endif
+ else
+ ret = string_list ((quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) ? quote_list (h) : h);
+ if (t != params)
+ t->next = params;
+
+ dispose_words (save);
+ return (ret);
+}
+
+/******************************************************************/
+/* */
+/* Functions to expand strings to strings or WORD_LISTs */
+/* */
+/******************************************************************/
+
+#if defined (PROCESS_SUBSTITUTION)
+#define EXP_CHAR(s) (s == '$' || s == '`' || s == '<' || s == '>' || s == CTLESC)
+#else
+#define EXP_CHAR(s) (s == '$' || s == '`' || s == CTLESC)
+#endif
+
+/* If there are any characters in STRING that require full expansion,
+ then call FUNC to expand STRING; otherwise just perform quote
+ removal if necessary. This returns a new string. */
+static char *
+expand_string_if_necessary (string, quoted, func)
+ char *string;
+ int quoted;
+ EXPFUNC *func;
+{
+ WORD_LIST *list;
+ size_t slen;
+ int i, saw_quote;
+ char *ret;
+ DECLARE_MBSTATE;
+
+ slen = strlen (string);
+ i = saw_quote = 0;
+ while (string[i])
+ {
+ if (EXP_CHAR (string[i]))
+ break;
+ else if (string[i] == '\'' || string[i] == '\\' || string[i] == '"')
+ saw_quote = 1;
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, i);
+ }
+
+ if (string[i])
+ {
+ list = (*func) (string, quoted);
+ if (list)
+ {
+ ret = string_list (list);
+ dispose_words (list);
+ }
+ else
+ ret = (char *)NULL;
+ }
+ else if (saw_quote && ((quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) == 0))
+ ret = string_quote_removal (string, quoted);
+ else
+ ret = savestring (string);
+
+ return ret;
+}
+
+static inline char *
+expand_string_to_string_internal (string, quoted, func)
+ char *string;
+ int quoted;
+ EXPFUNC *func;
+{
+ WORD_LIST *list;
+ char *ret;
+
+ if (string == 0 || *string == '\0')
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+
+ list = (*func) (string, quoted);
+ if (list)
+ {
+ ret = string_list (list);
+ dispose_words (list);
+ }
+ else
+ ret = (char *)NULL;
+
+ return (ret);
+}
+
+char *
+expand_string_to_string (string, quoted)
+ char *string;
+ int quoted;
+{
+ return (expand_string_to_string_internal (string, quoted, expand_string));
+}
+
+char *
+expand_string_unsplit_to_string (string, quoted)
+ char *string;
+ int quoted;
+{
+ return (expand_string_to_string_internal (string, quoted, expand_string_unsplit));
+}
+
+#if defined (COND_COMMAND)
+/* Just remove backslashes in STRING. Returns a new string. */
+char *
+remove_backslashes (string)
+ char *string;
+{
+ char *r, *ret, *s;
+
+ r = ret = (char *)xmalloc (strlen (string) + 1);
+ for (s = string; s && *s; )
+ {
+ if (*s == '\\')
+ s++;
+ if (*s == 0)
+ break;
+ *r++ = *s++;
+ }
+ *r = '\0';
+ return ret;
+}
+
+/* This needs better error handling. */
+/* Expand W for use as an argument to a unary or binary operator in a
+ [[...]] expression. If SPECIAL is nonzero, this is the rhs argument
+ to the != or == operator, and should be treated as a pattern. In
+ this case, we quote the string specially for the globbing code. The
+ caller is responsible for removing the backslashes if the unquoted
+ words is needed later. */
+char *
+cond_expand_word (w, special)
+ WORD_DESC *w;
+ int special;
+{
+ char *r, *p;
+ WORD_LIST *l;
+
+ if (w->word == 0 || w->word[0] == '\0')
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+
+ if (xstrchr (w->word, '~') && unquoted_member ('~', w->word))
+ {
+ p = bash_tilde_expand (w->word, 0);
+ free (w->word);
+ w->word = p;
+ }
+
+ l = call_expand_word_internal (w, 0, 0, (int *)0, (int *)0);
+ if (l)
+ {
+ if (special == 0)
+ {
+ dequote_list (l);
+ r = string_list (l);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ p = string_list (l);
+ r = quote_string_for_globbing (p, QGLOB_CVTNULL);
+ free (p);
+ }
+ dispose_words (l);
+ }
+ else
+ r = (char *)NULL;
+
+ return r;
+}
+#endif
+
+/* Call expand_word_internal to expand W and handle error returns.
+ A convenience function for functions that don't want to handle
+ any errors or free any memory before aborting. */
+static WORD_LIST *
+call_expand_word_internal (w, q, i, c, e)
+ WORD_DESC *w;
+ int q, i, *c, *e;
+{
+ WORD_LIST *result;
+
+ result = expand_word_internal (w, q, i, c, e);
+ if (result == &expand_word_error || result == &expand_word_fatal)
+ {
+ /* By convention, each time this error is returned, w->word has
+ already been freed (it sometimes may not be in the fatal case,
+ but that doesn't result in a memory leak because we're going
+ to exit in most cases). */
+ w->word = (char *)NULL;
+ last_command_exit_value = EXECUTION_FAILURE;
+ exp_jump_to_top_level ((result == &expand_word_error) ? DISCARD : FORCE_EOF);
+ /* NOTREACHED */
+ }
+ else
+ return (result);
+}
+
+/* Perform parameter expansion, command substitution, and arithmetic
+ expansion on STRING, as if it were a word. Leave the result quoted. */
+static WORD_LIST *
+expand_string_internal (string, quoted)
+ char *string;
+ int quoted;
+{
+ WORD_DESC td;
+ WORD_LIST *tresult;
+
+ if (string == 0 || *string == 0)
+ return ((WORD_LIST *)NULL);
+
+ td.flags = 0;
+ td.word = savestring (string);
+
+ tresult = call_expand_word_internal (&td, quoted, 0, (int *)NULL, (int *)NULL);
+
+ FREE (td.word);
+ return (tresult);
+}
+
+/* Expand STRING by performing parameter expansion, command substitution,
+ and arithmetic expansion. Dequote the resulting WORD_LIST before
+ returning it, but do not perform word splitting. The call to
+ remove_quoted_nulls () is in here because word splitting normally
+ takes care of quote removal. */
+WORD_LIST *
+expand_string_unsplit (string, quoted)
+ char *string;
+ int quoted;
+{
+ WORD_LIST *value;
+
+ if (string == 0 || *string == '\0')
+ return ((WORD_LIST *)NULL);
+
+ expand_no_split_dollar_star = 1;
+ value = expand_string_internal (string, quoted);
+ expand_no_split_dollar_star = 0;
+
+ if (value)
+ {
+ if (value->word)
+ remove_quoted_nulls (value->word->word);
+ dequote_list (value);
+ }
+ return (value);
+}
+
+
+/* Expand one of the PS? prompt strings. This is a sort of combination of
+ expand_string_unsplit and expand_string_internal, but returns the
+ passed string when an error occurs. Might want to trap other calls
+ to jump_to_top_level here so we don't endlessly loop. */
+WORD_LIST *
+expand_prompt_string (string, quoted)
+ char *string;
+ int quoted;
+{
+ WORD_LIST *value;
+ WORD_DESC td;
+
+ if (string == 0 || *string == 0)
+ return ((WORD_LIST *)NULL);
+
+ td.flags = 0;
+ td.word = savestring (string);
+
+ no_longjmp_on_fatal_error = 1;
+ value = expand_word_internal (&td, quoted, 0, (int *)NULL, (int *)NULL);
+ no_longjmp_on_fatal_error = 0;
+
+ if (value == &expand_word_error || value == &expand_word_fatal)
+ {
+ value = make_word_list (make_bare_word (string), (WORD_LIST *)NULL);
+ return value;
+ }
+ FREE (td.word);
+ if (value)
+ {
+ if (value->word)
+ remove_quoted_nulls (value->word->word);
+ dequote_list (value);
+ }
+ return (value);
+}
+
+/* Expand STRING just as if you were expanding a word, but do not dequote
+ the resultant WORD_LIST. This is called only from within this file,
+ and is used to correctly preserve quoted characters when expanding
+ things like ${1+"$@"}. This does parameter expansion, command
+ substitution, arithmetic expansion, and word splitting. */
+static WORD_LIST *
+expand_string_leave_quoted (string, quoted)
+ char *string;
+ int quoted;
+{
+ WORD_LIST *tlist;
+ WORD_LIST *tresult;
+
+ if (string == 0 || *string == '\0')
+ return ((WORD_LIST *)NULL);
+
+ tlist = expand_string_internal (string, quoted);
+
+ if (tlist)
+ {
+ tresult = word_list_split (tlist);
+ dispose_words (tlist);
+ return (tresult);
+ }
+ return ((WORD_LIST *)NULL);
+}
+
+/* This does not perform word splitting or dequote the WORD_LIST
+ it returns. */
+static WORD_LIST *
+expand_string_for_rhs (string, quoted, dollar_at_p, has_dollar_at)
+ char *string;
+ int quoted, *dollar_at_p, *has_dollar_at;
+{
+ WORD_DESC td;
+ WORD_LIST *tresult;
+
+ if (string == 0 || *string == '\0')
+ return (WORD_LIST *)NULL;
+
+ td.flags = 0;
+ td.word = string;
+ tresult = call_expand_word_internal (&td, quoted, 1, dollar_at_p, has_dollar_at);
+ return (tresult);
+}
+
+/* Expand STRING just as if you were expanding a word. This also returns
+ a list of words. Note that filename globbing is *NOT* done for word
+ or string expansion, just when the shell is expanding a command. This
+ does parameter expansion, command substitution, arithmetic expansion,
+ and word splitting. Dequote the resultant WORD_LIST before returning. */
+WORD_LIST *
+expand_string (string, quoted)
+ char *string;
+ int quoted;
+{
+ WORD_LIST *result;
+
+ if (string == 0 || *string == '\0')
+ return ((WORD_LIST *)NULL);
+
+ result = expand_string_leave_quoted (string, quoted);
+ return (result ? dequote_list (result) : result);
+}
+
+/***************************************************
+ * *
+ * Functions to handle quoting chars *
+ * *
+ ***************************************************/
+
+/* Conventions:
+
+ A string with s[0] == CTLNUL && s[1] == 0 is a quoted null string.
+ The parser passes CTLNUL as CTLESC CTLNUL. */
+
+/* Quote escape characters in string s, but no other characters. This is
+ used to protect CTLESC and CTLNUL in variable values from the rest of
+ the word expansion process after the variable is expanded. */
+char *
+quote_escapes (string)
+ char *string;
+{
+ register char *s, *t;
+ size_t slen;
+ char *result, *send;
+ DECLARE_MBSTATE;
+
+ slen = strlen (string);
+ send = string + slen;
+
+ t = result = (char *)xmalloc ((slen * 2) + 1);
+ s = string;
+
+ while (*s)
+ {
+ if (*s == CTLESC || *s == CTLNUL)
+ *t++ = CTLESC;
+ COPY_CHAR_P (t, s, send);
+ }
+ *t = '\0';
+ return (result);
+}
+
+static WORD_LIST *
+list_quote_escapes (list)
+ WORD_LIST *list;
+{
+ register WORD_LIST *w;
+ char *t;
+
+ for (w = list; w; w = w->next)
+ {
+ t = w->word->word;
+ w->word->word = quote_escapes (t);
+ free (t);
+ }
+ return list;
+}
+
+/* Inverse of quote_escapes; remove CTLESC protecting CTLESC or CTLNUL.
+
+ The parser passes us CTLESC as CTLESC CTLESC and CTLNUL as CTLESC CTLNUL.
+ This is necessary to make unquoted CTLESC and CTLNUL characters in the
+ data stream pass through properly.
+
+ We need to remove doubled CTLESC characters inside quoted strings before
+ quoting the entire string, so we do not double the number of CTLESC
+ characters.
+
+ Also used by parts of the pattern substitution code. */
+static char *
+dequote_escapes (string)
+ char *string;
+{
+ register char *s, *t;
+ size_t slen;
+ char *result, *send;
+ DECLARE_MBSTATE;
+
+ if (string == 0)
+ return string;
+
+ slen = strlen (string);
+ send = string + slen;
+
+ t = result = (char *)xmalloc (slen + 1);
+ s = string;
+
+ if (strchr (string, CTLESC) == 0)
+ return (strcpy (result, s));
+
+ while (*s)
+ {
+ if (*s == CTLESC && (s[1] == CTLESC || s[1] == CTLNUL))
+ {
+ s++;
+ if (*s == '\0')
+ break;
+ }
+ COPY_CHAR_P (t, s, send);
+ }
+ *t = '\0';
+ return result;
+}
+
+/* Return a new string with the quoted representation of character C. */
+static char *
+make_quoted_char (c)
+ int c;
+{
+ char *temp;
+
+ temp = (char *)xmalloc (3);
+ if (c == 0)
+ {
+ temp[0] = CTLNUL;
+ temp[1] = '\0';
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ temp[0] = CTLESC;
+ temp[1] = c;
+ temp[2] = '\0';
+ }
+ return (temp);
+}
+
+/* Quote STRING. Return a new string. */
+char *
+quote_string (string)
+ char *string;
+{
+ register char *t;
+ size_t slen;
+ char *result, *send;
+
+ if (*string == 0)
+ {
+ result = (char *)xmalloc (2);
+ result[0] = CTLNUL;
+ result[1] = '\0';
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ DECLARE_MBSTATE;
+
+ slen = strlen (string);
+ send = string + slen;
+
+ result = (char *)xmalloc ((slen * 2) + 1);
+
+ for (t = result; string < send; )
+ {
+ *t++ = CTLESC;
+ COPY_CHAR_P (t, string, send);
+ }
+ *t = '\0';
+ }
+ return (result);
+}
+
+/* De-quoted quoted characters in STRING. */
+char *
+dequote_string (string)
+ char *string;
+{
+ register char *s, *t;
+ size_t slen;
+ char *result, *send;
+ DECLARE_MBSTATE;
+
+ slen = strlen (string);
+
+ t = result = (char *)xmalloc (slen + 1);
+
+ if (QUOTED_NULL (string))
+ {
+ result[0] = '\0';
+ return (result);
+ }
+
+ /* If no character in the string can be quoted, don't bother examining
+ each character. Just return a copy of the string passed to us. */
+ if (strchr (string, CTLESC) == NULL)
+ return (strcpy (result, string));
+
+ send = string + slen;
+ s = string;
+ while (*s)
+ {
+ if (*s == CTLESC)
+ {
+ s++;
+ if (*s == '\0')
+ break;
+ }
+ COPY_CHAR_P (t, s, send);
+ }
+
+ *t = '\0';
+ return (result);
+}
+
+/* Quote the entire WORD_LIST list. */
+static WORD_LIST *
+quote_list (list)
+ WORD_LIST *list;
+{
+ register WORD_LIST *w;
+ char *t;
+
+ for (w = list; w; w = w->next)
+ {
+ t = w->word->word;
+ w->word->word = quote_string (t);
+ free (t);
+ w->word->flags |= W_QUOTED;
+ }
+ return list;
+}
+
+static WORD_LIST *
+dequote_list (list)
+ WORD_LIST *list;
+{
+ register char *s;
+ register WORD_LIST *tlist;
+
+ for (tlist = list; tlist; tlist = tlist->next)
+ {
+ s = dequote_string (tlist->word->word);
+ free (tlist->word->word);
+ tlist->word->word = s;
+ }
+ return list;
+}
+
+/* Remove CTLESC protecting a CTLESC or CTLNUL in place. Return the passed
+ string. */
+static char *
+remove_quoted_escapes (string)
+ char *string;
+{
+ char *t;
+
+ if (string)
+ {
+ t = dequote_escapes (string);
+ strcpy (string, t);
+ free (t);
+ }
+
+ return (string);
+}
+
+/* Perform quoted null character removal on STRING. We don't allow any
+ quoted null characters in the middle or at the ends of strings because
+ of how expand_word_internal works. remove_quoted_nulls () turns
+ STRING into an empty string iff it only consists of a quoted null,
+ and removes all unquoted CTLNUL characters. */
+static char *
+remove_quoted_nulls (string)
+ char *string;
+{
+ register size_t slen;
+ register int i, j, prev_i;
+ DECLARE_MBSTATE;
+
+ if (strchr (string, CTLNUL) == 0) /* XXX */
+ return string; /* XXX */
+
+ slen = strlen (string);
+ i = j = 0;
+
+ while (i < slen)
+ {
+ if (string[i] == CTLESC)
+ {
+ /* Old code had j++, but we cannot assume that i == j at this
+ point -- what if a CTLNUL has already been removed from the
+ string? We don't want to drop the CTLESC or recopy characters
+ that we've already copied down. */
+ i++; string[j++] = CTLESC;
+ if (i == slen)
+ break;
+ }
+ else if (string[i] == CTLNUL)
+ i++;
+
+ prev_i = i;
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, i);
+ if (j < prev_i)
+ {
+ do string[j++] = string[prev_i++]; while (prev_i < i);
+ }
+ else
+ j = i;
+ }
+ string[j] = '\0';
+
+ return (string);
+}
+
+/* Perform quoted null character removal on each element of LIST.
+ This modifies LIST. */
+void
+word_list_remove_quoted_nulls (list)
+ WORD_LIST *list;
+{
+ register WORD_LIST *t;
+
+ for (t = list; t; t = t->next)
+ remove_quoted_nulls (t->word->word);
+}
+
+/* **************************************************************** */
+/* */
+/* Functions for Matching and Removing Patterns */
+/* */
+/* **************************************************************** */
+
+#if defined (HANDLE_MULTIBYTE)
+#if 0 /* Currently unused */
+static unsigned char *
+mb_getcharlens (string, len)
+ char *string;
+ int len;
+{
+ int i, offset, last;
+ unsigned char *ret;
+ char *p;
+ DECLARE_MBSTATE;
+
+ i = offset = 0;
+ last = 0;
+ ret = (unsigned char *)xmalloc (len);
+ memset (ret, 0, len);
+ while (string[last])
+ {
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, len, offset);
+ ret[last] = offset - last;
+ last = offset;
+ }
+ return ret;
+}
+#endif
+#endif
+
+/* Remove the portion of PARAM matched by PATTERN according to OP, where OP
+ can have one of 4 values:
+ RP_LONG_LEFT remove longest matching portion at start of PARAM
+ RP_SHORT_LEFT remove shortest matching portion at start of PARAM
+ RP_LONG_RIGHT remove longest matching portion at end of PARAM
+ RP_SHORT_RIGHT remove shortest matching portion at end of PARAM
+*/
+
+#define RP_LONG_LEFT 1
+#define RP_SHORT_LEFT 2
+#define RP_LONG_RIGHT 3
+#define RP_SHORT_RIGHT 4
+
+static char *
+remove_upattern (param, pattern, op)
+ char *param, *pattern;
+ int op;
+{
+ register int len;
+ register char *end;
+ register char *p, *ret, c;
+
+ len = STRLEN (param);
+ end = param + len;
+
+ switch (op)
+ {
+ case RP_LONG_LEFT: /* remove longest match at start */
+ for (p = end; p >= param; p--)
+ {
+ c = *p; *p = '\0';
+ if (strmatch (pattern, param, FNMATCH_EXTFLAG) != FNM_NOMATCH)
+ {
+ *p = c;
+ return (savestring (p));
+ }
+ *p = c;
+
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case RP_SHORT_LEFT: /* remove shortest match at start */
+ for (p = param; p <= end; p++)
+ {
+ c = *p; *p = '\0';
+ if (strmatch (pattern, param, FNMATCH_EXTFLAG) != FNM_NOMATCH)
+ {
+ *p = c;
+ return (savestring (p));
+ }
+ *p = c;
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case RP_LONG_RIGHT: /* remove longest match at end */
+ for (p = param; p <= end; p++)
+ {
+ if (strmatch (pattern, p, FNMATCH_EXTFLAG) != FNM_NOMATCH)
+ {
+ c = *p; *p = '\0';
+ ret = savestring (param);
+ *p = c;
+ return (ret);
+ }
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case RP_SHORT_RIGHT: /* remove shortest match at end */
+ for (p = end; p >= param; p--)
+ {
+ if (strmatch (pattern, p, FNMATCH_EXTFLAG) != FNM_NOMATCH)
+ {
+ c = *p; *p = '\0';
+ ret = savestring (param);
+ *p = c;
+ return (ret);
+ }
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+
+ return (savestring (param)); /* no match, return original string */
+}
+
+#if defined (HANDLE_MULTIBYTE)
+
+#if !defined (HAVE_WCSDUP)
+static wchar_t *
+wcsdup (ws)
+ wchar_t *ws;
+{
+ wchar_t *ret;
+ size_t len;
+
+ len = wcslen (ws);
+ ret = xmalloc ((len + 1) * sizeof (wchar_t));
+ if (ret == 0)
+ return ret;
+ return (wcscpy (ret, ws));
+}
+#endif /* !HAVE_WCSDUP */
+
+static wchar_t *
+remove_wpattern (wparam, wstrlen, wpattern, op)
+ wchar_t *wparam;
+ size_t wstrlen;
+ wchar_t *wpattern;
+ int op;
+{
+ wchar_t wc;
+ int n, n1;
+ wchar_t *ret;
+
+ switch (op)
+ {
+ case RP_LONG_LEFT: /* remove longest match at start */
+ for (n = wstrlen; n >= 0; n--)
+ {
+ wc = wparam[n]; wparam[n] = L'\0';
+ if (wcsmatch (wpattern, wparam, FNMATCH_EXTFLAG) != FNM_NOMATCH)
+ {
+ wparam[n] = wc;
+ return (wcsdup (wparam + n));
+ }
+ wparam[n] = wc;
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case RP_SHORT_LEFT: /* remove shortest match at start */
+ for (n = 0; n <= wstrlen; n++)
+ {
+ wc = wparam[n]; wparam[n] = L'\0';
+ if (wcsmatch (wpattern, wparam, FNMATCH_EXTFLAG) != FNM_NOMATCH)
+ {
+ wparam[n] = wc;
+ return (wcsdup (wparam + n));
+ }
+ wparam[n] = wc;
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case RP_LONG_RIGHT: /* remove longest match at end */
+ for (n = 0; n <= wstrlen; n++)
+ {
+ if (wcsmatch (wpattern, wparam + n, FNMATCH_EXTFLAG) != FNM_NOMATCH)
+ {
+ wc = wparam[n]; wparam[n] = L'\0';
+ ret = wcsdup (wparam);
+ wparam[n] = wc;
+ return (ret);
+ }
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case RP_SHORT_RIGHT: /* remove shortest match at end */
+ for (n = wstrlen; n >= 0; n--)
+ {
+ if (wcsmatch (wpattern, wparam + n, FNMATCH_EXTFLAG) != FNM_NOMATCH)
+ {
+ wc = wparam[n]; wparam[n] = L'\0';
+ ret = wcsdup (wparam);
+ wparam[n] = wc;
+ return (ret);
+ }
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+
+ return (wcsdup (wparam)); /* no match, return original string */
+}
+#endif /* HANDLE_MULTIBYTE */
+
+static char *
+remove_pattern (param, pattern, op)
+ char *param, *pattern;
+ int op;
+{
+ if (param == NULL)
+ return (param);
+ if (*param == '\0' || pattern == NULL || *pattern == '\0') /* minor optimization */
+ return (savestring (param));
+
+#if defined (HANDLE_MULTIBYTE)
+ if (MB_CUR_MAX > 1)
+ {
+ wchar_t *ret, *oret;
+ size_t n;
+ wchar_t *wparam, *wpattern;
+ mbstate_t ps;
+ char *xret;
+
+ n = xdupmbstowcs (&wpattern, NULL, pattern);
+ if (n == (size_t)-1)
+ return (remove_upattern (param, pattern, op));
+ n = xdupmbstowcs (&wparam, NULL, param);
+ if (n == (size_t)-1)
+ {
+ free (wpattern);
+ return (remove_upattern (param, pattern, op));
+ }
+ oret = ret = remove_wpattern (wparam, n, wpattern, op);
+
+ free (wparam);
+ free (wpattern);
+
+ n = strlen (param);
+ xret = xmalloc (n + 1);
+ memset (&ps, '\0', sizeof (mbstate_t));
+ n = wcsrtombs (xret, (const wchar_t **)&ret, n, &ps);
+ xret[n] = '\0'; /* just to make sure */
+ free (oret);
+ return xret;
+ }
+ else
+#endif
+ return (remove_upattern (param, pattern, op));
+}
+
+/* Return 1 of the first character of STRING could match the first
+ character of pattern PAT. Used to avoid n2 calls to strmatch(). */
+static int
+match_pattern_char (pat, string)
+ char *pat, *string;
+{
+ char c;
+
+ if (*string == 0)
+ return (0);
+
+ switch (c = *pat++)
+ {
+ default:
+ return (*string == c);
+ case '\\':
+ return (*string == *pat);
+ case '?':
+ return (*pat == LPAREN ? 1 : (*string != '\0'));
+ case '*':
+ return (1);
+ case '+':
+ case '!':
+ case '@':
+ return (*pat == LPAREN ? 1 : (*string == c));
+ case '[':
+ return (*string != '\0');
+ }
+}
+
+/* Match PAT anywhere in STRING and return the match boundaries.
+ This returns 1 in case of a successful match, 0 otherwise. SP
+ and EP are pointers into the string where the match begins and
+ ends, respectively. MTYPE controls what kind of match is attempted.
+ MATCH_BEG and MATCH_END anchor the match at the beginning and end
+ of the string, respectively. The longest match is returned. */
+static int
+match_upattern (string, pat, mtype, sp, ep)
+ char *string, *pat;
+ int mtype;
+ char **sp, **ep;
+{
+ int c, len;
+ register char *p, *p1;
+ char *end;
+
+ len = STRLEN (string);
+ end = string + len;
+
+ switch (mtype)
+ {
+ case MATCH_ANY:
+ for (p = string; p <= end; p++)
+ {
+ if (match_pattern_char (pat, p))
+ {
+ for (p1 = end; p1 >= p; p1--)
+ {
+ c = *p1; *p1 = '\0';
+ if (strmatch (pat, p, FNMATCH_EXTFLAG) == 0)
+ {
+ *p1 = c;
+ *sp = p;
+ *ep = p1;
+ return 1;
+ }
+ *p1 = c;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ return (0);
+
+ case MATCH_BEG:
+ if (match_pattern_char (pat, string) == 0)
+ return (0);
+
+ for (p = end; p >= string; p--)
+ {
+ c = *p; *p = '\0';
+ if (strmatch (pat, string, FNMATCH_EXTFLAG) == 0)
+ {
+ *p = c;
+ *sp = string;
+ *ep = p;
+ return 1;
+ }
+ *p = c;
+ }
+
+ return (0);
+
+ case MATCH_END:
+ for (p = string; p <= end; p++)
+ {
+ if (strmatch (pat, p, FNMATCH_EXTFLAG) == 0)
+ {
+ *sp = p;
+ *ep = end;
+ return 1;
+ }
+
+ }
+
+ return (0);
+ }
+
+ return (0);
+}
+
+#if defined (HANDLE_MULTIBYTE)
+/* Return 1 of the first character of WSTRING could match the first
+ character of pattern WPAT. Wide character version. */
+static int
+match_pattern_wchar (wpat, wstring)
+ wchar_t *wpat, *wstring;
+{
+ wchar_t wc;
+
+ if (*wstring == 0)
+ return (0);
+
+ switch (wc = *wpat++)
+ {
+ default:
+ return (*wstring == wc);
+ case L'\\':
+ return (*wstring == *wpat);
+ case L'?':
+ return (*wpat == LPAREN ? 1 : (*wstring != L'\0'));
+ case L'*':
+ return (1);
+ case L'+':
+ case L'!':
+ case L'@':
+ return (*wpat == LPAREN ? 1 : (*wstring == wc));
+ case L'[':
+ return (*wstring != L'\0');
+ }
+}
+
+/* Match WPAT anywhere in WSTRING and return the match boundaries.
+ This returns 1 in case of a successful match, 0 otherwise. Wide
+ character version. */
+static int
+match_wpattern (wstring, indices, wstrlen, wpat, mtype, sp, ep)
+ wchar_t *wstring;
+ char **indices;
+ size_t wstrlen;
+ wchar_t *wpat;
+ int mtype;
+ char **sp, **ep;
+{
+ wchar_t wc;
+ int len;
+#if 0
+ size_t n, n1; /* Apple's gcc seems to miscompile this badly */
+#else
+ int n, n1;
+#endif
+
+ switch (mtype)
+ {
+ case MATCH_ANY:
+ for (n = 0; n <= wstrlen; n++)
+ {
+ if (match_pattern_wchar (wpat, wstring + n))
+ {
+ for (n1 = wstrlen; n1 >= n; n1--)
+ {
+ wc = wstring[n1]; wstring[n1] = L'\0';
+ if (wcsmatch (wpat, wstring + n, FNMATCH_EXTFLAG) == 0)
+ {
+ wstring[n1] = wc;
+ *sp = indices[n];
+ *ep = indices[n1];
+ return 1;
+ }
+ wstring[n1] = wc;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ return (0);
+
+ case MATCH_BEG:
+ if (match_pattern_wchar (wpat, wstring) == 0)
+ return (0);
+
+ for (n = wstrlen; n >= 0; n--)
+ {
+ wc = wstring[n]; wstring[n] = L'\0';
+ if (wcsmatch (wpat, wstring, FNMATCH_EXTFLAG) == 0)
+ {
+ wstring[n] = wc;
+ *sp = indices[0];
+ *ep = indices[n];
+ return 1;
+ }
+ wstring[n] = wc;
+ }
+
+ return (0);
+
+ case MATCH_END:
+ for (n = 0; n <= wstrlen; n++)
+ {
+ if (wcsmatch (wpat, wstring + n, FNMATCH_EXTFLAG) == 0)
+ {
+ *sp = indices[n];
+ *ep = indices[wstrlen];
+ return 1;
+ }
+ }
+
+ return (0);
+ }
+
+ return (0);
+}
+#endif /* HANDLE_MULTIBYTE */
+
+static int
+match_pattern (string, pat, mtype, sp, ep)
+ char *string, *pat;
+ int mtype;
+ char **sp, **ep;
+{
+#if defined (HANDLE_MULTIBYTE)
+ int ret;
+ size_t n;
+ wchar_t *wstring, *wpat;
+ char **indices;
+#endif
+
+ if (string == 0 || *string == 0 || pat == 0 || *pat == 0)
+ return (0);
+
+#if defined (HANDLE_MULTIBYTE)
+ if (MB_CUR_MAX > 1)
+ {
+ n = xdupmbstowcs (&wpat, NULL, pat);
+ if (n == (size_t)-1)
+ return (match_upattern (string, pat, mtype, sp, ep));
+ n = xdupmbstowcs (&wstring, &indices, string);
+ if (n == (size_t)-1)
+ {
+ free (wpat);
+ return (match_upattern (string, pat, mtype, sp, ep));
+ }
+ ret = match_wpattern (wstring, indices, n, wpat, mtype, sp, ep);
+
+ free (wpat);
+ free (wstring);
+ free (indices);
+
+ return (ret);
+ }
+ else
+#endif
+ return (match_upattern (string, pat, mtype, sp, ep));
+}
+
+static int
+getpatspec (c, value)
+ int c;
+ char *value;
+{
+ if (c == '#')
+ return ((*value == '#') ? RP_LONG_LEFT : RP_SHORT_LEFT);
+ else /* c == '%' */
+ return ((*value == '%') ? RP_LONG_RIGHT : RP_SHORT_RIGHT);
+}
+
+/* Posix.2 says that the WORD should be run through tilde expansion,
+ parameter expansion, command substitution and arithmetic expansion.
+ This leaves the result quoted, so quote_string_for_globbing () has
+ to be called to fix it up for strmatch (). If QUOTED is non-zero,
+ it means that the entire expression was enclosed in double quotes.
+ This means that quoting characters in the pattern do not make any
+ special pattern characters quoted. For example, the `*' in the
+ following retains its special meaning: "${foo#'*'}". */
+static char *
+getpattern (value, quoted, expandpat)
+ char *value;
+ int quoted, expandpat;
+{
+ char *pat, *tword;
+ WORD_LIST *l;
+ int i;
+
+ tword = xstrchr (value, '~') ? bash_tilde_expand (value, 0) : savestring (value);
+
+ /* There is a problem here: how to handle single or double quotes in the
+ pattern string when the whole expression is between double quotes?
+ POSIX.2 says that enclosing double quotes do not cause the pattern to
+ be quoted, but does that leave us a problem with @ and array[@] and their
+ expansions inside a pattern? */
+#if 0
+ if (expandpat && (quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) && *tword)
+ {
+ i = 0;
+ pat = string_extract_double_quoted (tword, &i, 1);
+ free (tword);
+ tword = pat;
+ }
+#endif
+
+ /* expand_string_for_rhs () leaves WORD quoted and does not perform
+ word splitting. */
+ l = *tword ? expand_string_for_rhs (tword,
+ (quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) ? Q_PATQUOTE : quoted,
+ (int *)NULL, (int *)NULL)
+ : (WORD_LIST *)0;
+ free (tword);
+ pat = string_list (l);
+ dispose_words (l);
+ if (pat)
+ {
+ tword = quote_string_for_globbing (pat, QGLOB_CVTNULL);
+ free (pat);
+ pat = tword;
+ }
+ return (pat);
+}
+
+#if 0
+/* Handle removing a pattern from a string as a result of ${name%[%]value}
+ or ${name#[#]value}. */
+static char *
+variable_remove_pattern (value, pattern, patspec, quoted)
+ char *value, *pattern;
+ int patspec, quoted;
+{
+ char *tword;
+
+ tword = remove_pattern (value, pattern, patspec);
+
+ return (tword);
+}
+#endif
+
+static char *
+list_remove_pattern (list, pattern, patspec, itype, quoted)
+ WORD_LIST *list;
+ char *pattern;
+ int patspec, itype, quoted;
+{
+ WORD_LIST *new, *l;
+ WORD_DESC *w;
+ char *tword;
+
+ for (new = (WORD_LIST *)NULL, l = list; l; l = l->next)
+ {
+ tword = remove_pattern (l->word->word, pattern, patspec);
+ w = make_bare_word (tword);
+ FREE (tword);
+ new = make_word_list (w, new);
+ }
+
+ l = REVERSE_LIST (new, WORD_LIST *);
+ if (itype == '*')
+#if 0
+ tword = (quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) ? string_list_dollar_star (l) : string_list (l);
+#else
+ tword = (quoted & Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES) ? string_list_dollar_star (l) : string_list (l);
+#endif
+ else
+ tword = string_list ((quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) ? quote_list (l) : l);
+
+ dispose_words (l);
+ return (tword);
+}
+
+static char *
+parameter_list_remove_pattern (itype, pattern, patspec, quoted)
+ int itype;
+ char *pattern;
+ int patspec, quoted;
+{
+ char *ret;
+ WORD_LIST *list;
+
+ list = list_rest_of_args ();
+ if (list == 0)
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+ ret = list_remove_pattern (list, pattern, patspec, itype, quoted);
+ dispose_words (list);
+ return (ret);
+}
+
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+static char *
+array_remove_pattern (a, pattern, patspec, varname, quoted)
+ ARRAY *a;
+ char *pattern;
+ int patspec;
+ char *varname; /* so we can figure out how it's indexed */
+ int quoted;
+{
+ int itype;
+ char *ret;
+ WORD_LIST *list;
+ SHELL_VAR *v;
+
+ /* compute itype from varname here */
+ v = array_variable_part (varname, &ret, 0);
+ itype = ret[0];
+
+ list = array_to_word_list (a);
+ if (list == 0)
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+ ret = list_remove_pattern (list, pattern, patspec, itype, quoted);
+ dispose_words (list);
+
+ return ret;
+}
+#endif /* ARRAY_VARS */
+
+static char *
+parameter_brace_remove_pattern (varname, value, patstr, rtype, quoted)
+ char *varname, *value, *patstr;
+ int rtype, quoted;
+{
+ int vtype, patspec, starsub;
+ char *temp1, *val, *pattern;
+ SHELL_VAR *v;
+
+ if (value == 0)
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+
+ this_command_name = varname;
+
+ vtype = get_var_and_type (varname, value, quoted, &v, &val);
+ if (vtype == -1)
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+
+ starsub = vtype & VT_STARSUB;
+ vtype &= ~VT_STARSUB;
+
+ patspec = getpatspec (rtype, patstr);
+ if (patspec == RP_LONG_LEFT || patspec == RP_LONG_RIGHT)
+ patstr++;
+
+ pattern = getpattern (patstr, quoted, 1);
+
+ temp1 = (char *)NULL; /* shut up gcc */
+ switch (vtype)
+ {
+ case VT_VARIABLE:
+ case VT_ARRAYMEMBER:
+ temp1 = remove_pattern (val, pattern, patspec);
+ if (vtype == VT_VARIABLE)
+ FREE (val);
+ if (temp1)
+ {
+ val = quote_escapes (temp1);
+ free (temp1);
+ temp1 = val;
+ }
+ break;
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+ case VT_ARRAYVAR:
+ temp1 = array_remove_pattern (array_cell (v), pattern, patspec, varname, quoted);
+ if (temp1 && ((quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) == 0))
+ {
+ val = quote_escapes (temp1);
+ free (temp1);
+ temp1 = val;
+ }
+ break;
+#endif
+ case VT_POSPARMS:
+ temp1 = parameter_list_remove_pattern (varname[0], pattern, patspec, quoted);
+ if (temp1 && ((quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) == 0))
+ {
+ val = quote_escapes (temp1);
+ free (temp1);
+ temp1 = val;
+ }
+ break;
+ }
+
+ FREE (pattern);
+ return temp1;
+}
+
+/*******************************************
+ * *
+ * Functions to expand WORD_DESCs *
+ * *
+ *******************************************/
+
+/* Expand WORD, performing word splitting on the result. This does
+ parameter expansion, command substitution, arithmetic expansion,
+ word splitting, and quote removal. */
+
+WORD_LIST *
+expand_word (word, quoted)
+ WORD_DESC *word;
+ int quoted;
+{
+ WORD_LIST *result, *tresult;
+
+ tresult = call_expand_word_internal (word, quoted, 0, (int *)NULL, (int *)NULL);
+ result = word_list_split (tresult);
+ dispose_words (tresult);
+ return (result ? dequote_list (result) : result);
+}
+
+/* Expand WORD, but do not perform word splitting on the result. This
+ does parameter expansion, command substitution, arithmetic expansion,
+ and quote removal. */
+WORD_LIST *
+expand_word_unsplit (word, quoted)
+ WORD_DESC *word;
+ int quoted;
+{
+ WORD_LIST *result;
+
+ expand_no_split_dollar_star = 1;
+ result = call_expand_word_internal (word, quoted, 0, (int *)NULL, (int *)NULL);
+ expand_no_split_dollar_star = 0;
+
+ return (result ? dequote_list (result) : result);
+}
+
+/* Perform shell expansions on WORD, but do not perform word splitting or
+ quote removal on the result. */
+WORD_LIST *
+expand_word_leave_quoted (word, quoted)
+ WORD_DESC *word;
+ int quoted;
+{
+ return (call_expand_word_internal (word, quoted, 0, (int *)NULL, (int *)NULL));
+}
+
+#if defined (PROCESS_SUBSTITUTION)
+
+/*****************************************************************/
+/* */
+/* Hacking Process Substitution */
+/* */
+/*****************************************************************/
+
+#if !defined (HAVE_DEV_FD)
+/* Named pipes must be removed explicitly with `unlink'. This keeps a list
+ of FIFOs the shell has open. unlink_fifo_list will walk the list and
+ unlink all of them. add_fifo_list adds the name of an open FIFO to the
+ list. NFIFO is a count of the number of FIFOs in the list. */
+#define FIFO_INCR 20
+
+struct temp_fifo {
+ char *file;
+ pid_t proc;
+};
+
+static struct temp_fifo *fifo_list = (struct temp_fifo *)NULL;
+static int nfifo;
+static int fifo_list_size;
+
+static void
+add_fifo_list (pathname)
+ char *pathname;
+{
+ if (nfifo >= fifo_list_size - 1)
+ {
+ fifo_list_size += FIFO_INCR;
+ fifo_list = (struct temp_fifo *)xrealloc (fifo_list,
+ fifo_list_size * sizeof (struct temp_fifo));
+ }
+
+ fifo_list[nfifo].file = savestring (pathname);
+ nfifo++;
+}
+
+void
+unlink_fifo_list ()
+{
+ int saved, i, j;
+
+ if (nfifo == 0)
+ return;
+
+ for (i = saved = 0; i < nfifo; i++)
+ {
+ if ((fifo_list[i].proc == -1) || (kill(fifo_list[i].proc, 0) == -1))
+ {
+ unlink (fifo_list[i].file);
+ free (fifo_list[i].file);
+ fifo_list[i].file = (char *)NULL;
+ fifo_list[i].proc = -1;
+ }
+ else
+ saved++;
+ }
+
+ /* If we didn't remove some of the FIFOs, compact the list. */
+ if (saved)
+ {
+ for (i = j = 0; i < nfifo; i++)
+ if (fifo_list[i].file)
+ {
+ fifo_list[j].file = fifo_list[i].file;
+ fifo_list[j].proc = fifo_list[i].proc;
+ j++;
+ }
+ nfifo = j;
+ }
+ else
+ nfifo = 0;
+}
+
+static char *
+make_named_pipe ()
+{
+ char *tname;
+
+ tname = sh_mktmpname ("sh-np", MT_USERANDOM);
+ if (mkfifo (tname, 0600) < 0)
+ {
+ free (tname);
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+ }
+
+ add_fifo_list (tname);
+ return (tname);
+}
+
+#else /* HAVE_DEV_FD */
+
+/* DEV_FD_LIST is a bitmap of file descriptors attached to pipes the shell
+ has open to children. NFDS is a count of the number of bits currently
+ set in DEV_FD_LIST. TOTFDS is a count of the highest possible number
+ of open files. */
+static char *dev_fd_list = (char *)NULL;
+static int nfds;
+static int totfds; /* The highest possible number of open files. */
+
+static void
+add_fifo_list (fd)
+ int fd;
+{
+ if (!dev_fd_list || fd >= totfds)
+ {
+ int ofds;
+
+ ofds = totfds;
+ totfds = getdtablesize ();
+ if (totfds < 0 || totfds > 256)
+ totfds = 256;
+ if (fd > totfds)
+ totfds = fd + 2;
+
+ dev_fd_list = (char *)xrealloc (dev_fd_list, totfds);
+ memset (dev_fd_list + ofds, '\0', totfds - ofds);
+ }
+
+ dev_fd_list[fd] = 1;
+ nfds++;
+}
+
+void
+unlink_fifo_list ()
+{
+ register int i;
+
+ if (nfds == 0)
+ return;
+
+ for (i = 0; nfds && i < totfds; i++)
+ if (dev_fd_list[i])
+ {
+ close (i);
+ dev_fd_list[i] = 0;
+ nfds--;
+ }
+
+ nfds = 0;
+}
+
+#if defined (NOTDEF)
+print_dev_fd_list ()
+{
+ register int i;
+
+ fprintf (stderr, "pid %ld: dev_fd_list:", (long)getpid ());
+ fflush (stderr);
+
+ for (i = 0; i < totfds; i++)
+ {
+ if (dev_fd_list[i])
+ fprintf (stderr, " %d", i);
+ }
+ fprintf (stderr, "\n");
+}
+#endif /* NOTDEF */
+
+static char *
+make_dev_fd_filename (fd)
+ int fd;
+{
+ char *ret, intbuf[INT_STRLEN_BOUND (int) + 1], *p;
+
+ ret = (char *)xmalloc (sizeof (DEV_FD_PREFIX) + 4);
+
+ strcpy (ret, DEV_FD_PREFIX);
+ p = inttostr (fd, intbuf, sizeof (intbuf));
+ strcpy (ret + sizeof (DEV_FD_PREFIX) - 1, p);
+
+ add_fifo_list (fd);
+ return (ret);
+}
+
+#endif /* HAVE_DEV_FD */
+
+/* Return a filename that will open a connection to the process defined by
+ executing STRING. HAVE_DEV_FD, if defined, means open a pipe and return
+ a filename in /dev/fd corresponding to a descriptor that is one of the
+ ends of the pipe. If not defined, we use named pipes on systems that have
+ them. Systems without /dev/fd and named pipes are out of luck.
+
+ OPEN_FOR_READ_IN_CHILD, if 1, means open the named pipe for reading or
+ use the read end of the pipe and dup that file descriptor to fd 0 in
+ the child. If OPEN_FOR_READ_IN_CHILD is 0, we open the named pipe for
+ writing or use the write end of the pipe in the child, and dup that
+ file descriptor to fd 1 in the child. The parent does the opposite. */
+
+static char *
+process_substitute (string, open_for_read_in_child)
+ char *string;
+ int open_for_read_in_child;
+{
+ char *pathname;
+ int fd, result;
+ pid_t old_pid, pid;
+#if defined (HAVE_DEV_FD)
+ int parent_pipe_fd, child_pipe_fd;
+ int fildes[2];
+#endif /* HAVE_DEV_FD */
+#if defined (JOB_CONTROL)
+ pid_t old_pipeline_pgrp;
+#endif
+
+ if (!string || !*string || wordexp_only)
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+
+#if !defined (HAVE_DEV_FD)
+ pathname = make_named_pipe ();
+#else /* HAVE_DEV_FD */
+ if (pipe (fildes) < 0)
+ {
+ sys_error (_("cannot make pipe for process substitution"));
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+ }
+ /* If OPEN_FOR_READ_IN_CHILD == 1, we want to use the write end of
+ the pipe in the parent, otherwise the read end. */
+ parent_pipe_fd = fildes[open_for_read_in_child];
+ child_pipe_fd = fildes[1 - open_for_read_in_child];
+ /* Move the parent end of the pipe to some high file descriptor, to
+ avoid clashes with FDs used by the script. */
+ parent_pipe_fd = move_to_high_fd (parent_pipe_fd, 1, 64);
+
+ pathname = make_dev_fd_filename (parent_pipe_fd);
+#endif /* HAVE_DEV_FD */
+
+ if (!pathname)
+ {
+ sys_error (_("cannot make pipe for process substitution"));
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+ }
+
+ old_pid = last_made_pid;
+
+#if defined (JOB_CONTROL)
+ old_pipeline_pgrp = pipeline_pgrp;
+ pipeline_pgrp = shell_pgrp;
+ save_pipeline (1);
+#endif /* JOB_CONTROL */
+
+ pid = make_child ((char *)NULL, 1);
+ if (pid == 0)
+ {
+ reset_terminating_signals (); /* XXX */
+ free_pushed_string_input ();
+ /* Cancel traps, in trap.c. */
+ restore_original_signals ();
+ setup_async_signals ();
+ subshell_environment |= SUBSHELL_COMSUB;
+ }
+
+#if defined (JOB_CONTROL)
+ set_sigchld_handler ();
+ stop_making_children ();
+ pipeline_pgrp = old_pipeline_pgrp;
+#endif /* JOB_CONTROL */
+
+ if (pid < 0)
+ {
+ sys_error (_("cannot make child for process substitution"));
+ free (pathname);
+#if defined (HAVE_DEV_FD)
+ close (parent_pipe_fd);
+ close (child_pipe_fd);
+#endif /* HAVE_DEV_FD */
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+ }
+
+ if (pid > 0)
+ {
+#if defined (JOB_CONTROL)
+ restore_pipeline (1);
+#endif
+
+#if !defined (HAVE_DEV_FD)
+ fifo_list[nfifo-1].proc = pid;
+#endif
+
+ last_made_pid = old_pid;
+
+#if defined (JOB_CONTROL) && defined (PGRP_PIPE)
+ close_pgrp_pipe ();
+#endif /* JOB_CONTROL && PGRP_PIPE */
+
+#if defined (HAVE_DEV_FD)
+ close (child_pipe_fd);
+#endif /* HAVE_DEV_FD */
+
+ return (pathname);
+ }
+
+ set_sigint_handler ();
+
+#if defined (JOB_CONTROL)
+ set_job_control (0);
+#endif /* JOB_CONTROL */
+
+#if !defined (HAVE_DEV_FD)
+ /* Open the named pipe in the child. */
+ fd = open (pathname, open_for_read_in_child ? O_RDONLY|O_NONBLOCK : O_WRONLY);
+ if (fd < 0)
+ {
+ /* Two separate strings for ease of translation. */
+ if (open_for_read_in_child)
+ sys_error (_("cannot open named pipe %s for reading"), pathname);
+ else
+ sys_error (_("cannot open named pipe %s for writing"), pathname);
+
+ exit (127);
+ }
+ if (open_for_read_in_child)
+ {
+ if (sh_unset_nodelay_mode (fd) < 0)
+ {
+ sys_error (_("cannout reset nodelay mode for fd %d"), fd);
+ exit (127);
+ }
+ }
+#else /* HAVE_DEV_FD */
+ fd = child_pipe_fd;
+#endif /* HAVE_DEV_FD */
+
+ if (dup2 (fd, open_for_read_in_child ? 0 : 1) < 0)
+ {
+ sys_error (_("cannot duplicate named pipe %s as fd %d"), pathname,
+ open_for_read_in_child ? 0 : 1);
+ exit (127);
+ }
+
+ if (fd != (open_for_read_in_child ? 0 : 1))
+ close (fd);
+
+ /* Need to close any files that this process has open to pipes inherited
+ from its parent. */
+ if (current_fds_to_close)
+ {
+ close_fd_bitmap (current_fds_to_close);
+ current_fds_to_close = (struct fd_bitmap *)NULL;
+ }
+
+#if defined (HAVE_DEV_FD)
+ /* Make sure we close the parent's end of the pipe and clear the slot
+ in the fd list so it is not closed later, if reallocated by, for
+ instance, pipe(2). */
+ close (parent_pipe_fd);
+ dev_fd_list[parent_pipe_fd] = 0;
+#endif /* HAVE_DEV_FD */
+
+ result = parse_and_execute (string, "process substitution", (SEVAL_NONINT|SEVAL_NOHIST));
+
+#if !defined (HAVE_DEV_FD)
+ /* Make sure we close the named pipe in the child before we exit. */
+ close (open_for_read_in_child ? 0 : 1);
+#endif /* !HAVE_DEV_FD */
+
+ exit (result);
+ /*NOTREACHED*/
+}
+#endif /* PROCESS_SUBSTITUTION */
+
+/***********************************/
+/* */
+/* Command Substitution */
+/* */
+/***********************************/
+
+static char *
+read_comsub (fd, quoted)
+ int fd, quoted;
+{
+ char *istring, buf[128], *bufp;
+ int istring_index, istring_size, c;
+ ssize_t bufn;
+
+ istring = (char *)NULL;
+ istring_index = istring_size = bufn = 0;
+
+#ifdef __CYGWIN__
+ setmode (fd, O_TEXT); /* we don't want CR/LF, we want Unix-style */
+#endif
+
+ /* Read the output of the command through the pipe. */
+ while (1)
+ {
+ if (fd < 0)
+ break;
+ if (--bufn <= 0)
+ {
+ bufn = zread (fd, buf, sizeof (buf));
+ if (bufn <= 0)
+ break;
+ bufp = buf;
+ }
+ c = *bufp++;
+
+ if (c == 0)
+ {
+#if 0
+ internal_warning ("read_comsub: ignored null byte in input");
+#endif
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /* Add the character to ISTRING, possibly after resizing it. */
+ RESIZE_MALLOCED_BUFFER (istring, istring_index, 2, istring_size, DEFAULT_ARRAY_SIZE);
+
+ if ((quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) || c == CTLESC || c == CTLNUL)
+ istring[istring_index++] = CTLESC;
+
+ istring[istring_index++] = c;
+
+#if 0
+#if defined (__CYGWIN__)
+ if (c == '\n' && istring_index > 1 && istring[istring_index - 2] == '\r')
+ {
+ istring_index--;
+ istring[istring_index - 1] = '\n';
+ }
+#endif
+#endif
+ }
+
+ if (istring)
+ istring[istring_index] = '\0';
+
+ /* If we read no output, just return now and save ourselves some
+ trouble. */
+ if (istring_index == 0)
+ {
+ FREE (istring);
+ return (char *)NULL;
+ }
+
+ /* Strip trailing newlines from the output of the command. */
+ if (quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES))
+ {
+ while (istring_index > 0)
+ {
+ if (istring[istring_index - 1] == '\n')
+ {
+ --istring_index;
+
+ /* If the newline was quoted, remove the quoting char. */
+ if (istring[istring_index - 1] == CTLESC)
+ --istring_index;
+ }
+ else
+ break;
+ }
+ istring[istring_index] = '\0';
+ }
+ else
+ strip_trailing (istring, istring_index - 1, 1);
+
+ return istring;
+}
+
+/* Perform command substitution on STRING. This returns a string,
+ possibly quoted. */
+char *
+command_substitute (string, quoted)
+ char *string;
+ int quoted;
+{
+ pid_t pid, old_pid, old_pipeline_pgrp;
+ char *istring;
+ int result, fildes[2], function_value, pflags, rc;
+
+ istring = (char *)NULL;
+
+ /* Don't fork () if there is no need to. In the case of no command to
+ run, just return NULL. */
+ if (!string || !*string || (string[0] == '\n' && !string[1]))
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+
+ if (wordexp_only && read_but_dont_execute)
+ {
+ last_command_exit_value = 125;
+ jump_to_top_level (EXITPROG);
+ }
+
+ /* We're making the assumption here that the command substitution will
+ eventually run a command from the file system. Since we'll run
+ maybe_make_export_env in this subshell before executing that command,
+ the parent shell and any other shells it starts will have to remake
+ the environment. If we make it before we fork, other shells won't
+ have to. Don't bother if we have any temporary variable assignments,
+ though, because the export environment will be remade after this
+ command completes anyway, but do it if all the words to be expanded
+ are variable assignments. */
+ if (subst_assign_varlist == 0 || garglist == 0)
+ maybe_make_export_env (); /* XXX */
+
+ /* Flags to pass to parse_and_execute() */
+ pflags = interactive ? SEVAL_RESETLINE : 0;
+
+ /* Pipe the output of executing STRING into the current shell. */
+ if (pipe (fildes) < 0)
+ {
+ sys_error (_("cannot make pipe for command substitution"));
+ goto error_exit;
+ }
+
+ old_pid = last_made_pid;
+#if defined (JOB_CONTROL)
+ old_pipeline_pgrp = pipeline_pgrp;
+ /* Don't reset the pipeline pgrp if we're already a subshell in a pipeline. */
+ if ((subshell_environment & SUBSHELL_PIPE) == 0)
+ pipeline_pgrp = shell_pgrp;
+ cleanup_the_pipeline ();
+#endif
+
+ pid = make_child ((char *)NULL, 0);
+ if (pid == 0)
+ /* Reset the signal handlers in the child, but don't free the
+ trap strings. */
+ reset_signal_handlers ();
+
+#if defined (JOB_CONTROL)
+ set_sigchld_handler ();
+ stop_making_children ();
+ pipeline_pgrp = old_pipeline_pgrp;
+#else
+ stop_making_children ();
+#endif /* JOB_CONTROL */
+
+ if (pid < 0)
+ {
+ sys_error (_("cannot make child for command substitution"));
+ error_exit:
+
+ FREE (istring);
+ close (fildes[0]);
+ close (fildes[1]);
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+ }
+
+ if (pid == 0)
+ {
+ set_sigint_handler (); /* XXX */
+
+ free_pushed_string_input ();
+
+ if (dup2 (fildes[1], 1) < 0)
+ {
+ sys_error (_("command_substitute: cannot duplicate pipe as fd 1"));
+ exit (EXECUTION_FAILURE);
+ }
+
+ /* If standard output is closed in the parent shell
+ (such as after `exec >&-'), file descriptor 1 will be
+ the lowest available file descriptor, and end up in
+ fildes[0]. This can happen for stdin and stderr as well,
+ but stdout is more important -- it will cause no output
+ to be generated from this command. */
+ if ((fildes[1] != fileno (stdin)) &&
+ (fildes[1] != fileno (stdout)) &&
+ (fildes[1] != fileno (stderr)))
+ close (fildes[1]);
+
+ if ((fildes[0] != fileno (stdin)) &&
+ (fildes[0] != fileno (stdout)) &&
+ (fildes[0] != fileno (stderr)))
+ close (fildes[0]);
+
+ /* The currently executing shell is not interactive. */
+ interactive = 0;
+
+ /* This is a subshell environment. */
+ subshell_environment |= SUBSHELL_COMSUB;
+
+ /* When not in POSIX mode, command substitution does not inherit
+ the -e flag. */
+ if (posixly_correct == 0)
+ exit_immediately_on_error = 0;
+
+ remove_quoted_escapes (string);
+
+ startup_state = 2; /* see if we can avoid a fork */
+ /* Give command substitution a place to jump back to on failure,
+ so we don't go back up to main (). */
+ result = setjmp (top_level);
+
+ /* If we're running a command substitution inside a shell function,
+ trap `return' so we don't return from the function in the subshell
+ and go off to never-never land. */
+ if (result == 0 && return_catch_flag)
+ function_value = setjmp (return_catch);
+ else
+ function_value = 0;
+
+ if (result == ERREXIT)
+ rc = last_command_exit_value;
+ else if (result == EXITPROG)
+ rc = last_command_exit_value;
+ else if (result)
+ rc = EXECUTION_FAILURE;
+ else if (function_value)
+ rc = return_catch_value;
+ else
+ {
+ subshell_level++;
+ rc = parse_and_execute (string, "command substitution", pflags|SEVAL_NOHIST);
+ subshell_level--;
+ }
+
+ last_command_exit_value = rc;
+ rc = run_exit_trap ();
+ exit (rc);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+#if defined (JOB_CONTROL) && defined (PGRP_PIPE)
+ close_pgrp_pipe ();
+#endif /* JOB_CONTROL && PGRP_PIPE */
+
+ close (fildes[1]);
+
+ istring = read_comsub (fildes[0], quoted);
+
+ close (fildes[0]);
+
+ current_command_subst_pid = pid;
+ last_command_exit_value = wait_for (pid);
+ last_command_subst_pid = pid;
+ last_made_pid = old_pid;
+
+#if defined (JOB_CONTROL)
+ /* If last_command_exit_value > 128, then the substituted command
+ was terminated by a signal. If that signal was SIGINT, then send
+ SIGINT to ourselves. This will break out of loops, for instance. */
+ if (last_command_exit_value == (128 + SIGINT) && last_command_exit_signal == SIGINT)
+ kill (getpid (), SIGINT);
+
+ /* wait_for gives the terminal back to shell_pgrp. If some other
+ process group should have it, give it away to that group here.
+ pipeline_pgrp is non-zero only while we are constructing a
+ pipline, so what we are concerned about is whether or not that
+ pipeline was started in the background. A pipeline started in
+ the background should never get the tty back here. */
+#if 0
+ if (interactive && pipeline_pgrp != (pid_t)0 && pipeline_pgrp != last_asynchronous_pid)
+#else
+ if (interactive && pipeline_pgrp != (pid_t)0 && (subshell_environment & SUBSHELL_ASYNC) == 0)
+#endif
+ give_terminal_to (pipeline_pgrp, 0);
+#endif /* JOB_CONTROL */
+
+ return (istring);
+ }
+}
+
+/********************************************************
+ * *
+ * Utility functions for parameter expansion *
+ * *
+ ********************************************************/
+
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+
+static arrayind_t
+array_length_reference (s)
+ char *s;
+{
+ int len;
+ arrayind_t ind;
+ char *t, c;
+ ARRAY *array;
+ SHELL_VAR *var;
+
+ var = array_variable_part (s, &t, &len);
+
+ /* If unbound variables should generate an error, report one and return
+ failure. */
+ if ((var == 0 || array_p (var) == 0) && unbound_vars_is_error)
+ {
+ c = *--t;
+ *t = '\0';
+ err_unboundvar (s);
+ *t = c;
+ return (-1);
+ }
+ else if (var == 0)
+ return 0;
+
+ /* We support a couple of expansions for variables that are not arrays.
+ We'll return the length of the value for v[0], and 1 for v[@] or
+ v[*]. Return 0 for everything else. */
+
+ array = array_p (var) ? array_cell (var) : (ARRAY *)NULL;
+
+ if (ALL_ELEMENT_SUB (t[0]) && t[1] == ']')
+ return (array_p (var) ? array_num_elements (array) : 1);
+
+ ind = array_expand_index (t, len);
+ if (ind < 0)
+ {
+ err_badarraysub (t);
+ return (-1);
+ }
+
+ if (array_p (var))
+ t = array_reference (array, ind);
+ else
+ t = (ind == 0) ? value_cell (var) : (char *)NULL;
+
+ len = STRLEN (t);
+ return (len);
+}
+#endif /* ARRAY_VARS */
+
+static int
+valid_brace_expansion_word (name, var_is_special)
+ char *name;
+ int var_is_special;
+{
+ if (DIGIT (*name) && all_digits (name))
+ return 1;
+ else if (var_is_special)
+ return 1;
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+ else if (valid_array_reference (name))
+ return 1;
+#endif /* ARRAY_VARS */
+ else if (legal_identifier (name))
+ return 1;
+ else
+ return 0;
+}
+
+static int
+chk_atstar (name, quoted, quoted_dollar_atp, contains_dollar_at)
+ char *name;
+ int quoted;
+ int *quoted_dollar_atp, *contains_dollar_at;
+{
+ char *temp1;
+
+ if (name == 0)
+ {
+ if (quoted_dollar_atp)
+ *quoted_dollar_atp = 0;
+ if (contains_dollar_at)
+ *contains_dollar_at = 0;
+ return 0;
+ }
+
+ /* check for $@ and $* */
+ if (name[0] == '@' && name[1] == 0)
+ {
+ if ((quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) && quoted_dollar_atp)
+ *quoted_dollar_atp = 1;
+ if (contains_dollar_at)
+ *contains_dollar_at = 1;
+ return 1;
+ }
+ else if (name[0] == '*' && name[1] == '\0' && quoted == 0)
+ {
+ if (contains_dollar_at)
+ *contains_dollar_at = 1;
+ return 1;
+ }
+
+ /* Now check for ${array[@]} and ${array[*]} */
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+ else if (valid_array_reference (name))
+ {
+ temp1 = xstrchr (name, '[');
+ if (temp1 && temp1[1] == '@' && temp1[2] == ']')
+ {
+ if ((quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) && quoted_dollar_atp)
+ *quoted_dollar_atp = 1;
+ if (contains_dollar_at)
+ *contains_dollar_at = 1;
+ return 1;
+ } /* [ */
+ /* ${array[*]}, when unquoted, should be treated like ${array[@]},
+ which should result in separate words even when IFS is unset. */
+ if (temp1 && temp1[1] == '*' && temp1[2] == ']' && quoted == 0)
+ {
+ if (contains_dollar_at)
+ *contains_dollar_at = 1;
+ return 1;
+ }
+ }
+#endif
+ return 0;
+}
+
+/* Parameter expand NAME, and return a new string which is the expansion,
+ or NULL if there was no expansion.
+ VAR_IS_SPECIAL is non-zero if NAME is one of the special variables in
+ the shell, e.g., "@", "$", "*", etc. QUOTED, if non-zero, means that
+ NAME was found inside of a double-quoted expression. */
+static char *
+parameter_brace_expand_word (name, var_is_special, quoted)
+ char *name;
+ int var_is_special, quoted;
+{
+ char *temp, *tt;
+ intmax_t arg_index;
+ SHELL_VAR *var;
+ int atype;
+
+ /* Handle multiple digit arguments, as in ${11}. */
+
+ if (legal_number (name, &arg_index))
+ {
+ tt = get_dollar_var_value (arg_index);
+ if (tt)
+ temp = (*tt && (quoted & (Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES|Q_HERE_DOCUMENT)))
+ ? quote_string (tt)
+ : quote_escapes (tt);
+ else
+ temp = (char *)NULL;
+ FREE (tt);
+ }
+ else if (var_is_special) /* ${@} */
+ {
+ int sindex;
+ tt = (char *)xmalloc (2 + strlen (name));
+ tt[sindex = 0] = '$';
+ strcpy (tt + 1, name);
+
+ temp = param_expand (tt, &sindex, quoted, (int *)NULL, (int *)NULL,
+ (int *)NULL, (int *)NULL, 0);
+ free (tt);
+ }
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+ else if (valid_array_reference (name))
+ {
+ temp = array_value (name, quoted, &atype);
+ if (atype == 0 && temp)
+ temp = (*temp && (quoted & (Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES|Q_HERE_DOCUMENT)))
+ ? quote_string (temp)
+ : quote_escapes (temp);
+ }
+#endif
+ else if (var = find_variable (name))
+ {
+ if (var_isset (var) && invisible_p (var) == 0)
+ {
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+ temp = array_p (var) ? array_reference (array_cell (var), 0) : value_cell (var);
+#else
+ temp = value_cell (var);
+#endif
+
+ if (temp)
+ temp = (*temp && (quoted & (Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES|Q_HERE_DOCUMENT)))
+ ? quote_string (temp)
+ : quote_escapes (temp);
+ }
+ else
+ temp = (char *)NULL;
+ }
+ else
+ temp = (char *)NULL;
+
+ return (temp);
+}
+
+/* Expand an indirect reference to a variable: ${!NAME} expands to the
+ value of the variable whose name is the value of NAME. */
+static char *
+parameter_brace_expand_indir (name, var_is_special, quoted, quoted_dollar_atp, contains_dollar_at)
+ char *name;
+ int var_is_special, quoted;
+ int *quoted_dollar_atp, *contains_dollar_at;
+{
+ char *temp, *t;
+
+ t = parameter_brace_expand_word (name, var_is_special, quoted);
+ /* Have to dequote here if necessary */
+ if (t)
+ {
+ temp = (quoted & (Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES|Q_HERE_DOCUMENT))
+ ? dequote_string (t)
+ : dequote_escapes (t);
+ free (t);
+ t = temp;
+ }
+ chk_atstar (t, quoted, quoted_dollar_atp, contains_dollar_at);
+ if (t == 0)
+ return (t);
+ temp = parameter_brace_expand_word (t, SPECIAL_VAR(t, 0), quoted);
+ free (t);
+ return temp;
+}
+
+/* Expand the right side of a parameter expansion of the form ${NAMEcVALUE},
+ depending on the value of C, the separating character. C can be one of
+ "-", "+", or "=". QUOTED is true if the entire brace expression occurs
+ between double quotes. */
+static char *
+parameter_brace_expand_rhs (name, value, c, quoted, qdollaratp, hasdollarat)
+ char *name, *value;
+ int c, quoted, *qdollaratp, *hasdollarat;
+{
+ WORD_LIST *l;
+ char *t, *t1, *temp;
+ int hasdol;
+
+ /* XXX - Should we tilde expand in an assignment context if C is `='? */
+ if (*value == '~')
+ temp = bash_tilde_expand (value, 0);
+ else if (xstrchr (value, '~') && unquoted_substring ("=~", value))
+ temp = bash_tilde_expand (value, 1);
+ else
+ temp = savestring (value);
+
+ /* If the entire expression is between double quotes, we want to treat
+ the value as a double-quoted string, with the exception that we strip
+ embedded unescaped double quotes. */
+ if ((quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) && *temp)
+ {
+ hasdol = 0;
+ t = string_extract_double_quoted (temp, &hasdol, 1);
+ free (temp);
+ temp = t;
+ }
+
+ hasdol = 0;
+ /* XXX was 0 not quoted */
+ l = *temp ? expand_string_for_rhs (temp, quoted, &hasdol, (int *)NULL)
+ : (WORD_LIST *)0;
+ if (hasdollarat)
+ *hasdollarat = hasdol || (l && l->next);
+ free (temp);
+ if (l)
+ {
+ /* The expansion of TEMP returned something. We need to treat things
+ slightly differently if HASDOL is non-zero. If we have "$@", the
+ individual words have already been quoted. We need to turn them
+ into a string with the words separated by the first character of
+ $IFS without any additional quoting, so string_list_dollar_at won't
+ do the right thing. We use string_list_dollar_star instead. */
+ temp = (hasdol || l->next) ? string_list_dollar_star (l) : string_list (l);
+
+ /* If l->next is not null, we know that TEMP contained "$@", since that
+ is the only expansion that creates more than one word. */
+ if (qdollaratp && ((hasdol && quoted) || l->next))
+ *qdollaratp = 1;
+ dispose_words (l);
+ }
+ else if ((quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) && hasdol)
+ {
+ /* The brace expansion occurred between double quotes and there was
+ a $@ in TEMP. It does not matter if the $@ is quoted, as long as
+ it does not expand to anything. In this case, we want to return
+ a quoted empty string. */
+ temp = (char *)xmalloc (2);
+ temp[0] = CTLNUL;
+ temp[1] = '\0';
+ }
+ else
+ temp = (char *)NULL;
+
+ if (c == '-' || c == '+')
+ return (temp);
+
+ /* c == '=' */
+ t = temp ? savestring (temp) : savestring ("");
+ t1 = dequote_string (t);
+ free (t);
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+ if (valid_array_reference (name))
+ assign_array_element (name, t1);
+ else
+#endif /* ARRAY_VARS */
+ bind_variable (name, t1);
+ free (t1);
+ return (temp);
+}
+
+/* Deal with the right hand side of a ${name:?value} expansion in the case
+ that NAME is null or not set. If VALUE is non-null it is expanded and
+ used as the error message to print, otherwise a standard message is
+ printed. */
+static void
+parameter_brace_expand_error (name, value)
+ char *name, *value;
+{
+ WORD_LIST *l;
+ char *temp;
+
+ if (value && *value)
+ {
+ if (*value == '~')
+ temp = bash_tilde_expand (value, 0);
+ else if (xstrchr (value, '~') && unquoted_substring ("=~", value))
+ temp = bash_tilde_expand (value, 1);
+ else
+ temp = savestring (value);
+
+ l = expand_string (temp, 0);
+ FREE (temp);
+ temp = string_list (l);
+ report_error ("%s: %s", name, temp ? temp : ""); /* XXX was value not "" */
+ FREE (temp);
+ dispose_words (l);
+ }
+ else
+ report_error (_("%s: parameter null or not set"), name);
+
+ /* Free the data we have allocated during this expansion, since we
+ are about to longjmp out. */
+ free (name);
+ FREE (value);
+}
+
+/* Return 1 if NAME is something for which parameter_brace_expand_length is
+ OK to do. */
+static int
+valid_length_expression (name)
+ char *name;
+{
+ return (name[1] == '\0' || /* ${#} */
+ ((sh_syntaxtab[(unsigned char) name[1]] & CSPECVAR) && name[2] == '\0') || /* special param */
+ (DIGIT (name[1]) && all_digits (name + 1)) || /* ${#11} */
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+ valid_array_reference (name + 1) || /* ${#a[7]} */
+#endif
+ legal_identifier (name + 1)); /* ${#PS1} */
+}
+
+/* Handle the parameter brace expansion that requires us to return the
+ length of a parameter. */
+static intmax_t
+parameter_brace_expand_length (name)
+ char *name;
+{
+ char *t, *newname;
+ intmax_t number, arg_index;
+ WORD_LIST *list;
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+ SHELL_VAR *var;
+#endif
+
+ if (name[1] == '\0') /* ${#} */
+ number = number_of_args ();
+ else if ((name[1] == '@' || name[1] == '*') && name[2] == '\0') /* ${#@}, ${#*} */
+ number = number_of_args ();
+ else if ((sh_syntaxtab[(unsigned char) name[1]] & CSPECVAR) && name[2] == '\0')
+ {
+ /* Take the lengths of some of the shell's special parameters. */
+ switch (name[1])
+ {
+ case '-':
+ t = which_set_flags ();
+ break;
+ case '?':
+ t = itos (last_command_exit_value);
+ break;
+ case '$':
+ t = itos (dollar_dollar_pid);
+ break;
+ case '!':
+ if (last_asynchronous_pid == NO_PID)
+ t = (char *)NULL;
+ else
+ t = itos (last_asynchronous_pid);
+ break;
+ case '#':
+ t = itos (number_of_args ());
+ break;
+ }
+ number = STRLEN (t);
+ FREE (t);
+ }
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+ else if (valid_array_reference (name + 1))
+ number = array_length_reference (name + 1);
+#endif /* ARRAY_VARS */
+ else
+ {
+ number = 0;
+
+ if (legal_number (name + 1, &arg_index)) /* ${#1} */
+ {
+ t = get_dollar_var_value (arg_index);
+ number = STRLEN (t);
+ FREE (t);
+ }
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+ else if ((var = find_variable (name + 1)) && array_p (var))
+ {
+ t = array_reference (array_cell (var), 0);
+ number = STRLEN (t);
+ }
+#endif
+ else /* ${#PS1} */
+ {
+ newname = savestring (name);
+ newname[0] = '$';
+ list = expand_string (newname, Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES);
+ t = list ? string_list (list) : (char *)NULL;
+ free (newname);
+ if (list)
+ dispose_words (list);
+
+ number = STRLEN (t);
+ FREE (t);
+ }
+ }
+
+ return (number);
+}
+
+/* Skip characters in SUBSTR until DELIM. SUBSTR is an arithmetic expression,
+ so we do some ad-hoc parsing of an arithmetic expression to find
+ the first DELIM, instead of using strchr(3). Two rules:
+ 1. If the substring contains a `(', read until closing `)'.
+ 2. If the substring contains a `?', read past one `:' for each `?'.
+*/
+
+static char *
+skiparith (substr, delim)
+ char *substr;
+ int delim;
+{
+ size_t sublen;
+ int skipcol, pcount, i;
+ DECLARE_MBSTATE;
+
+ sublen = strlen (substr);
+ i = skipcol = pcount = 0;
+ while (substr[i])
+ {
+ /* Balance parens */
+ if (substr[i] == LPAREN)
+ {
+ pcount++;
+ i++;
+ continue;
+ }
+ if (substr[i] == RPAREN && pcount)
+ {
+ pcount--;
+ i++;
+ continue;
+ }
+ if (pcount)
+ {
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (substr, sublen, i);
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ /* Skip one `:' for each `?' */
+ if (substr[i] == ':' && skipcol)
+ {
+ skipcol--;
+ i++;
+ continue;
+ }
+ if (substr[i] == delim)
+ break;
+ if (substr[i] == '?')
+ {
+ skipcol++;
+ i++;
+ continue;
+ }
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (substr, sublen, i);
+ }
+
+ return (substr + i);
+}
+
+/* Verify and limit the start and end of the desired substring. If
+ VTYPE == 0, a regular shell variable is being used; if it is 1,
+ then the positional parameters are being used; if it is 2, then
+ VALUE is really a pointer to an array variable that should be used.
+ Return value is 1 if both values were OK, 0 if there was a problem
+ with an invalid expression, or -1 if the values were out of range. */
+static int
+verify_substring_values (value, substr, vtype, e1p, e2p)
+ char *value, *substr;
+ int vtype;
+ intmax_t *e1p, *e2p;
+{
+ char *t, *temp1, *temp2;
+ arrayind_t len;
+ int expok;
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+ ARRAY *a;
+#endif
+
+ /* duplicate behavior of strchr(3) */
+ t = skiparith (substr, ':');
+ if (*t && *t == ':')
+ *t = '\0';
+ else
+ t = (char *)0;
+
+ temp1 = expand_string_if_necessary (substr, Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES, expand_string);
+ *e1p = evalexp (temp1, &expok);
+ free (temp1);
+ if (expok == 0)
+ return (0);
+
+ len = -1; /* paranoia */
+ switch (vtype)
+ {
+ case VT_VARIABLE:
+ case VT_ARRAYMEMBER:
+ len = strlen (value);
+ break;
+ case VT_POSPARMS:
+ len = number_of_args () + 1;
+ break;
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+ case VT_ARRAYVAR:
+ a = (ARRAY *)value;
+ /* For arrays, the first value deals with array indices. */
+ len = array_max_index (a); /* arrays index from 0 to n - 1 */
+ break;
+#endif
+ }
+
+ if (len == -1) /* paranoia */
+ return -1;
+
+ if (*e1p < 0) /* negative offsets count from end */
+ *e1p += len;
+
+ if (*e1p >= len || *e1p < 0)
+ return (-1);
+
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+ /* For arrays, the second offset deals with the number of elements. */
+ if (vtype == VT_ARRAYVAR)
+ len = array_num_elements (a);
+#endif
+
+ if (t)
+ {
+ t++;
+ temp2 = savestring (t);
+ temp1 = expand_string_if_necessary (temp2, Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES, expand_string);
+ free (temp2);
+ t[-1] = ':';
+ *e2p = evalexp (temp1, &expok);
+ free (temp1);
+ if (expok == 0)
+ return (0);
+ if (*e2p < 0)
+ {
+ internal_error (_("%s: substring expression < 0"), t);
+ return (0);
+ }
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+ /* In order to deal with sparse arrays, push the intelligence about how
+ to deal with the number of elements desired down to the array-
+ specific functions. */
+ if (vtype != VT_ARRAYVAR)
+#endif
+ {
+ *e2p += *e1p; /* want E2 chars starting at E1 */
+ if (*e2p > len)
+ *e2p = len;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ *e2p = len;
+
+ return (1);
+}
+
+/* Return the type of variable specified by VARNAME (simple variable,
+ positional param, or array variable). Also return the value specified
+ by VARNAME (value of a variable or a reference to an array element).
+ If this returns VT_VARIABLE, the caller assumes that CTLESC and CTLNUL
+ characters in the value are quoted with CTLESC and takes appropriate
+ steps. For convenience, *VALP is set to the dequoted VALUE. */
+static int
+get_var_and_type (varname, value, quoted, varp, valp)
+ char *varname, *value;
+ int quoted;
+ SHELL_VAR **varp;
+ char **valp;
+{
+ int vtype;
+ char *temp;
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+ SHELL_VAR *v;
+#endif
+
+ /* This sets vtype to VT_VARIABLE or VT_POSPARMS */
+ vtype = (varname[0] == '@' || varname[0] == '*') && varname[1] == '\0';
+ if (vtype == VT_POSPARMS && varname[0] == '*')
+ vtype |= VT_STARSUB;
+ *varp = (SHELL_VAR *)NULL;
+
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+ if (valid_array_reference (varname))
+ {
+ v = array_variable_part (varname, &temp, (int *)0);
+ if (v && array_p (v))
+ { /* [ */
+ if (ALL_ELEMENT_SUB (temp[0]) && temp[1] == ']')
+ {
+ vtype = VT_ARRAYVAR;
+ if (temp[0] == '*')
+ vtype |= VT_STARSUB;
+ *valp = (char *)array_cell (v);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ vtype = VT_ARRAYMEMBER;
+ *valp = array_value (varname, 1, (int *)NULL);
+ }
+ *varp = v;
+ }
+ else
+ return -1;
+ }
+ else if ((v = find_variable (varname)) && array_p (v))
+ {
+ vtype = VT_ARRAYMEMBER;
+ *varp = v;
+ *valp = array_reference (array_cell (v), 0);
+ }
+ else
+#endif
+#if 1
+ {
+ if (value && vtype == VT_VARIABLE)
+ {
+ if (quoted & (Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES|Q_HERE_DOCUMENT))
+ *valp = dequote_string (value);
+ else
+ *valp = dequote_escapes (value);
+ }
+ else
+ *valp = value;
+ }
+#else
+ *valp = (value && vtype == VT_VARIABLE) ? dequote_escapes (value) : value;
+#endif
+
+ return vtype;
+}
+
+/******************************************************/
+/* */
+/* Functions to extract substrings of variable values */
+/* */
+/******************************************************/
+
+#if defined (HANDLE_MULTIBYTE)
+/* Character-oriented rather than strictly byte-oriented substrings. S and
+ E, rather being strict indices into STRING, indicate character (possibly
+ multibyte character) positions that require calculation.
+ Used by the ${param:offset[:length]} expansion. */
+static char *
+mb_substring (string, s, e)
+ char *string;
+ int s, e;
+{
+ char *tt;
+ int start, stop, i, slen;
+ DECLARE_MBSTATE;
+
+ start = 0;
+ slen = STRLEN (string);
+
+ i = s;
+ while (string[start] && i--)
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, start);
+ stop = start;
+ i = e - s;
+ while (string[stop] && i--)
+ ADVANCE_CHAR (string, slen, stop);
+ tt = substring (string, start, stop);
+ return tt;
+}
+#endif
+
+/* Process a variable substring expansion: ${name:e1[:e2]}. If VARNAME
+ is `@', use the positional parameters; otherwise, use the value of
+ VARNAME. If VARNAME is an array variable, use the array elements. */
+
+static char *
+parameter_brace_substring (varname, value, substr, quoted)
+ char *varname, *value, *substr;
+ int quoted;
+{
+ intmax_t e1, e2;
+ int vtype, r, starsub;
+ char *temp, *val, *tt;
+ SHELL_VAR *v;
+
+ if (value == 0)
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+
+ this_command_name = varname;
+
+ vtype = get_var_and_type (varname, value, quoted, &v, &val);
+ if (vtype == -1)
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+
+ starsub = vtype & VT_STARSUB;
+ vtype &= ~VT_STARSUB;
+
+ r = verify_substring_values (val, substr, vtype, &e1, &e2);
+ if (r <= 0)
+ return ((r == 0) ? &expand_param_error : (char *)NULL);
+
+ switch (vtype)
+ {
+ case VT_VARIABLE:
+ case VT_ARRAYMEMBER:
+#if defined (HANDLE_MULTIBYTE)
+ if (MB_CUR_MAX > 1)
+ tt = mb_substring (val, e1, e2);
+ else
+#endif
+ tt = substring (val, e1, e2);
+
+ if (vtype == VT_VARIABLE)
+ FREE (val);
+ if (quoted & (Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES|Q_HERE_DOCUMENT))
+ temp = quote_string (tt);
+ else
+ temp = tt ? quote_escapes (tt) : (char *)NULL;
+ FREE (tt);
+ break;
+ case VT_POSPARMS:
+ tt = pos_params (varname, e1, e2, quoted);
+ if ((quoted & (Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES|Q_HERE_DOCUMENT)) == 0)
+ {
+ temp = tt ? quote_escapes (tt) : (char *)NULL;
+ FREE (tt);
+ }
+ else
+ temp = tt;
+ break;
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+ case VT_ARRAYVAR:
+ /* We want E2 to be the number of elements desired (arrays can be sparse,
+ so verify_substring_values just returns the numbers specified and we
+ rely on array_subrange to understand how to deal with them). */
+ tt = array_subrange (array_cell (v), e1, e2, starsub, quoted);
+ if ((quoted & (Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES|Q_HERE_DOCUMENT)) == 0)
+ {
+ temp = tt ? quote_escapes (tt) : (char *)NULL;
+ FREE (tt);
+ }
+ else
+ temp = tt;
+ break;
+#endif
+ default:
+ temp = (char *)NULL;
+ }
+
+ return temp;
+}
+
+/****************************************************************/
+/* */
+/* Functions to perform pattern substitution on variable values */
+/* */
+/****************************************************************/
+
+char *
+pat_subst (string, pat, rep, mflags)
+ char *string, *pat, *rep;
+ int mflags;
+{
+ char *ret, *s, *e, *str;
+ int rsize, rptr, l, replen, mtype;
+
+ mtype = mflags & MATCH_TYPEMASK;
+
+ /* Special cases:
+ * 1. A null pattern with mtype == MATCH_BEG means to prefix STRING
+ * with REP and return the result.
+ * 2. A null pattern with mtype == MATCH_END means to append REP to
+ * STRING and return the result.
+ */
+ if ((pat == 0 || *pat == 0) && (mtype == MATCH_BEG || mtype == MATCH_END))
+ {
+ replen = STRLEN (rep);
+ l = strlen (string);
+ ret = (char *)xmalloc (replen + l + 2);
+ if (replen == 0)
+ strcpy (ret, string);
+ else if (mtype == MATCH_BEG)
+ {
+ strcpy (ret, rep);
+ strcpy (ret + replen, string);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ strcpy (ret, string);
+ strcpy (ret + l, rep);
+ }
+ return (ret);
+ }
+
+ ret = (char *)xmalloc (rsize = 64);
+ ret[0] = '\0';
+
+ for (replen = STRLEN (rep), rptr = 0, str = string;;)
+ {
+ if (match_pattern (str, pat, mtype, &s, &e) == 0)
+ break;
+ l = s - str;
+ RESIZE_MALLOCED_BUFFER (ret, rptr, (l + replen), rsize, 64);
+
+ /* OK, now copy the leading unmatched portion of the string (from
+ str to s) to ret starting at rptr (the current offset). Then copy
+ the replacement string at ret + rptr + (s - str). Increment
+ rptr (if necessary) and str and go on. */
+ if (l)
+ {
+ strncpy (ret + rptr, str, l);
+ rptr += l;
+ }
+ if (replen)
+ {
+ strncpy (ret + rptr, rep, replen);
+ rptr += replen;
+ }
+ str = e; /* e == end of match */
+
+ if (((mflags & MATCH_GLOBREP) == 0) || mtype != MATCH_ANY)
+ break;
+
+ if (s == e)
+ e++, str++; /* avoid infinite recursion on zero-length match */
+ }
+
+ /* Now copy the unmatched portion of the input string */
+ if (*str)
+ {
+ RESIZE_MALLOCED_BUFFER (ret, rptr, STRLEN(str) + 1, rsize, 64);
+ strcpy (ret + rptr, str);
+ }
+ else
+ ret[rptr] = '\0';
+
+ return ret;
+}
+
+/* Do pattern match and replacement on the positional parameters. */
+static char *
+pos_params_pat_subst (string, pat, rep, mflags)
+ char *string, *pat, *rep;
+ int mflags;
+{
+ WORD_LIST *save, *params;
+ WORD_DESC *w;
+ char *ret, *tt;
+
+ save = params = list_rest_of_args ();
+ if (save == 0)
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+
+ for ( ; params; params = params->next)
+ {
+ ret = pat_subst (params->word->word, pat, rep, mflags);
+ w = make_bare_word (ret);
+ dispose_word (params->word);
+ params->word = w;
+ FREE (ret);
+ }
+
+ if ((mflags & (MATCH_QUOTED|MATCH_STARSUB)) == (MATCH_QUOTED|MATCH_STARSUB))
+ ret = string_list_dollar_star (quote_list (save));
+ else
+ ret = string_list ((mflags & MATCH_QUOTED) ? quote_list (save) : save);
+ dispose_words (save);
+
+ return (ret);
+}
+
+/* Perform pattern substitution on VALUE, which is the expansion of
+ VARNAME. PATSUB is an expression supplying the pattern to match
+ and the string to substitute. QUOTED is a flags word containing
+ the type of quoting currently in effect. */
+static char *
+parameter_brace_patsub (varname, value, patsub, quoted)
+ char *varname, *value, *patsub;
+ int quoted;
+{
+ int vtype, mflags, starsub;
+ char *val, *temp, *pat, *rep, *p, *lpatsub, *tt;
+ SHELL_VAR *v;
+
+ if (value == 0)
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+
+ this_command_name = varname;
+
+ vtype = get_var_and_type (varname, value, quoted, &v, &val);
+ if (vtype == -1)
+ return ((char *)NULL);
+
+ starsub = vtype & VT_STARSUB;
+ vtype &= ~VT_STARSUB;
+
+ mflags = 0;
+ if (*patsub == '/')
+ {
+ mflags |= MATCH_GLOBREP;
+ patsub++;
+ }
+
+ /* Malloc this because expand_string_if_necessary or one of the expansion
+ functions in its call chain may free it on a substitution error. */
+ lpatsub = savestring (patsub);
+
+ if (quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES))
+ mflags |= MATCH_QUOTED;
+
+ if (starsub)
+ mflags |= MATCH_STARSUB;
+
+ if (rep = quoted_strchr (lpatsub, '/', ST_BACKSL))
+ *rep++ = '\0';
+ else
+ rep = (char *)NULL;
+
+ if (rep && *rep == '\0')
+ rep = (char *)NULL;
+
+#if 0
+ /* Expand PAT and REP for command, variable and parameter, arithmetic,
+ and process substitution. Also perform quote removal. Do not
+ perform word splitting or filename generation. */
+ pat = expand_string_if_necessary (lpatsub, (quoted & ~Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES), expand_string_unsplit);
+#else
+ /* Perform the same expansions on the pattern as performed by the
+ pattern removal expansions. */
+ pat = getpattern (lpatsub, quoted, 1);
+#endif
+
+ if (rep)
+ {
+ if ((mflags & MATCH_QUOTED) == 0)
+ rep = expand_string_if_necessary (rep, quoted, expand_string_unsplit);
+ else
+ rep = expand_string_to_string_internal (rep, quoted, expand_string_unsplit);
+ }
+
+ p = pat;
+ if (pat && pat[0] == '#')
+ {
+ mflags |= MATCH_BEG;
+ p++;
+ }
+ else if (pat && pat[0] == '%')
+ {
+ mflags |= MATCH_END;
+ p++;
+ }
+ else
+ mflags |= MATCH_ANY;
+
+ /* OK, we now want to substitute REP for PAT in VAL. If
+ flags & MATCH_GLOBREP is non-zero, the substitution is done
+ everywhere, otherwise only the first occurrence of PAT is
+ replaced. The pattern matching code doesn't understand
+ CTLESC quoting CTLESC and CTLNUL so we use the dequoted variable
+ values passed in (VT_VARIABLE) so the pattern substitution
+ code works right. We need to requote special chars after
+ we're done for VT_VARIABLE and VT_ARRAYMEMBER, and for the
+ other cases if QUOTED == 0, since the posparams and arrays
+ indexed by * or @ do special things when QUOTED != 0. */
+
+ switch (vtype)
+ {
+ case VT_VARIABLE:
+ case VT_ARRAYMEMBER:
+ temp = pat_subst (val, p, rep, mflags);
+ if (vtype == VT_VARIABLE)
+ FREE (val);
+ if (temp)
+ {
+ tt = quote_escapes (temp);
+ free (temp);
+ temp = tt;
+ }
+ break;
+ case VT_POSPARMS:
+ temp = pos_params_pat_subst (val, p, rep, mflags);
+ if (temp && (mflags & MATCH_QUOTED) == 0)
+ {
+ tt = quote_escapes (temp);
+ free (temp);
+ temp = tt;
+ }
+ break;
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+ case VT_ARRAYVAR:
+ temp = array_patsub (array_cell (v), p, rep, mflags);
+ if (temp && (mflags & MATCH_QUOTED) == 0)
+ {
+ tt = quote_escapes (temp);
+ free (temp);
+ temp = tt;
+ }
+ break;
+#endif
+ }
+
+ FREE (pat);
+ FREE (rep);
+ free (lpatsub);
+
+ return temp;
+}
+
+/****************************************************************/
+/* */
+/* Functions to perform parameter expansion on a string */
+/* */
+/****************************************************************/
+
+/* ${[#][!]name[[:]#[#]%[%]-=?+[word][:e1[:e2]]]} */
+static char *
+parameter_brace_expand (string, indexp, quoted, quoted_dollar_atp, contains_dollar_at)
+ char *string;
+ int *indexp, quoted, *quoted_dollar_atp, *contains_dollar_at;
+{
+ int check_nullness, var_is_set, var_is_null, var_is_special;
+ int want_substring, want_indir, want_patsub;
+ char *name, *value, *temp, *temp1;
+ int t_index, sindex, c;
+ intmax_t number;
+
+ value = (char *)NULL;
+ var_is_set = var_is_null = var_is_special = check_nullness = 0;
+ want_substring = want_indir = want_patsub = 0;
+
+ sindex = *indexp;
+ t_index = ++sindex;
+ name = string_extract (string, &t_index, "#%:-=?+/}", EX_VARNAME);
+
+ /* If the name really consists of a special variable, then make sure
+ that we have the entire name. We don't allow indirect references
+ to special variables except `#', `?', `@' and `*'. */
+ if ((sindex == t_index &&
+ (string[t_index] == '-' ||
+ string[t_index] == '?' ||
+ string[t_index] == '#')) ||
+ (sindex == t_index - 1 && string[sindex] == '!' &&
+ (string[t_index] == '#' ||
+ string[t_index] == '?' ||
+ string[t_index] == '@' ||
+ string[t_index] == '*')))
+ {
+ t_index++;
+ free (name);
+ temp1 = string_extract (string, &t_index, "#%:-=?+/}", 0);
+ name = (char *)xmalloc (3 + (strlen (temp1)));
+ *name = string[sindex];
+ if (string[sindex] == '!')
+ {
+ /* indirect reference of $#, $?, $@, or $* */
+ name[1] = string[sindex + 1];
+ strcpy (name + 2, temp1);
+ }
+ else
+ strcpy (name + 1, temp1);
+ free (temp1);
+ }
+ sindex = t_index;
+
+ /* Find out what character ended the variable name. Then
+ do the appropriate thing. */
+ if (c = string[sindex])
+ sindex++;
+
+ /* If c is followed by one of the valid parameter expansion
+ characters, move past it as normal. If not, assume that
+ a substring specification is being given, and do not move
+ past it. */
+ if (c == ':' && VALID_PARAM_EXPAND_CHAR (string[sindex]))
+ {
+ check_nullness++;
+ if (c = string[sindex])
+ sindex++;
+ }
+ else if (c == ':' && string[sindex] != RBRACE)
+ want_substring = 1;
+ else if (c == '/' && string[sindex] != RBRACE)
+ want_patsub = 1;
+
+ /* Catch the valid and invalid brace expressions that made it through the
+ tests above. */
+ /* ${#-} is a valid expansion and means to take the length of $-.
+ Similarly for ${#?} and ${##}... */
+ if (name[0] == '#' && name[1] == '\0' && check_nullness == 0 &&
+ VALID_SPECIAL_LENGTH_PARAM (c) && string[sindex] == RBRACE)
+ {
+ name = (char *)xrealloc (name, 3);
+ name[1] = c;
+ name[2] = '\0';
+ c = string[sindex++];
+ }
+
+ /* ...but ${#%}, ${#:}, ${#=}, ${#+}, and ${#/} are errors. */
+ if (name[0] == '#' && name[1] == '\0' && check_nullness == 0 &&
+ member (c, "%:=+/") && string[sindex] == RBRACE)
+ {
+ temp = (char *)NULL;
+ goto bad_substitution;
+ }
+
+ /* Indirect expansion begins with a `!'. A valid indirect expansion is
+ either a variable name, one of the positional parameters or a special
+ variable that expands to one of the positional parameters. */
+ want_indir = *name == '!' &&
+ (legal_variable_starter ((unsigned char)name[1]) || DIGIT (name[1])
+ || VALID_INDIR_PARAM (name[1]));
+
+ /* Determine the value of this variable. */
+
+ /* Check for special variables, directly referenced. */
+ if (SPECIAL_VAR (name, want_indir))
+ var_is_special++;
+
+ /* Check for special expansion things, like the length of a parameter */
+ if (*name == '#' && name[1])
+ {
+ /* If we are not pointing at the character just after the
+ closing brace, then we haven't gotten all of the name.
+ Since it begins with a special character, this is a bad
+ substitution. Also check NAME for validity before trying
+ to go on. */
+ if (string[sindex - 1] != RBRACE || (valid_length_expression (name) == 0))
+ {
+ temp = (char *)NULL;
+ goto bad_substitution;
+ }
+
+ number = parameter_brace_expand_length (name);
+ free (name);
+
+ *indexp = sindex;
+ return ((number < 0) ? &expand_param_error : itos (number));
+ }
+
+ /* ${@} is identical to $@. */
+ if (name[0] == '@' && name[1] == '\0')
+ {
+ if ((quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) && quoted_dollar_atp)
+ *quoted_dollar_atp = 1;
+
+ if (contains_dollar_at)
+ *contains_dollar_at = 1;
+ }
+
+ /* Process ${!PREFIX*} expansion. */
+ if (want_indir && string[sindex - 1] == RBRACE &&
+ (string[sindex - 2] == '*' || string[sindex - 2] == '@') &&
+ legal_variable_starter ((unsigned char) name[1]))
+ {
+ char **x;
+ WORD_LIST *xlist;
+
+ temp1 = savestring (name + 1);
+ number = strlen (temp1);
+ temp1[number - 1] = '\0';
+ x = all_variables_matching_prefix (temp1);
+ xlist = strvec_to_word_list (x, 0, 0);
+ if (string[sindex - 2] == '*')
+ temp = string_list_dollar_star (xlist);
+ else
+ {
+ temp = string_list_dollar_at (xlist, quoted);
+ if ((quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) && quoted_dollar_atp)
+ *quoted_dollar_atp = 1;
+ if (contains_dollar_at)
+ *contains_dollar_at = 1;
+ }
+ free (x);
+ free (xlist);
+ free (temp1);
+ *indexp = sindex;
+ return (temp);
+ }
+
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+ /* Process ${!ARRAY[@]} and ${!ARRAY[*]} expansion. */ /* [ */
+ if (want_indir && string[sindex - 1] == RBRACE &&
+ string[sindex - 2] == ']' && valid_array_reference (name+1))
+ {
+ char *x, *x1;
+
+ temp1 = savestring (name + 1);
+ x = array_variable_name (temp1, &x1, (int *)0); /* [ */
+ FREE (x);
+ if (ALL_ELEMENT_SUB (x1[0]) && x1[1] == ']')
+ {
+ temp = array_keys (temp1, quoted);
+ if (x1[0] == '@')
+ {
+ if ((quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) && quoted_dollar_atp)
+ *quoted_dollar_atp = 1;
+ if (contains_dollar_at)
+ *contains_dollar_at = 1;
+ }
+
+ free (temp1);
+ *indexp = sindex;
+ return (temp);
+ }
+
+ free (temp1);
+ }
+#endif /* ARRAY_VARS */
+
+ /* Make sure that NAME is valid before trying to go on. */
+ if (valid_brace_expansion_word (want_indir ? name + 1 : name,
+ var_is_special) == 0)
+ {
+ temp = (char *)NULL;
+ goto bad_substitution;
+ }
+
+ if (want_indir)
+ temp = parameter_brace_expand_indir (name + 1, var_is_special, quoted, quoted_dollar_atp, contains_dollar_at);
+ else
+ temp = parameter_brace_expand_word (name, var_is_special, quoted);
+
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+ if (valid_array_reference (name))
+ chk_atstar (name, quoted, quoted_dollar_atp, contains_dollar_at);
+#endif
+
+ var_is_set = temp != (char *)0;
+ var_is_null = check_nullness && (var_is_set == 0 || *temp == 0);
+
+ /* Get the rest of the stuff inside the braces. */
+ if (c && c != RBRACE)
+ {
+ /* Extract the contents of the ${ ... } expansion
+ according to the Posix.2 rules. */
+ value = extract_dollar_brace_string (string, &sindex, quoted, 0);
+ if (string[sindex] == RBRACE)
+ sindex++;
+ else
+ goto bad_substitution;
+ }
+ else
+ value = (char *)NULL;
+
+ *indexp = sindex;
+
+ /* If this is a substring spec, process it and add the result. */
+ if (want_substring)
+ {
+ temp1 = parameter_brace_substring (name, temp, value, quoted);
+ FREE (name);
+ FREE (value);
+ FREE (temp);
+ return (temp1);
+ }
+ else if (want_patsub)
+ {
+ temp1 = parameter_brace_patsub (name, temp, value, quoted);
+ FREE (name);
+ FREE (value);
+ FREE (temp);
+ return (temp1);
+ }
+
+ /* Do the right thing based on which character ended the variable name. */
+ switch (c)
+ {
+ default:
+ case '\0':
+ bad_substitution:
+ report_error (_("%s: bad substitution"), string ? string : "??");
+ FREE (value);
+ FREE (temp);
+ free (name);
+ return &expand_param_error;
+
+ case RBRACE:
+ if (var_is_set == 0 && unbound_vars_is_error)
+ {
+ err_unboundvar (name);
+ FREE (value);
+ FREE (temp);
+ free (name);
+ last_command_exit_value = EXECUTION_FAILURE;
+ return (interactive_shell ? &expand_param_error : &expand_param_fatal);
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case '#': /* ${param#[#]pattern} */
+ case '%': /* ${param%[%]pattern} */
+ if (value == 0 || *value == '\0' || temp == 0 || *temp == '\0')
+ {
+ FREE (value);
+ break;
+ }
+ temp1 = parameter_brace_remove_pattern (name, temp, value, c, quoted);
+ free (temp);
+ free (value);
+ temp = temp1;
+ break;
+
+ case '-':
+ case '=':
+ case '?':
+ case '+':
+ if (var_is_set && var_is_null == 0)
+ {
+ /* If the operator is `+', we don't want the value of the named
+ variable for anything, just the value of the right hand side. */
+
+ if (c == '+')
+ {
+ /* XXX -- if we're double-quoted and the named variable is "$@",
+ we want to turn off any special handling of "$@" --
+ we're not using it, so whatever is on the rhs applies. */
+ if ((quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) && quoted_dollar_atp)
+ *quoted_dollar_atp = 0;
+ if (contains_dollar_at)
+ *contains_dollar_at = 0;
+
+ FREE (temp);
+ if (value)
+ {
+ temp = parameter_brace_expand_rhs (name, value, c,
+ quoted,
+ quoted_dollar_atp,
+ contains_dollar_at);
+ free (value);
+ }
+ else
+ temp = (char *)NULL;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ FREE (value);
+ }
+ /* Otherwise do nothing; just use the value in TEMP. */
+ }
+ else /* VAR not set or VAR is NULL. */
+ {
+ FREE (temp);
+ temp = (char *)NULL;
+ if (c == '=' && var_is_special)
+ {
+ report_error (_("$%s: cannot assign in this way"), name);
+ free (name);
+ free (value);
+ return &expand_param_error;
+ }
+ else if (c == '?')
+ {
+ parameter_brace_expand_error (name, value);
+ return (interactive_shell ? &expand_param_error : &expand_param_fatal);
+ }
+ else if (c != '+')
+ {
+ /* XXX -- if we're double-quoted and the named variable is "$@",
+ we want to turn off any special handling of "$@" --
+ we're not using it, so whatever is on the rhs applies. */
+ if ((quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) && quoted_dollar_atp)
+ *quoted_dollar_atp = 0;
+ if (contains_dollar_at)
+ *contains_dollar_at = 0;
+
+ temp = parameter_brace_expand_rhs (name, value, c, quoted,
+ quoted_dollar_atp,
+ contains_dollar_at);
+ }
+ free (value);
+ }
+
+ break;
+ }
+ free (name);
+ return (temp);
+}
+
+/* Expand a single ${xxx} expansion. The braces are optional. When
+ the braces are used, parameter_brace_expand() does the work,
+ possibly calling param_expand recursively. */
+static char *
+param_expand (string, sindex, quoted, expanded_something,
+ contains_dollar_at, quoted_dollar_at_p, had_quoted_null_p,
+ pflags)
+ char *string;
+ int *sindex, quoted, *expanded_something, *contains_dollar_at;
+ int *quoted_dollar_at_p, *had_quoted_null_p, pflags;
+{
+ char *temp, *temp1, uerror[3];
+ int zindex, t_index, expok;
+ unsigned char c;
+ intmax_t number;
+ SHELL_VAR *var;
+ WORD_LIST *list;
+
+ zindex = *sindex;
+ c = string[++zindex];
+
+ temp = (char *)NULL;
+
+ /* Do simple cases first. Switch on what follows '$'. */
+ switch (c)
+ {
+ /* $0 .. $9? */
+ case '0':
+ case '1':
+ case '2':
+ case '3':
+ case '4':
+ case '5':
+ case '6':
+ case '7':
+ case '8':
+ case '9':
+ temp1 = dollar_vars[TODIGIT (c)];
+ if (unbound_vars_is_error && temp1 == (char *)NULL)
+ {
+ uerror[0] = '$';
+ uerror[1] = c;
+ uerror[2] = '\0';
+ err_unboundvar (uerror);
+ last_command_exit_value = EXECUTION_FAILURE;
+ return (interactive_shell ? &expand_param_error : &expand_param_fatal);
+ }
+#if 1
+ if (temp1)
+ temp = (*temp1 && (quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)))
+ ? quote_string (temp1)
+ : quote_escapes (temp1);
+ else
+ temp = (char *)NULL;
+#else
+ temp = temp1 ? quote_escapes (temp1) : (char *)NULL;
+#endif
+ break;
+
+ /* $$ -- pid of the invoking shell. */
+ case '$':
+ temp = itos (dollar_dollar_pid);
+ break;
+
+ /* $# -- number of positional parameters. */
+ case '#':
+ temp = itos (number_of_args ());
+ break;
+
+ /* $? -- return value of the last synchronous command. */
+ case '?':
+ temp = itos (last_command_exit_value);
+ break;
+
+ /* $- -- flags supplied to the shell on invocation or by `set'. */
+ case '-':
+ temp = which_set_flags ();
+ break;
+
+ /* $! -- Pid of the last asynchronous command. */
+ case '!':
+ /* If no asynchronous pids have been created, expand to nothing.
+ If `set -u' has been executed, and no async processes have
+ been created, this is an expansion error. */
+ if (last_asynchronous_pid == NO_PID)
+ {
+ if (expanded_something)
+ *expanded_something = 0;
+ temp = (char *)NULL;
+ if (unbound_vars_is_error)
+ {
+ uerror[0] = '$';
+ uerror[1] = c;
+ uerror[2] = '\0';
+ err_unboundvar (uerror);
+ last_command_exit_value = EXECUTION_FAILURE;
+ return (interactive_shell ? &expand_param_error : &expand_param_fatal);
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ temp = itos (last_asynchronous_pid);
+ break;
+
+ /* The only difference between this and $@ is when the arg is quoted. */
+ case '*': /* `$*' */
+ list = list_rest_of_args ();
+
+ /* If there are no command-line arguments, this should just
+ disappear if there are other characters in the expansion,
+ even if it's quoted. */
+ if ((quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) && list == 0)
+ temp = (char *)NULL;
+ else if (quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES))
+ {
+ /* If we have "$*" we want to make a string of the positional
+ parameters, separated by the first character of $IFS, and
+ quote the whole string, including the separators. If IFS
+ is unset, the parameters are separated by ' '; if $IFS is
+ null, the parameters are concatenated. */
+#if 0
+ temp = string_list_dollar_star (list);
+#else
+ temp = (quoted & Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES) ? string_list_dollar_star (list) : string_list (list);
+#endif
+ temp1 = quote_string (temp);
+ free (temp);
+ temp = temp1;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* If the $* is not quoted it is identical to $@ */
+ temp = string_list_dollar_at (list, quoted);
+ if (expand_no_split_dollar_star == 0 && contains_dollar_at)
+ *contains_dollar_at = 1;
+ }
+
+ dispose_words (list);
+ break;
+
+ /* When we have "$@" what we want is "$1" "$2" "$3" ... This
+ means that we have to turn quoting off after we split into
+ the individually quoted arguments so that the final split
+ on the first character of $IFS is still done. */
+ case '@': /* `$@' */
+ list = list_rest_of_args ();
+
+ /* We want to flag the fact that we saw this. We can't turn
+ off quoting entirely, because other characters in the
+ string might need it (consider "\"$@\""), but we need some
+ way to signal that the final split on the first character
+ of $IFS should be done, even though QUOTED is 1. */
+ if (quoted_dollar_at_p && (quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)))
+ *quoted_dollar_at_p = 1;
+ if (contains_dollar_at)
+ *contains_dollar_at = 1;
+
+ /* We want to separate the positional parameters with the first
+ character of $IFS in case $IFS is something other than a space.
+ We also want to make sure that splitting is done no matter what --
+ according to POSIX.2, this expands to a list of the positional
+ parameters no matter what IFS is set to. */
+ temp = string_list_dollar_at (list, quoted);
+
+ dispose_words (list);
+ break;
+
+ case LBRACE:
+ temp = parameter_brace_expand (string, &zindex, quoted,
+ quoted_dollar_at_p,
+ contains_dollar_at);
+ if (temp == &expand_param_error || temp == &expand_param_fatal)
+ return (temp);
+
+ /* XXX */
+ /* Quoted nulls should be removed if there is anything else
+ in the string. */
+ /* Note that we saw the quoted null so we can add one back at
+ the end of this function if there are no other characters
+ in the string, discard TEMP, and go on. The exception to
+ this is when we have "${@}" and $1 is '', since $@ needs
+ special handling. */
+ if (temp && QUOTED_NULL (temp))
+ {
+ if (had_quoted_null_p)
+ *had_quoted_null_p = 1;
+ if (*quoted_dollar_at_p == 0)
+ {
+ free (temp);
+ temp = (char *)NULL;
+ }
+
+ }
+
+ goto return0;
+
+ /* Do command or arithmetic substitution. */
+ case LPAREN:
+ /* We have to extract the contents of this paren substitution. */
+ t_index = zindex + 1;
+ temp = extract_command_subst (string, &t_index);
+ zindex = t_index;
+
+ /* For Posix.2-style `$(( ))' arithmetic substitution,
+ extract the expression and pass it to the evaluator. */
+ if (temp && *temp == LPAREN)
+ {
+ char *temp2;
+ temp1 = temp + 1;
+ temp2 = savestring (temp1);
+ t_index = strlen (temp2) - 1;
+
+ if (temp2[t_index] != RPAREN)
+ {
+ free (temp2);
+ goto comsub;
+ }
+
+ /* Cut off ending `)' */
+ temp2[t_index] = '\0';
+
+ /* Expand variables found inside the expression. */
+ temp1 = expand_string_if_necessary (temp2, Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES, expand_string);
+ free (temp2);
+
+arithsub:
+ /* No error messages. */
+ this_command_name = (char *)NULL;
+ number = evalexp (temp1, &expok);
+ free (temp);
+ free (temp1);
+ if (expok == 0)
+ {
+ if (interactive_shell == 0 && posixly_correct)
+ {
+ last_command_exit_value = EXECUTION_FAILURE;
+ return (&expand_param_fatal);
+ }
+ else
+ return (&expand_param_error);
+ }
+ temp = itos (number);
+ break;
+ }
+
+comsub:
+ if (pflags & PF_NOCOMSUB)
+ /* we need zindex+1 because string[zindex] == RPAREN */
+ temp1 = substring (string, *sindex, zindex+1);
+ else
+ temp1 = command_substitute (temp, quoted);
+ FREE (temp);
+ temp = temp1;
+ break;
+
+ /* Do POSIX.2d9-style arithmetic substitution. This will probably go
+ away in a future bash release. */
+ case '[':
+ /* Extract the contents of this arithmetic substitution. */
+ t_index = zindex + 1;
+ temp = extract_arithmetic_subst (string, &t_index);
+ zindex = t_index;
+
+ /* Do initial variable expansion. */
+ temp1 = expand_string_if_necessary (temp, Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES, expand_string);
+
+ goto arithsub;
+
+ default:
+ /* Find the variable in VARIABLE_LIST. */
+ temp = (char *)NULL;
+
+ for (t_index = zindex; (c = string[zindex]) && legal_variable_char (c); zindex++)
+ ;
+ temp1 = (zindex > t_index) ? substring (string, t_index, zindex) : (char *)NULL;
+
+ /* If this isn't a variable name, then just output the `$'. */
+ if (temp1 == 0 || *temp1 == '\0')
+ {
+ FREE (temp1);
+ temp = (char *)xmalloc (2);
+ temp[0] = '$';
+ temp[1] = '\0';
+ if (expanded_something)
+ *expanded_something = 0;
+ goto return0;
+ }
+
+ /* If the variable exists, return its value cell. */
+ var = find_variable (temp1);
+
+ if (var && invisible_p (var) == 0 && var_isset (var))
+ {
+#if defined (ARRAY_VARS)
+ if (array_p (var))
+ {
+ temp = array_reference (array_cell (var), 0);
+ if (temp)
+ temp = (*temp && (quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)))
+ ? quote_string (temp)
+ : quote_escapes (temp);
+ else if (unbound_vars_is_error)
+ goto unbound_variable;
+ }
+ else
+#endif
+ {
+ temp = value_cell (var);
+
+ temp = (*temp && (quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)))
+ ? quote_string (temp)
+ : quote_escapes (temp);
+ }
+
+ free (temp1);
+
+ goto return0;
+ }
+
+ temp = (char *)NULL;
+
+unbound_variable:
+ if (unbound_vars_is_error)
+ err_unboundvar (temp1);
+ else
+ {
+ free (temp1);
+ goto return0;
+ }
+
+ free (temp1);
+ last_command_exit_value = EXECUTION_FAILURE;
+ return ((unbound_vars_is_error && interactive_shell == 0)
+ ? &expand_param_fatal
+ : &expand_param_error);
+ }
+
+ if (string[zindex])
+ zindex++;
+
+return0:
+ *sindex = zindex;
+ return (temp);
+}
+
+/* Make a word list which is the result of parameter and variable
+ expansion, command substitution, arithmetic substitution, and
+ quote removal of WORD. Return a pointer to a WORD_LIST which is
+ the result of the expansion. If WORD contains a null word, the
+ word list returned is also null.
+
+ QUOTED contains flag values defined in shell.h.
+
+ ISEXP is used to tell expand_word_internal that the word should be
+ treated as the result of an expansion. This has implications for
+ how IFS characters in the word are treated.
+
+ CONTAINS_DOLLAR_AT and EXPANDED_SOMETHING are return values; when non-null
+ they point to an integer value which receives information about expansion.
+ CONTAINS_DOLLAR_AT gets non-zero if WORD contained "$@", else zero.
+ EXPANDED_SOMETHING get non-zero if WORD contained any parameter expansions,
+ else zero.
+
+ This only does word splitting in the case of $@ expansion. In that
+ case, we split on ' '. */
+
+/* Values for the local variable quoted_state. */
+#define UNQUOTED 0
+#define PARTIALLY_QUOTED 1
+#define WHOLLY_QUOTED 2
+
+static WORD_LIST *
+expand_word_internal (word, quoted, isexp, contains_dollar_at, expanded_something)
+ WORD_DESC *word;
+ int quoted, isexp;
+ int *contains_dollar_at;
+ int *expanded_something;
+{
+ WORD_LIST *list;
+ WORD_DESC *tword;
+
+ /* The intermediate string that we build while expanding. */
+ char *istring;
+
+ /* The current size of the above object. */
+ int istring_size;
+
+ /* Index into ISTRING. */
+ int istring_index;
+
+ /* Temporary string storage. */
+ char *temp, *temp1;
+
+ /* The text of WORD. */
+ register char *string;
+
+ /* The size of STRING. */
+ size_t string_size;
+
+ /* The index into STRING. */
+ int sindex;
+
+ /* This gets 1 if we see a $@ while quoted. */
+ int quoted_dollar_at;
+
+ /* One of UNQUOTED, PARTIALLY_QUOTED, or WHOLLY_QUOTED, depending on
+ whether WORD contains no quoting characters, a partially quoted
+ string (e.g., "xx"ab), or is fully quoted (e.g., "xxab"). */
+ int quoted_state;
+
+ int had_quoted_null;
+ int has_dollar_at;
+ int tflag;
+
+ register unsigned char c; /* Current character. */
+ int t_index; /* For calls to string_extract_xxx. */
+
+ char twochars[2];
+
+ DECLARE_MBSTATE;
+
+ istring = (char *)xmalloc (istring_size = DEFAULT_INITIAL_ARRAY_SIZE);
+ istring[istring_index = 0] = '\0';
+ quoted_dollar_at = had_quoted_null = has_dollar_at = 0;
+ quoted_state = UNQUOTED;
+
+ string = word->word;
+ if (string == 0)
+ goto finished_with_string;
+ string_size = strlen (string);
+
+ if (contains_dollar_at)
+ *contains_dollar_at = 0;
+
+ /* Begin the expansion. */
+
+ for (sindex = 0; ;)
+ {
+ c = string[sindex];
+
+ /* Case on toplevel character. */
+ switch (c)
+ {
+ case '\0':
+ goto finished_with_string;
+
+ case CTLESC:
+ sindex++;
+#if HANDLE_MULTIBYTE
+ if (MB_CUR_MAX > 1 && string[sindex])
+ {
+ SADD_MBQCHAR_BODY(temp, string, sindex, string_size);
+ }
+ else
+#endif
+ {
+ temp = (char *)xmalloc (3);
+ temp[0] = CTLESC;
+ temp[1] = c = string[sindex];
+ temp[2] = '\0';
+ }
+
+dollar_add_string:
+ if (string[sindex])
+ sindex++;
+
+add_string:
+ if (temp)
+ {
+ istring = sub_append_string (temp, istring, &istring_index, &istring_size);
+ temp = (char *)0;
+ }
+
+ break;
+
+#if defined (PROCESS_SUBSTITUTION)
+ /* Process substitution. */
+ case '<':
+ case '>':
+ {
+ if (string[++sindex] != LPAREN || (quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) || posixly_correct)
+ {
+ sindex--; /* add_character: label increments sindex */
+ goto add_character;
+ }
+ else
+ t_index = sindex + 1; /* skip past both '<' and LPAREN */
+
+ temp1 = extract_process_subst (string, (c == '<') ? "<(" : ">(", &t_index); /*))*/
+ sindex = t_index;
+
+ /* If the process substitution specification is `<()', we want to
+ open the pipe for writing in the child and produce output; if
+ it is `>()', we want to open the pipe for reading in the child
+ and consume input. */
+ temp = temp1 ? process_substitute (temp1, (c == '>')) : (char *)0;
+
+ FREE (temp1);
+
+ goto dollar_add_string;
+ }
+#endif /* PROCESS_SUBSTITUTION */
+
+ case '$':
+ if (expanded_something)
+ *expanded_something = 1;
+
+ has_dollar_at = 0;
+ temp = param_expand (string, &sindex, quoted, expanded_something,
+ &has_dollar_at, "ed_dollar_at,
+ &had_quoted_null,
+ (word->flags & W_NOCOMSUB) ? PF_NOCOMSUB : 0);
+
+ if (temp == &expand_param_error || temp == &expand_param_fatal)
+ {
+ free (string);
+ free (istring);
+ return ((temp == &expand_param_error) ? &expand_word_error
+ : &expand_word_fatal);
+ }
+ if (contains_dollar_at && has_dollar_at)
+ *contains_dollar_at = 1;
+ goto add_string;
+ break;
+
+ case '`': /* Backquoted command substitution. */
+ {
+ t_index = sindex++;
+
+ if (expanded_something)
+ *expanded_something = 1;
+
+ temp = string_extract (string, &sindex, "`", 0);
+ if (word->flags & W_NOCOMSUB)
+ /* sindex + 1 because string[sindex] == '`' */
+ temp1 = substring (string, t_index, sindex + 1);
+ else
+ {
+ de_backslash (temp);
+ temp1 = command_substitute (temp, quoted);
+ }
+ FREE (temp);
+ temp = temp1;
+ goto dollar_add_string;
+ }
+
+ case '\\':
+ if (string[sindex + 1] == '\n')
+ {
+ sindex += 2;
+ continue;
+ }
+
+ c = string[++sindex];
+
+ if (quoted & Q_HERE_DOCUMENT)
+ tflag = CBSHDOC;
+ else if (quoted & Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)
+ tflag = CBSDQUOTE;
+ else
+ tflag = 0;
+
+ if ((quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) && ((sh_syntaxtab[c] & tflag) == 0))
+ {
+ SCOPY_CHAR_I (twochars, '\\', c, string, sindex, string_size);
+ }
+ else if (c == 0)
+ {
+ c = CTLNUL;
+ sindex--; /* add_character: label increments sindex */
+ goto add_character;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ SCOPY_CHAR_I (twochars, CTLESC, c, string, sindex, string_size);
+ }
+
+ sindex++;
+add_twochars:
+ /* BEFORE jumping here, we need to increment sindex if appropriate */
+ RESIZE_MALLOCED_BUFFER (istring, istring_index, 2, istring_size,
+ DEFAULT_ARRAY_SIZE);
+ istring[istring_index++] = twochars[0];
+ istring[istring_index++] = twochars[1];
+ istring[istring_index] = '\0';
+
+ break;
+
+ case '"':
+#if 0
+ if (quoted & (Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES|Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_PATQUOTE))
+#else
+ if (quoted & (Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES|Q_HERE_DOCUMENT))
+#endif
+ goto add_character;
+
+ t_index = ++sindex;
+ temp = string_extract_double_quoted (string, &sindex, 0);
+
+ /* If the quotes surrounded the entire string, then the
+ whole word was quoted. */
+ quoted_state = (t_index == 1 && string[sindex] == '\0')
+ ? WHOLLY_QUOTED
+ : PARTIALLY_QUOTED;
+
+ if (temp && *temp)
+ {
+ tword = make_word (temp); /* XXX */
+ free (temp);
+ temp = (char *)NULL;
+
+ has_dollar_at = 0;
+ list = expand_word_internal (tword, Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES, 0, &has_dollar_at, (int *)NULL);
+
+ if (list == &expand_word_error || list == &expand_word_fatal)
+ {
+ free (istring);
+ free (string);
+ /* expand_word_internal has already freed temp_word->word
+ for us because of the way it prints error messages. */
+ tword->word = (char *)NULL;
+ dispose_word (tword);
+ return list;
+ }
+
+ dispose_word (tword);
+
+ /* "$@" (a double-quoted dollar-at) expands into nothing,
+ not even a NULL word, when there are no positional
+ parameters. */
+ if (list == 0 && has_dollar_at)
+ {
+ quoted_dollar_at++;
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* If we get "$@", we know we have expanded something, so we
+ need to remember it for the final split on $IFS. This is
+ a special case; it's the only case where a quoted string
+ can expand into more than one word. It's going to come back
+ from the above call to expand_word_internal as a list with
+ a single word, in which all characters are quoted and
+ separated by blanks. What we want to do is to turn it back
+ into a list for the next piece of code. */
+ if (list)
+ dequote_list (list);
+
+ if (has_dollar_at)
+ {
+ quoted_dollar_at++;
+ if (contains_dollar_at)
+ *contains_dollar_at = 1;
+ if (expanded_something)
+ *expanded_something = 1;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* What we have is "". This is a minor optimization. */
+ FREE (temp);
+ list = (WORD_LIST *)NULL;
+ }
+
+ /* The code above *might* return a list (consider the case of "$@",
+ where it returns "$1", "$2", etc.). We can't throw away the
+ rest of the list, and we have to make sure each word gets added
+ as quoted. We test on tresult->next: if it is non-NULL, we
+ quote the whole list, save it to a string with string_list, and
+ add that string. We don't need to quote the results of this
+ (and it would be wrong, since that would quote the separators
+ as well), so we go directly to add_string. */
+ if (list)
+ {
+ if (list->next)
+ {
+ /* Testing quoted_dollar_at makes sure that "$@" is
+ split correctly when $IFS does not contain a space. */
+ temp = quoted_dollar_at
+ ? string_list_dollar_at (list, Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)
+ : string_list (quote_list (list));
+ dispose_words (list);
+ goto add_string;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ temp = savestring (list->word->word);
+ dispose_words (list);
+#if 1
+ /* If the string is not a quoted null string, we want
+ to remove any embedded unquoted CTLNUL characters.
+ We do not want to turn quoted null strings back into
+ the empty string, though. We do this because we
+ want to remove any quoted nulls from expansions that
+ contain other characters. For example, if we have
+ x"$*"y or "x$*y" and there are no positional parameters,
+ the $* should expand into nothing. */
+ /* HOWEVER, this fails if the string contains a literal
+ CTLNUL or CTLNUL is contained in the (non-null) expansion
+ of some variable. I'm not sure what to do about this
+ yet. There has to be some way to indicate the difference
+ between the two. An auxiliary data structure might be
+ necessary. */
+ if (QUOTED_NULL (temp) == 0)
+ remove_quoted_nulls (temp); /* XXX */
+#endif
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ temp = (char *)NULL;
+
+ /* We do not want to add quoted nulls to strings that are only
+ partially quoted; we can throw them away. */
+ if (temp == 0 && quoted_state == PARTIALLY_QUOTED)
+ continue;
+
+ add_quoted_string:
+
+ if (temp)
+ {
+ temp1 = temp;
+ temp = quote_string (temp);
+ free (temp1);
+ goto add_string;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Add NULL arg. */
+ c = CTLNUL;
+ sindex--; /* add_character: label increments sindex */
+ goto add_character;
+ }
+
+ /* break; */
+
+ case '\'':
+#if 0
+ if (quoted & (Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES|Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_PATQUOTE))
+#else
+ if (quoted & (Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES|Q_HERE_DOCUMENT))
+#endif
+ goto add_character;
+
+ t_index = ++sindex;
+ temp = string_extract_single_quoted (string, &sindex);
+
+ /* If the entire STRING was surrounded by single quotes,
+ then the string is wholly quoted. */
+ quoted_state = (t_index == 1 && string[sindex] == '\0')
+ ? WHOLLY_QUOTED
+ : PARTIALLY_QUOTED;
+
+ /* If all we had was '', it is a null expansion. */
+ if (*temp == '\0')
+ {
+ free (temp);
+ temp = (char *)NULL;
+ }
+ else
+ remove_quoted_escapes (temp); /* ??? */
+
+ /* We do not want to add quoted nulls to strings that are only
+ partially quoted; such nulls are discarded. */
+ if (temp == 0 && (quoted_state == PARTIALLY_QUOTED))
+ continue;
+
+ /* If we have a quoted null expansion, add a quoted NULL to istring. */
+ if (temp == 0)
+ {
+ c = CTLNUL;
+ sindex--; /* add_character: label increments sindex */
+ goto add_character;
+ }
+ else
+ goto add_quoted_string;
+
+ /* break; */
+
+ default:
+ /* This is the fix for " $@ " */
+ if ((quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) || (isexp == 0 && isifs (c)))
+ {
+ if (string[sindex]) /* from old goto dollar_add_string */
+ sindex++;
+ if (c == 0)
+ {
+ c = CTLNUL;
+ goto add_character;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+#if HANDLE_MULTIBYTE
+ if (MB_CUR_MAX > 1)
+ sindex--;
+
+ if (MB_CUR_MAX > 1)
+ {
+ SADD_MBQCHAR_BODY(temp, string, sindex, string_size);
+ }
+ else
+#endif
+ {
+ twochars[0] = CTLESC;
+ twochars[1] = c;
+ goto add_twochars;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ SADD_MBCHAR (temp, string, sindex, string_size);
+
+ add_character:
+ RESIZE_MALLOCED_BUFFER (istring, istring_index, 1, istring_size,
+ DEFAULT_ARRAY_SIZE);
+ istring[istring_index++] = c;
+ istring[istring_index] = '\0';
+
+ /* Next character. */
+ sindex++;
+ }
+ }
+
+finished_with_string:
+ /* OK, we're ready to return. If we have a quoted string, and
+ quoted_dollar_at is not set, we do no splitting at all; otherwise
+ we split on ' '. The routines that call this will handle what to
+ do if nothing has been expanded. */
+
+ /* Partially and wholly quoted strings which expand to the empty
+ string are retained as an empty arguments. Unquoted strings
+ which expand to the empty string are discarded. The single
+ exception is the case of expanding "$@" when there are no
+ positional parameters. In that case, we discard the expansion. */
+
+ /* Because of how the code that handles "" and '' in partially
+ quoted strings works, we need to make ISTRING into a QUOTED_NULL
+ if we saw quoting characters, but the expansion was empty.
+ "" and '' are tossed away before we get to this point when
+ processing partially quoted strings. This makes "" and $xxx""
+ equivalent when xxx is unset. We also look to see whether we
+ saw a quoted null from a ${} expansion and add one back if we
+ need to. */
+
+ /* If we expand to nothing and there were no single or double quotes
+ in the word, we throw it away. Otherwise, we return a NULL word.
+ The single exception is for $@ surrounded by double quotes when
+ there are no positional parameters. In that case, we also throw
+ the word away. */
+
+ if (*istring == '\0')
+ {
+ if (quoted_dollar_at == 0 && (had_quoted_null || quoted_state == PARTIALLY_QUOTED))
+ {
+ istring[0] = CTLNUL;
+ istring[1] = '\0';
+ tword = make_bare_word (istring);
+ list = make_word_list (tword, (WORD_LIST *)NULL);
+ if (quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES))
+ tword->flags |= W_QUOTED;
+ }
+ /* According to sh, ksh, and Posix.2, if a word expands into nothing
+ and a double-quoted "$@" appears anywhere in it, then the entire
+ word is removed. */
+ else if (quoted_state == UNQUOTED || quoted_dollar_at)
+ list = (WORD_LIST *)NULL;
+#if 0
+ else
+ {
+ tword = make_bare_word (istring);
+ list = make_word_list (tword, (WORD_LIST *)NULL);
+ if (quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES))
+ tword->flags |= W_QUOTED;
+ }
+#else
+ else
+ list = (WORD_LIST *)NULL;
+#endif
+ }
+ else if (word->flags & W_NOSPLIT)
+ {
+ tword = make_bare_word (istring);
+ list = make_word_list (tword, (WORD_LIST *)NULL);
+ if (word->flags & W_ASSIGNMENT)
+ tword->flags |= W_ASSIGNMENT; /* XXX */
+ if (word->flags & W_NOGLOB)
+ tword->flags |= W_NOGLOB; /* XXX */
+ if (quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES))
+ tword->flags |= W_QUOTED;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ char *ifs_chars;
+
+ ifs_chars = (quoted_dollar_at || has_dollar_at) ? ifs_value : (char *)NULL;
+
+ /* If we have $@, we need to split the results no matter what. If
+ IFS is unset or NULL, string_list_dollar_at has separated the
+ positional parameters with a space, so we split on space (we have
+ set ifs_chars to " \t\n" above if ifs is unset). If IFS is set,
+ string_list_dollar_at has separated the positional parameters
+ with the first character of $IFS, so we split on $IFS. */
+ if (has_dollar_at && ifs_chars)
+ list = list_string (istring, *ifs_chars ? ifs_chars : " ", 1);
+ else
+ {
+ tword = make_bare_word (istring);
+ list = make_word_list (tword, (WORD_LIST *)NULL);
+ if ((quoted & (Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES|Q_HERE_DOCUMENT)) || (quoted_state == WHOLLY_QUOTED))
+ tword->flags |= W_QUOTED;
+ if (word->flags & W_ASSIGNMENT)
+ tword->flags |= W_ASSIGNMENT;
+ if (word->flags & W_NOGLOB)
+ tword->flags |= W_NOGLOB;
+ }
+ }
+
+ free (istring);
+ return (list);
+}
+
+/* **************************************************************** */
+/* */
+/* Functions for Quote Removal */
+/* */
+/* **************************************************************** */
+
+/* Perform quote removal on STRING. If QUOTED > 0, assume we are obeying the
+ backslash quoting rules for within double quotes or a here document. */
+char *
+string_quote_removal (string, quoted)
+ char *string;
+ int quoted;
+{
+ size_t slen;
+ char *r, *result_string, *temp, *send;
+ int sindex, tindex, dquote;
+ unsigned char c;
+ DECLARE_MBSTATE;
+
+ /* The result can be no longer than the original string. */
+ slen = strlen (string);
+ send = string + slen;
+
+ r = result_string = (char *)xmalloc (slen + 1);
+
+ for (dquote = sindex = 0; c = string[sindex];)
+ {
+ switch (c)
+ {
+ case '\\':
+ c = string[++sindex];
+ if (((quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) || dquote) && (sh_syntaxtab[c] & CBSDQUOTE) == 0)
+ *r++ = '\\';
+ /* FALLTHROUGH */
+
+ default:
+ SCOPY_CHAR_M (r, string, send, sindex);
+ break;
+
+ case '\'':
+ if ((quoted & (Q_HERE_DOCUMENT|Q_DOUBLE_QUOTES)) || dquote)
+ {
+ *r++ = c;
+ sindex++;
+ break;
+ }
+ tindex = sindex + 1;
+ temp = string_extract_single_quoted (string, &tindex);
+ if (temp)
+ {
+ strcpy (r, temp);
+ r += strlen (r);
+ free (temp);
+ }
+ sindex = tindex;
+ break;
+
+ case '"':
+ dquote = 1 - dquote;
+ sindex++;
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ *r = '\0';
+ return (result_string);
+}
+
+#if 0
+/* UNUSED */
+/* Perform quote removal on word WORD. This allocates and returns a new
+ WORD_DESC *. */
+WORD_DESC *
+word_quote_removal (word, quoted)
+ WORD_DESC *word;
+ int quoted;
+{
+ WORD_DESC *w;
+ char *t;
+
+ t = string_quote_removal (word->word, quoted);
+ w = make_bare_word (t);
+ free (t);
+ return (w);
+}
+
+/* Perform quote removal on all words in LIST. If QUOTED is non-zero,
+ the members of the list are treated as if they are surrounded by
+ double quotes. Return a new list, or NULL if LIST is NULL. */
+WORD_LIST *
+word_list_quote_removal (list, quoted)
+ WORD_LIST *list;
+ int quoted;
+{
+ WORD_LIST *result, *t, *tresult;
+
+ for (t = list, result = (WORD_LIST *)NULL; t; t = t->next)
+ {
+ tresult = make_word_list (word_quote_removal (t->word, quoted), (WORD_LIST *)NULL);
+ result = (WORD_LIST *) list_append (result, tresult);
+ }
+ return (result);
+}
+#endif
+
+/*******************************************
+ * *
+ * Functions to perform word splitting *
+ * *
+ *******************************************/
+
+void
+setifs (v)
+ SHELL_VAR *v;
+{
+ char *t;
+ unsigned char uc;
+
+ ifs_var = v;
+ ifs_value = v ? value_cell (v) : " \t\n";
+
+ /* Should really merge ifs_cmap with sh_syntaxtab. */
+ memset (ifs_cmap, '\0', sizeof (ifs_cmap));
+ for (t = ifs_value ; t && *t; t++)
+ {
+ uc = *t;
+ ifs_cmap[uc] = 1;
+ }
+
+ ifs_firstc = ifs_value ? *ifs_value : 0;
+}
+
+char *
+getifs ()
+{
+ return ifs_value;
+}
+
+/* This splits a single word into a WORD LIST on $IFS, but only if the word
+ is not quoted. list_string () performs quote removal for us, even if we
+ don't do any splitting. */
+WORD_LIST *
+word_split (w, ifs_chars)
+ WORD_DESC *w;
+ char *ifs_chars;
+{
+ WORD_LIST *result;
+
+ if (w)
+ {
+ char *xifs;
+
+ xifs = ((w->flags & W_QUOTED) || ifs_chars == 0) ? "" : ifs_chars;
+ result = list_string (w->word, xifs, w->flags & W_QUOTED);
+ }
+ else
+ result = (WORD_LIST *)NULL;
+
+ return (result);
+}
+
+/* Perform word splitting on LIST and return the RESULT. It is possible
+ to return (WORD_LIST *)NULL. */
+static WORD_LIST *
+word_list_split (list)
+ WORD_LIST *list;
+{
+ WORD_LIST *result, *t, *tresult;
+
+ for (t = list, result = (WORD_LIST *)NULL; t; t = t->next)
+ {
+ tresult = word_split (t->word, ifs_value);
+ result = (WORD_LIST *) list_append (result, tresult);
+ }
+ return (result);
+}
+
+/**************************************************
+ * *
+ * Functions to expand an entire WORD_LIST *
+ * *
+ **************************************************/
+
+/* Do any word-expansion-specific cleanup and jump to top_level */
+static void
+exp_jump_to_top_level (v)
+ int v;
+{
+ /* Cleanup code goes here. */
+ expand_no_split_dollar_star = 0; /* XXX */
+ expanding_redir = 0;
+
+ jump_to_top_level (v);
+}
+
+/* Put NLIST (which is a WORD_LIST * of only one element) at the front of
+ ELIST, and set ELIST to the new list. */
+#define PREPEND_LIST(nlist, elist) \
+ do { nlist->next = elist; elist = nlist; } while (0)
+
+/* Separate out any initial variable assignments from TLIST. If set -k has
+ been executed, remove all assignment statements from TLIST. Initial
+ variable assignments and other environment assignments are placed
+ on SUBST_ASSIGN_VARLIST. */
+static WORD_LIST *
+separate_out_assignments (tlist)
+ WORD_LIST *tlist;
+{
+ register WORD_LIST *vp, *lp;
+
+ if (!tlist)
+ return ((WORD_LIST *)NULL);
+
+ if (subst_assign_varlist)
+ dispose_words (subst_assign_varlist); /* Clean up after previous error */
+
+ subst_assign_varlist = (WORD_LIST *)NULL;
+ vp = lp = tlist;
+
+ /* Separate out variable assignments at the start of the command.
+ Loop invariant: vp->next == lp
+ Loop postcondition:
+ lp = list of words left after assignment statements skipped
+ tlist = original list of words
+ */
+ while (lp && (lp->word->flags & W_ASSIGNMENT))
+ {
+ vp = lp;
+ lp = lp->next;
+ }
+
+ /* If lp != tlist, we have some initial assignment statements.
+ We make SUBST_ASSIGN_VARLIST point to the list of assignment
+ words and TLIST point to the remaining words. */
+ if (lp != tlist)
+ {
+ subst_assign_varlist = tlist;
+ /* ASSERT(vp->next == lp); */
+ vp->next = (WORD_LIST *)NULL; /* terminate variable list */
+ tlist = lp; /* remainder of word list */
+ }
+
+ /* vp == end of variable list */
+ /* tlist == remainder of original word list without variable assignments */
+ if (!tlist)
+ /* All the words in tlist were assignment statements */
+ return ((WORD_LIST *)NULL);
+
+ /* ASSERT(tlist != NULL); */
+ /* ASSERT((tlist->word->flags & W_ASSIGNMENT) == 0); */
+
+ /* If the -k option is in effect, we need to go through the remaining
+ words, separate out the assignment words, and place them on
+ SUBST_ASSIGN_VARLIST. */
+ if (place_keywords_in_env)
+ {
+ WORD_LIST *tp; /* tp == running pointer into tlist */
+
+ tp = tlist;
+ lp = tlist->next;
+
+ /* Loop Invariant: tp->next == lp */
+ /* Loop postcondition: tlist == word list without assignment statements */
+ while (lp)
+ {
+ if (lp->word->flags & W_ASSIGNMENT)
+ {
+ /* Found an assignment statement, add this word to end of
+ subst_assign_varlist (vp). */
+ if (!subst_assign_varlist)
+ subst_assign_varlist = vp = lp;
+ else
+ {
+ vp->next = lp;
+ vp = lp;
+ }
+
+ /* Remove the word pointed to by LP from TLIST. */
+ tp->next = lp->next;
+ /* ASSERT(vp == lp); */
+ lp->next = (WORD_LIST *)NULL;
+ lp = tp->next;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ tp = lp;
+ lp = lp->next;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ return (tlist);
+}
+
+#define WEXP_VARASSIGN 0x001
+#define WEXP_BRACEEXP 0x002
+#define WEXP_TILDEEXP 0x004
+#define WEXP_PARAMEXP 0x008
+#define WEXP_PATHEXP 0x010
+
+/* All of the expansions, including variable assignments at the start of
+ the list. */
+#define WEXP_ALL (WEXP_VARASSIGN|WEXP_BRACEEXP|WEXP_TILDEEXP|WEXP_PARAMEXP|WEXP_PATHEXP)
+
+/* All of the expansions except variable assignments at the start of
+ the list. */
+#define WEXP_NOVARS (WEXP_BRACEEXP|WEXP_TILDEEXP|WEXP_PARAMEXP|WEXP_PATHEXP)
+
+/* All of the `shell expansions': brace expansion, tilde expansion, parameter
+ expansion, command substitution, arithmetic expansion, word splitting, and
+ quote removal. */
+#define WEXP_SHELLEXP (WEXP_BRACEEXP|WEXP_TILDEEXP|WEXP_PARAMEXP)
+
+/* Take the list of words in LIST and do the various substitutions. Return
+ a new list of words which is the expanded list, and without things like
+ variable assignments. */
+
+WORD_LIST *
+expand_words (list)
+ WORD_LIST *list;
+{
+ return (expand_word_list_internal (list, WEXP_ALL));
+}
+
+/* Same as expand_words (), but doesn't hack variable or environment
+ variables. */
+WORD_LIST *
+expand_words_no_vars (list)
+ WORD_LIST *list;
+{
+ return (expand_word_list_internal (list, WEXP_NOVARS));
+}
+
+WORD_LIST *
+expand_words_shellexp (list)
+ WORD_LIST *list;
+{
+ return (expand_word_list_internal (list, WEXP_SHELLEXP));
+}
+
+static WORD_LIST *
+glob_expand_word_list (tlist, eflags)
+ WORD_LIST *tlist;
+ int eflags;
+{
+ char **glob_array, *temp_string;
+ register int glob_index;
+ WORD_LIST *glob_list, *output_list, *disposables, *next;
+ WORD_DESC *tword;
+
+ output_list = disposables = (WORD_LIST *)NULL;
+ glob_array = (char **)NULL;
+ while (tlist)
+ {
+ /* For each word, either globbing is attempted or the word is
+ added to orig_list. If globbing succeeds, the results are
+ added to orig_list and the word (tlist) is added to the list
+ of disposable words. If globbing fails and failed glob
+ expansions are left unchanged (the shell default), the
+ original word is added to orig_list. If globbing fails and
+ failed glob expansions are removed, the original word is
+ added to the list of disposable words. orig_list ends up
+ in reverse order and requires a call to REVERSE_LIST to
+ be set right. After all words are examined, the disposable
+ words are freed. */
+ next = tlist->next;
+
+ /* If the word isn't an assignment and contains an unquoted
+ pattern matching character, then glob it. */
+ if ((tlist->word->flags & W_NOGLOB) == 0 &&
+ unquoted_glob_pattern_p (tlist->word->word))
+ {
+ glob_array = shell_glob_filename (tlist->word->word);
+
+ /* Handle error cases.
+ I don't think we should report errors like "No such file
+ or directory". However, I would like to report errors
+ like "Read failed". */
+
+ if (glob_array == 0 || GLOB_FAILED (glob_array))
+ {
+ glob_array = (char **)xmalloc (sizeof (char *));
+ glob_array[0] = (char *)NULL;
+ }
+
+ /* Dequote the current word in case we have to use it. */
+ if (glob_array[0] == NULL)
+ {
+ temp_string = dequote_string (tlist->word->word);
+ free (tlist->word->word);
+ tlist->word->word = temp_string;
+ }
+
+ /* Make the array into a word list. */
+ glob_list = (WORD_LIST *)NULL;
+ for (glob_index = 0; glob_array[glob_index]; glob_index++)
+ {
+ tword = make_bare_word (glob_array[glob_index]);
+ tword->flags |= W_GLOBEXP; /* XXX */
+ glob_list = make_word_list (tword, glob_list);
+ }
+
+ if (glob_list)
+ {
+ output_list = (WORD_LIST *)list_append (glob_list, output_list);
+ PREPEND_LIST (tlist, disposables);
+ }
+ else if (fail_glob_expansion != 0)
+ {
+ report_error (_("no match: %s"), tlist->word->word);
+ jump_to_top_level (DISCARD);
+ }
+ else if (allow_null_glob_expansion == 0)
+ {
+ /* Failed glob expressions are left unchanged. */
+ PREPEND_LIST (tlist, output_list);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Failed glob expressions are removed. */
+ PREPEND_LIST (tlist, disposables);
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Dequote the string. */
+ temp_string = dequote_string (tlist->word->word);
+ free (tlist->word->word);
+ tlist->word->word = temp_string;
+ PREPEND_LIST (tlist, output_list);
+ }
+
+ strvec_dispose (glob_array);
+ glob_array = (char **)NULL;
+
+ tlist = next;
+ }
+
+ if (disposables)
+ dispose_words (disposables);
+
+ if (output_list)
+ output_list = REVERSE_LIST (output_list, WORD_LIST *);
+
+ return (output_list);
+}
+
+#if defined (BRACE_EXPANSION)
+static WORD_LIST *
+brace_expand_word_list (tlist, eflags)
+ WORD_LIST *tlist;
+ int eflags;
+{
+ register char **expansions;
+ char *temp_string;
+ WORD_LIST *disposables, *output_list, *next;
+ WORD_DESC *w;
+ int eindex;
+
+ for (disposables = output_list = (WORD_LIST *)NULL; tlist; tlist = next)
+ {
+ next = tlist->next;
+
+ /* Only do brace expansion if the word has a brace character. If
+ not, just add the word list element to BRACES and continue. In
+ the common case, at least when running shell scripts, this will
+ degenerate to a bunch of calls to `xstrchr', and then what is
+ basically a reversal of TLIST into BRACES, which is corrected
+ by a call to REVERSE_LIST () on BRACES when the end of TLIST
+ is reached. */
+ if (xstrchr (tlist->word->word, LBRACE))
+ {
+ expansions = brace_expand (tlist->word->word);
+
+ for (eindex = 0; temp_string = expansions[eindex]; eindex++)
+ {
+ w = make_word (temp_string);
+ /* If brace expansion didn't change the word, preserve
+ the flags. We may want to preserve the flags
+ unconditionally someday -- XXX */
+ if (STREQ (temp_string, tlist->word->word))
+ w->flags = tlist->word->flags;
+ output_list = make_word_list (w, output_list);
+ free (expansions[eindex]);
+ }
+ free (expansions);
+
+ /* Add TLIST to the list of words to be freed after brace
+ expansion has been performed. */
+ PREPEND_LIST (tlist, disposables);
+ }
+ else
+ PREPEND_LIST (tlist, output_list);
+ }
+
+ if (disposables)
+ dispose_words (disposables);
+
+ if (output_list)
+ output_list = REVERSE_LIST (output_list, WORD_LIST *);
+
+ return (output_list);
+}
+#endif
+
+static WORD_LIST *
+shell_expand_word_list (tlist, eflags)
+ WORD_LIST *tlist;
+ int eflags;
+{
+ WORD_LIST *expanded, *orig_list, *new_list, *next, *temp_list;
+ int expanded_something, has_dollar_at;
+ char *temp_string;
+
+ /* We do tilde expansion all the time. This is what 1003.2 says. */
+ new_list = (WORD_LIST *)NULL;
+ for (orig_list = tlist; tlist; tlist = next)
+ {
+ temp_string = tlist->word->word;
+
+ next = tlist->next;
+
+ /* Posix.2 section 3.6.1 says that tildes following `=' in words
+ which are not assignment statements are not expanded. If the
+ shell isn't in posix mode, though, we perform tilde expansion
+ on `likely candidate' unquoted assignment statements (flags
+ include W_ASSIGNMENT but not W_QUOTED). A likely candidate
+ contains an unquoted :~ or =~. Something to think about: we
+ now have a flag that says to perform tilde expansion on arguments
+ to `assignment builtins' like declare and export that look like
+ assignment statements. We now do tilde expansion on such words
+ even in POSIX mode. */
+ if (((tlist->word->flags & (W_ASSIGNMENT|W_QUOTED)) == W_ASSIGNMENT) &&
+ (posixly_correct == 0 || (tlist->word->flags & W_TILDEEXP)) &&
+ (unquoted_substring ("=~", temp_string) || unquoted_substring (":~", temp_string)))
+ {
+ tlist->word->word = bash_tilde_expand (temp_string, 1);
+ free (temp_string);
+ }
+ else if (temp_string[0] == '~')
+ {
+ tlist->word->word = bash_tilde_expand (temp_string, 0);
+ free (temp_string);
+ }
+
+ expanded_something = 0;
+ expanded = expand_word_internal
+ (tlist->word, 0, 0, &has_dollar_at, &expanded_something);
+
+ if (expanded == &expand_word_error || expanded == &expand_word_fatal)
+ {
+ /* By convention, each time this error is returned,
+ tlist->word->word has already been freed. */
+ tlist->word->word = (char *)NULL;
+
+ /* Dispose our copy of the original list. */
+ dispose_words (orig_list);
+ /* Dispose the new list we're building. */
+ dispose_words (new_list);
+
+ last_command_exit_value = EXECUTION_FAILURE;
+ if (expanded == &expand_word_error)
+ exp_jump_to_top_level (DISCARD);
+ else
+ exp_jump_to_top_level (FORCE_EOF);
+ }
+
+ /* Don't split words marked W_NOSPLIT. */
+ if (expanded_something && (tlist->word->flags & W_NOSPLIT) == 0)
+ {
+ temp_list = word_list_split (expanded);
+ dispose_words (expanded);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* If no parameter expansion, command substitution, process
+ substitution, or arithmetic substitution took place, then
+ do not do word splitting. We still have to remove quoted
+ null characters from the result. */
+ word_list_remove_quoted_nulls (expanded);
+ temp_list = expanded;
+ }
+
+ expanded = REVERSE_LIST (temp_list, WORD_LIST *);
+ new_list = (WORD_LIST *)list_append (expanded, new_list);
+ }
+
+ if (orig_list)
+ dispose_words (orig_list);
+
+ if (new_list)
+ new_list = REVERSE_LIST (new_list, WORD_LIST *);
+
+ return (new_list);
+}
+
+/* The workhorse for expand_words () and expand_words_no_vars ().
+ First arg is LIST, a WORD_LIST of words.
+ Second arg EFLAGS is a flags word controlling which expansions are
+ performed.
+
+ This does all of the substitutions: brace expansion, tilde expansion,
+ parameter expansion, command substitution, arithmetic expansion,
+ process substitution, word splitting, and pathname expansion, according
+ to the bits set in EFLAGS. Words with the W_QUOTED or W_NOSPLIT bits
+ set, or for which no expansion is done, do not undergo word splitting.
+ Words with the W_NOGLOB bit set do not undergo pathname expansion. */
+static WORD_LIST *
+expand_word_list_internal (list, eflags)
+ WORD_LIST *list;
+ int eflags;
+{
+ WORD_LIST *new_list, *temp_list;
+ int tint;
+
+ if (list == 0)
+ return ((WORD_LIST *)NULL);
+
+ garglist = new_list = copy_word_list (list);
+ if (eflags & WEXP_VARASSIGN)
+ {
+ garglist = new_list = separate_out_assignments (new_list);
+ if (new_list == 0)
+ {
+ if (subst_assign_varlist)
+ {
+ /* All the words were variable assignments, so they are placed
+ into the shell's environment. */
+ for (temp_list = subst_assign_varlist; temp_list; temp_list = temp_list->next)
+ {
+ this_command_name = (char *)NULL; /* no arithmetic errors */
+ tint = do_assignment (temp_list->word->word);
+ /* Variable assignment errors in non-interactive shells
+ running in Posix.2 mode cause the shell to exit. */
+ if (tint == 0)
+ {
+ last_command_exit_value = EXECUTION_FAILURE;
+ if (interactive_shell == 0 && posixly_correct)
+ exp_jump_to_top_level (FORCE_EOF);
+ else
+ exp_jump_to_top_level (DISCARD);
+ }
+ }
+ dispose_words (subst_assign_varlist);
+ subst_assign_varlist = (WORD_LIST *)NULL;
+ }
+ return ((WORD_LIST *)NULL);
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Begin expanding the words that remain. The expansions take place on
+ things that aren't really variable assignments. */
+
+#if defined (BRACE_EXPANSION)
+ /* Do brace expansion on this word if there are any brace characters
+ in the string. */
+ if ((eflags & WEXP_BRACEEXP) && brace_expansion && new_list)
+ new_list = brace_expand_word_list (new_list, eflags);
+#endif /* BRACE_EXPANSION */
+
+ /* Perform the `normal' shell expansions: tilde expansion, parameter and
+ variable substitution, command substitution, arithmetic expansion,
+ and word splitting. */
+ new_list = shell_expand_word_list (new_list, eflags);
+
+ /* Okay, we're almost done. Now let's just do some filename
+ globbing. */
+ if (new_list)
+ {
+ if ((eflags & WEXP_PATHEXP) && disallow_filename_globbing == 0)
+ /* Glob expand the word list unless globbing has been disabled. */
+ new_list = glob_expand_word_list (new_list, eflags);
+ else
+ /* Dequote the words, because we're not performing globbing. */
+ new_list = dequote_list (new_list);
+ }
+
+ if ((eflags & WEXP_VARASSIGN) && subst_assign_varlist)
+ {
+ sh_assign_func_t *assign_func;
+
+ /* If the remainder of the words expand to nothing, Posix.2 requires
+ that the variable and environment assignments affect the shell's
+ environment. */
+ assign_func = new_list ? assign_in_env : do_assignment;
+
+ for (temp_list = subst_assign_varlist; temp_list; temp_list = temp_list->next)
+ {
+ this_command_name = (char *)NULL;
+ tint = (*assign_func) (temp_list->word->word);
+ /* Variable assignment errors in non-interactive shells running
+ in Posix.2 mode cause the shell to exit. */
+ if (tint == 0 && assign_func == do_assignment)
+ {
+ last_command_exit_value = EXECUTION_FAILURE;
+ if (interactive_shell == 0 && posixly_correct)
+ exp_jump_to_top_level (FORCE_EOF);
+ else
+ exp_jump_to_top_level (DISCARD);
+ }
+ }
+
+ dispose_words (subst_assign_varlist);
+ subst_assign_varlist = (WORD_LIST *)NULL;
+ }
+
+#if 0
+ tint = list_length (new_list) + 1;
+ RESIZE_MALLOCED_BUFFER (glob_argv_flags, 0, tint, glob_argv_flags_size, 16);
+ for (tint = 0, temp_list = new_list; temp_list; temp_list = temp_list->next)
+ glob_argv_flags[tint++] = (temp_list->word->flags & W_GLOBEXP) ? '1' : '0';
+ glob_argv_flags[tint] = '\0';
+#endif
+
+ return (new_list);
+}
projects / thirdparty / bash.git / commitdiff
